TOC 
Network Working GroupFebruary 13, 2014
Internet-Draft 
Intended status: Informational 
Expires: August 17, 2014 


List of SMIv2 Textual Conventions
textual-convention-list.txt

Abstract

List of SMIv2 Textual Conventions. This file has been generated by smidump. Do not edit.

Status of this Memo

This Internet-Draft is submitted in full conformance with the provisions of BCP 78 and BCP 79.

Internet-Drafts are working documents of the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). Note that other groups may also distribute working documents as Internet-Drafts. The list of current Internet-Drafts is at http://datatracker.ietf.org/drafts/current/.

Internet-Drafts are draft documents valid for a maximum of six months and may be updated, replaced, or obsoleted by other documents at any time. It is inappropriate to use Internet-Drafts as reference material or to cite them other than as “work in progress.”

This Internet-Draft will expire on August 17, 2014.

Copyright Notice

Copyright (c) 2014 IETF Trust and the persons identified as the document authors. All rights reserved.

This document is subject to BCP 78 and the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info) in effect on the date of publication of this document. Please review these documents carefully, as they describe your rights and restrictions with respect to this document. Code Components extracted from this document must include Simplified BSD License text as described in Section 4.e of the Trust Legal Provisions and are provided without warranty as described in the Simplified BSD License.

This document may contain material from IETF Documents or IETF Contributions published or made publicly available before November 10, 2008. The person(s) controlling the copyright in some of this material may not have granted the IETF Trust the right to allow modifications of such material outside the IETF Standards Process. Without obtaining an adequate license from the person(s) controlling the copyright in such materials, this document may not be modified outside the IETF Standards Process, and derivative works of it may not be created outside the IETF Standards Process, except to format it for publication as an RFC or to translate it into languages other than English.



Table of Contents

1.  ACCOUNTING-CONTROL-MIB (revision 1998-09-28 10:00)
    1.1.  DataCollectionSubtree
    1.2.  DataCollectionList
    1.3.  FileIndex
2.  ADSL2-LINE-TC-MIB (revision 2006-10-04 00:00)
    2.1.  Adsl2Unit
    2.2.  Adsl2Direction
    2.3.  Adsl2TransmissionModeType
    2.4.  Adsl2RaMode
    2.5.  Adsl2InitResult
    2.6.  Adsl2OperationModes
    2.7.  Adsl2PowerMngState
    2.8.  Adsl2ConfPmsForce
    2.9.  Adsl2LConfProfPmMode
    2.10.  Adsl2LineLdsf
    2.11.  Adsl2LdsfResult
    2.12.  Adsl2SymbolProtection
    2.13.  Adsl2MaxBer
    2.14.  Adsl2ScMaskDs
    2.15.  Adsl2ScMaskUs
    2.16.  Adsl2RfiDs
    2.17.  Adsl2PsdMaskDs
    2.18.  Adsl2PsdMaskUs
    2.19.  Adsl2Tssi
    2.20.  Adsl2LastTransmittedState
    2.21.  Adsl2LineStatus
    2.22.  Adsl2ChAtmStatus
    2.23.  Adsl2ChPtmStatus
3.  ADSL-LINE-EXT-MIB (revision 2002-12-10 00:00)
    3.1.  AdslTransmissionModeType
4.  ADSL-TC-MIB (revision 1999-08-19 00:00)
    4.1.  AdslLineCodingType
    4.2.  AdslPerfCurrDayCount
    4.3.  AdslPerfPrevDayCount
    4.4.  AdslPerfTimeElapsed
5.  AGENTX-MIB (revision 2000-01-10 00:00)
    5.1.  AgentxTAddress
6.  AGGREGATE-MIB (revision 2006-04-27 00:00)
    6.1.  AggrMOErrorStatus
    6.2.  AggrMOValue
    6.3.  AggrMOCompressedValue
7.  ALARM-MIB (revision 2004-09-09 00:00)
    7.1.  ResourceId
    7.2.  LocalSnmpEngineOrZeroLenStr
8.  APM-MIB (revision 2004-02-19 00:00)
    8.1.  AppLocalIndex
    8.2.  ProtocolDirNetworkAddress
    8.3.  DataSourceOrZero
    8.4.  RmonClientID
    8.5.  TransactionAggregationType
9.  APPC-MIB (revision 1995-12-15 00:00)
    9.1.  SnaSenseData
10.  APPLICATION-MIB (revision 1998-11-17 18:15)
    10.1.  Unsigned64TC
    10.2.  ApplTAddress
11.  APPN-MIB (revision 1998-07-15 18:00)
    11.1.  SnaNodeIdentification
    11.2.  SnaControlPointName
    11.3.  SnaClassOfServiceName
    11.4.  SnaModeName
    11.5.  SnaSenseData
    11.6.  DisplayableDlcAddress
    11.7.  AppnNodeCounter
    11.8.  AppnPortCounter
    11.9.  AppnLinkStationCounter
    11.10.  AppnTopologyEntryTimeLeft
    11.11.  AppnTgDlcData
    11.12.  AppnTgEffectiveCapacity
    11.13.  AppnTgSecurity
    11.14.  AppnTgDelay
12.  APS-MIB (revision 2003-02-28 00:00)
    12.1.  ApsK1K2
    12.2.  ApsSwitchCommand
    12.3.  ApsControlCommand
13.  ARC-MIB (revision 2004-09-09 00:00)
    13.1.  IANAItuProbableCauseOrZero
14.  ATM-TC-MIB (revision 1998-10-19 02:00)
    14.1.  AtmAddr
    14.2.  AtmConnCastType
    14.3.  AtmConnKind
    14.4.  AtmIlmiNetworkPrefix
    14.5.  AtmInterfaceType
    14.6.  AtmServiceCategory
    14.7.  AtmSigDescrParamIndex
    14.8.  AtmTrafficDescrParamIndex
    14.9.  AtmVcIdentifier
    14.10.  AtmVpIdentifier
    14.11.  AtmVorXAdminStatus
    14.12.  AtmVorXLastChange
    14.13.  AtmVorXOperStatus
15.  BLDG-HVAC-MIB (revision 2003-03-27 00:00)
    15.1.  BldgHvacOperation
16.  BRIDGE-MIB (revision 2005-09-19 00:00)
    16.1.  BridgeId
    16.2.  Timeout
17.  CAPWAP-BASE-MIB (revision 2010-04-30 00:00)
    17.1.  CapwapBaseWtpProfileIdTC
    17.2.  CapwapBaseWtpIdTC
    17.3.  CapwapBaseStationIdTC
    17.4.  CapwapBaseRadioIdTC
    17.5.  CapwapBaseTunnelModeTC
    17.6.  CapwapBaseMacTypeTC
    17.7.  CapwapBaseChannelTypeTC
    17.8.  CapwapBaseAuthenMethodTC
18.  CAPWAP-DOT11-MIB (revision 2010-04-30 00:00)
    18.1.  CapwapDot11WlanIdTC
    18.2.  CapwapDot11WlanIdProfileTC
19.  CHARACTER-MIB (revision 1994-05-26 17:00)
    19.1.  PortIndex
20.  CIRCUIT-IF-MIB (revision 2002-01-03 00:00)
    20.1.  CiFlowDirection
21.  COPS-CLIENT-MIB (revision 2000-09-28 00:00)
    21.1.  CopsClientState
    21.2.  CopsServerEntryType
    21.3.  CopsErrorCode
    21.4.  CopsTcpPort
    21.5.  CopsAuthType
22.  DIAL-CONTROL-MIB (revision 1996-09-23 15:44)
    22.1.  AbsoluteCounter32
23.  DIFFSERV-DSCP-TC (revision 2002-05-09 00:00)
    23.1.  Dscp
    23.2.  DscpOrAny
24.  DIFFSERV-MIB (revision 2002-02-07 00:00)
    24.1.  IndexInteger
    24.2.  IndexIntegerNextFree
    24.3.  IfDirection
25.  DISMAN-EVENT-MIB (revision 2000-10-16 00:00)
    25.1.  FailureReason
26.  DISMAN-PING-MIB (revision 2006-06-13 00:00)
    26.1.  OperationResponseStatus
27.  DISMAN-SCHEDULE-MIB (revision 2002-01-07 00:00)
    27.1.  SnmpPduErrorStatus
28.  DLSW-MIB (revision 1996-06-04 09:00)
    28.1.  NBName
    28.2.  MacAddressNC
    28.3.  TAddress
    28.4.  EndStationLocation
    28.5.  DlcType
    28.6.  LFSize
    28.7.  DlswTCPAddress
29.  DNS-SERVER-MIB (revision 1994-01-28 22:51)
    29.1.  DnsName
    29.2.  DnsNameAsIndex
    29.3.  DnsClass
    29.4.  DnsType
    29.5.  DnsQClass
    29.6.  DnsQType
    29.7.  DnsTime
    29.8.  DnsOpCode
    29.9.  DnsRespCode
30.  DOCS-IETF-BPI2-MIB (revision 2005-07-20 00:00)
    30.1.  DocsX509ASN1DEREncodedCertificate
    30.2.  DocsSAId
    30.3.  DocsSAIdOrZero
    30.4.  DocsBpkmSAType
    30.5.  DocsBpkmDataEncryptAlg
    30.6.  DocsBpkmDataAuthentAlg
31.  DOCS-IETF-QOS-MIB (revision 2006-01-23 00:00)
    31.1.  DocsIetfQosRfMacIfDirection
    31.2.  DocsIetfQosBitRate
    31.3.  DocsIetfQosSchedulingType
32.  DOCS-IF-MIB (revision 2006-05-24 00:00)
    32.1.  TenthdBmV
    32.2.  TenthdB
    32.3.  DocsisVersion
    32.4.  DocsisQosVersion
    32.5.  DocsisUpstreamType
    32.6.  DocsEqualizerData
33.  DOT3-OAM-MIB (revision 2007-06-14 00:00)
    33.1.  EightOTwoOui
34.  DSMON-MIB (revision 2002-05-31 00:00)
    34.1.  DsmonCounterAggGroupIndex
    34.2.  DsmonCounterAggProfileIndex
35.  DVB-RCS-MIB (revision 2010-02-16 12:00)
    35.1.  DvbRcsSatLabsProfileMap
    35.2.  DvbRcsSatLabsOptionMap
    35.3.  DvbRcsSatLabsFeatureMap
36.  EBN-MIB (revision 1998-04-28 18:00)
    36.1.  SnaNAUWildcardName
37.  EFM-CU-MIB (revision 2007-11-14 00:00)
    37.1.  EfmProfileIndex
    37.2.  EfmProfileIndexOrZero
    37.3.  EfmProfileIndexList
    37.4.  EfmTruthValueOrUnknown
38.  ENTITY-MIB (revision 2013-04-05 00:00)
    38.1.  PhysicalIndex
    38.2.  PhysicalIndexOrZero
    38.3.  SnmpEngineIdOrNone
    38.4.  PhysicalClass (deprecated)
39.  ENTITY-SENSOR-MIB (revision 2002-12-16 00:00)
    39.1.  EntitySensorDataType
    39.2.  EntitySensorDataScale
    39.3.  EntitySensorPrecision
    39.4.  EntitySensorValue
    39.5.  EntitySensorStatus
40.  ENTITY-STATE-TC-MIB (revision 2005-11-22 00:00)
    40.1.  EntityAdminState
    40.2.  EntityOperState
    40.3.  EntityUsageState
    40.4.  EntityAlarmStatus
    40.5.  EntityStandbyStatus
41.  FCIP-MGMT-MIB (revision 2006-02-06 00:00)
    41.1.  FcipDomainIdInOctetForm
    41.2.  FcipEntityMode
    41.3.  FcipEntityId
42.  FC-MGMT-MIB (revision 2005-04-26 00:00)
    42.1.  FcNameIdOrZero
    42.2.  FcAddressIdOrZero
    42.3.  FcDomainIdOrZero
    42.4.  FcPortType
    42.5.  FcClasses
    42.6.  FcBbCredit
    42.7.  FcBbCreditModel
    42.8.  FcDataFieldSize
    42.9.  FcUnitFunctions
43.  FIBRE-CHANNEL-FE-MIB (revision 2000-05-18 00:00)
    43.1.  MilliSeconds
    43.2.  MicroSeconds
    43.3.  FcNameId
    43.4.  FcAddressId
    43.5.  FcRxDataFieldSize
    43.6.  FcBbCredit
    43.7.  FcphVersion
    43.8.  FcStackedConnMode
    43.9.  FcCosCap
    43.10.  FcFeModuleCapacity
    43.11.  FcFeFxPortCapacity
    43.12.  FcFeModuleIndex
    43.13.  FcFeFxPortIndex
    43.14.  FcFeNxPortIndex
    43.15.  FcBbCreditModel
44.  FLOAT-TC-MIB (revision 2011-07-27 00:00)
    44.1.  Float32TC
    44.2.  Float64TC
    44.3.  Float128TC
45.  FLOW-METER-MIB (revision 1999-10-25 00:00)
    45.1.  UTF8OwnerString
    45.2.  PeerType
    45.3.  PeerAddress
    45.4.  AdjacentType
    45.5.  AdjacentAddress
    45.6.  TransportType
    45.7.  TransportAddress
    45.8.  RuleAddress
    45.9.  FlowAttributeNumber
    45.10.  RuleAttributeNumber
    45.11.  ActionNumber
46.  FORCES-MIB (revision 2010-03-10 00:00)
    46.1.  ForcesID
    46.2.  ForcesProtocolVersion
47.  FRAME-RELAY-DTE-MIB (revision 1997-05-01 02:29)
    47.1.  DLCI
48.  FR-MFR-MIB (revision 2000-11-30 00:00)
    48.1.  MfrBundleLinkState
49.  FRSLD-MIB (revision 2002-01-03 00:00)
    49.1.  FrsldTxRP
    49.2.  FrsldRxRP
50.  GMPLS-TC-STD-MIB (revision 2007-02-28 00:00)
    50.1.  GmplsFreeformLabelTC
    50.2.  GmplsLabelTypeTC
    50.3.  GmplsSegmentDirectionTC
51.  GSMP-MIB (revision 2002-05-31 00:00)
    51.1.  GsmpNameType
    51.2.  GsmpPartitionType
    51.3.  GsmpPartitionIdType
    51.4.  GsmpVersion
    51.5.  GsmpLabelType
52.  HC-ALARM-MIB (revision 2002-12-16 00:00)
    52.1.  HcValueStatus
53.  HCNUM-TC (revision 2000-06-08 00:00)
    53.1.  CounterBasedGauge64
    53.2.  ZeroBasedCounter64
54.  HC-PerfHist-TC-MIB (revision 2004-02-03 00:00)
    54.1.  HCPerfValidIntervals
    54.2.  HCPerfInvalidIntervals
    54.3.  HCPerfTimeElapsed
    54.4.  HCPerfIntervalThreshold
    54.5.  HCPerfCurrentCount
    54.6.  HCPerfIntervalCount
    54.7.  HCPerfTotalCount
55.  HDSL2-SHDSL-LINE-MIB (revision 2005-12-07 00:00)
    55.1.  Hdsl2ShdslPerfCurrDayCount
    55.2.  Hdsl2Shdsl1DayIntervalCount
    55.3.  Hdsl2ShdslPerfTimeElapsed
    55.4.  Hdsl2ShdslPerfIntervalThreshold
    55.5.  Hdsl2ShdslUnitId
    55.6.  Hdsl2ShdslUnitSide
    55.7.  Hdsl2ShdslWirePair
    55.8.  Hdsl2ShdslTransmissionModeType
    55.9.  Hdsl2ShdslClockReferenceType
56.  HOST-RESOURCES-MIB (revision 2000-03-06 00:00)
    56.1.  KBytes
    56.2.  ProductID
    56.3.  InternationalDisplayString
57.  HPR-IP-MIB (revision 1998-09-24 00:00)
    57.1.  AppnTrafficType
    57.2.  AppnTOSPrecedence
58.  HPR-MIB (revision 1997-05-14 00:00)
    58.1.  HprNceTypes
    58.2.  HprRtpCounter
59.  IANA-ITU-ALARM-TC-MIB (revision 2004-09-09 00:00)
    59.1.  IANAItuProbableCause
    59.2.  IANAItuEventType
60.  IFCP-MGMT-MIB (revision 2011-03-09 00:00)
    60.1.  IfcpIpTOVorZero
    60.2.  IfcpLTIorZero
    60.3.  IfcpSessionStates
    60.4.  IfcpAddressMode
61.  IF-MIB (revision 2000-06-14 00:00)
    61.1.  OwnerString (deprecated)
    61.2.  InterfaceIndex
    61.3.  InterfaceIndexOrZero
62.  INET-ADDRESS-MIB (revision 2005-02-04 00:00)
    62.1.  InetAddressType
    62.2.  InetAddress
    62.3.  InetAddressIPv4
    62.4.  InetAddressIPv6
    62.5.  InetAddressIPv4z
    62.6.  InetAddressIPv6z
    62.7.  InetAddressDNS
    62.8.  InetAddressPrefixLength
    62.9.  InetPortNumber
    62.10.  InetAutonomousSystemNumber
    62.11.  InetScopeType
    62.12.  InetZoneIndex
    62.13.  InetVersion
63.  INTEGRATED-SERVICES-MIB (revision 1995-11-03 05:00)
    63.1.  SessionNumber
    63.2.  Protocol
    63.3.  SessionType
    63.4.  Port
    63.5.  MessageSize
    63.6.  BitRate
    63.7.  BurstSize
    63.8.  QosService
64.  IP-MIB (revision 2006-02-02 00:00)
    64.1.  IpAddressOriginTC
    64.2.  IpAddressStatusTC
    64.3.  IpAddressPrefixOriginTC
    64.4.  Ipv6AddressIfIdentifierTC
65.  IPMROUTE-STD-MIB (revision 2000-09-22 00:00)
    65.1.  LanguageTag
66.  IPOA-MIB (revision 1998-02-09 00:00)
    66.1.  IpoaEncapsType
    66.2.  IpoaVpiInteger
    66.3.  IpoaVciInteger
    66.4.  IpoaAtmAddr
    66.5.  IpoaAtmConnKind
67.  IPS-AUTH-MIB (revision 2006-05-22 00:00)
    67.1.  IpsAuthAddress
68.  IPSEC-SPD-MIB (revision 2007-02-07 00:00)
    68.1.  SpdBooleanOperator
    68.2.  SpdAdminStatus
    68.3.  SpdIPPacketLogging
    68.4.  SpdTimePeriod
69.  IPV6-FLOW-LABEL-MIB (revision 2003-08-28 00:00)
    69.1.  IPv6FlowLabel
    69.2.  IPv6FlowLabelOrAny
70.  IPV6-TC
    70.1.  Ipv6Address
    70.2.  Ipv6AddressPrefix
    70.3.  Ipv6AddressIfIdentifier
    70.4.  Ipv6IfIndex
    70.5.  Ipv6IfIndexOrZero
71.  ISCSI-MIB (revision 2006-05-22 00:00)
    71.1.  IscsiTransportProtocol
    71.2.  IscsiDigestMethod
    71.3.  IscsiName
72.  ISDN-MIB (revision 1996-09-23 16:42)
    72.1.  IsdnSignalingProtocol
73.  ISIS-MIB (revision 2006-04-04 00:00)
    73.1.  IsisOSINSAddress
    73.2.  IsisSystemID
    73.3.  IsisLinkStatePDUID
    73.4.  IsisAdminState
    73.5.  IsisLSPBuffSize
    73.6.  IsisLevelState
    73.7.  IsisSupportedProtocol
    73.8.  IsisDefaultMetric
    73.9.  IsisWideMetric
    73.10.  IsisFullMetric
    73.11.  IsisMetricType
    73.12.  IsisMetricStyle
    73.13.  IsisISLevel
    73.14.  IsisLevel
    73.15.  IsisPDUHeader
    73.16.  IsisCircuitID
    73.17.  IsisISPriority
    73.18.  IsisUnsigned16TC
    73.19.  IsisUnsigned8TC
74.  ISNS-MIB (revision 2007-07-11 00:00)
    74.1.  IsnsDiscoveryDomainSetId
    74.2.  IsnsDdsStatusType
    74.3.  IsnsDiscoveryDomainId
    74.4.  IsnsDdFeatureType
    74.5.  IsnsDdDdsModificationType
    74.6.  IsnsEntityIndexIdOrZero
    74.7.  IsnsPortalGroupIndexId
    74.8.  IsnsPortalIndexId
    74.9.  IsnsPortalPortTypeId
    74.10.  IsnsPortalGroupTagIdOrNull
    74.11.  IsnsPortalSecurityType
    74.12.  IsnsNodeIndexId
    74.13.  IsnsIscsiNodeType
    74.14.  IsnsFcClassOfServiceType
    74.15.  IsnsIscsiScnType
    74.16.  IsnsIfcpScnType
    74.17.  IsnsFcPortRoleType
    74.18.  IsnsSrvrDiscoveryMethodsType
75.  ITU-ALARM-TC-MIB (revision 2004-09-09 00:00)
    75.1.  ItuPerceivedSeverity
    75.2.  ItuTrendIndication
76.  Job-Monitoring-MIB (revision 1999-02-19 00:00)
    76.1.  JmUTF8StringTC
    76.2.  JmJobStringTC
    76.3.  JmNaturalLanguageTagTC
    76.4.  JmTimeStampTC
    76.5.  JmJobSourcePlatformTypeTC
    76.6.  JmFinishingTC
    76.7.  JmPrintQualityTC
    76.8.  JmPrinterResolutionTC
    76.9.  JmTonerEconomyTC
    76.10.  JmBooleanTC
    76.11.  JmMediumTypeTC
    76.12.  JmJobCollationTypeTC
    76.13.  JmJobSubmissionIDTypeTC
    76.14.  JmJobStateTC
    76.15.  JmAttributeTypeTC
    76.16.  JmJobServiceTypesTC
    76.17.  JmJobStateReasons1TC
    76.18.  JmJobStateReasons2TC
    76.19.  JmJobStateReasons3TC
    76.20.  JmJobStateReasons4TC
77.  L2TP-MIB (revision 2002-08-23 00:00)
    77.1.  L2tpMilliSeconds
78.  LANGTAG-TC-MIB (revision 2007-11-09 00:00)
    78.1.  LangTag
79.  LISP-MIB (revision 2013-10-21 00:00)
    79.1.  LispAddressType
80.  LMP-MIB (revision 2006-08-14 00:00)
    80.1.  LmpInterval
    80.2.  LmpRetransmitInterval
    80.3.  LmpNodeId
81.  MAU-MIB (revision 2007-04-21 00:00)
    81.1.  JackType (deprecated)
82.  MIDCOM-MIB (revision 2007-08-09 10:11)
    82.1.  MidcomNatBindMode
    82.2.  MidcomNatSessionIdOrZero
83.  MIP-MIB (revision 1996-06-04 00:00)
    83.1.  RegistrationFlags
84.  MOBILEIPV6-MIB (revision 2006-02-01 00:00)
    84.1.  Mip6BURequestRejectionCode
85.  MPLS-FTN-STD-MIB (revision 2004-06-03 00:00)
    85.1.  MplsFTNEntryIndex
    85.2.  MplsFTNEntryIndexOrZero
86.  MPLS-L3VPN-STD-MIB (revision 2006-01-23 00:00)
    86.1.  MplsL3VpnName
    86.2.  MplsL3VpnRouteDistinguisher
    86.3.  MplsL3VpnRtType
87.  MPLS-LSR-STD-MIB (revision 2004-06-03 00:00)
    87.1.  MplsIndexType
    87.2.  MplsIndexNextType
88.  MPLS-TC-STD-MIB (revision 2004-06-03 00:00)
    88.1.  MplsAtmVcIdentifier
    88.2.  MplsBitRate
    88.3.  MplsBurstSize
    88.4.  MplsExtendedTunnelId
    88.5.  MplsLabel
    88.6.  MplsLabelDistributionMethod
    88.7.  MplsLdpIdentifier
    88.8.  MplsLsrIdentifier
    88.9.  MplsLdpLabelType
    88.10.  MplsLSPID
    88.11.  MplsLspType
    88.12.  MplsOwner
    88.13.  MplsPathIndexOrZero
    88.14.  MplsPathIndex
    88.15.  MplsRetentionMode
    88.16.  MplsTunnelAffinity
    88.17.  MplsTunnelIndex
    88.18.  MplsTunnelInstanceIndex
    88.19.  TeHopAddressType
    88.20.  TeHopAddress
    88.21.  TeHopAddressAS
    88.22.  TeHopAddressUnnum
89.  NAT-MIB (revision 2005-03-21 00:00)
    89.1.  NatProtocolType
    89.2.  NatProtocolMap
    89.3.  NatAddrMapId
    89.4.  NatBindIdOrZero
    89.5.  NatBindId
    89.6.  NatSessionId
    89.7.  NatBindMode
    89.8.  NatAssociationType
    89.9.  NatTranslationEntity
90.  NETWORK-SERVICES-MIB (revision 2000-03-03 00:00)
    90.1.  DistinguishedName
    90.2.  URLString
91.  NHDP-MIB (revision 2012-10-22 10:00)
    91.1.  NeighborIfIndex
    91.2.  NeighborRouterIndex
92.  NHRP-MIB (revision 1999-08-26 00:00)
    92.1.  NhrpGenAddr
93.  NTPv4-MIB (revision 2010-05-17 00:00)
    93.1.  NtpStratum
    93.2.  NtpDateTime
94.  OPT-IF-MIB (revision 2003-08-13 00:00)
    94.1.  OptIfAcTI
    94.2.  OptIfBitRateK
    94.3.  OptIfDEGM
    94.4.  OptIfDEGThr
    94.5.  OptIfDirectionality
    94.6.  OptIfSinkOrSource
    94.7.  OptIfExDAPI
    94.8.  OptIfExSAPI
    94.9.  OptIfIntervalNumber
    94.10.  OptIfTIMDetMode
    94.11.  OptIfTxTI
95.  OSPF-MIB (revision 2006-11-10 00:00)
    95.1.  AreaID
    95.2.  RouterID
    95.3.  Metric
    95.4.  BigMetric
    95.5.  Status
    95.6.  PositiveInteger
    95.7.  HelloRange
    95.8.  UpToMaxAge
    95.9.  DesignatedRouterPriority
    95.10.  TOSType
    95.11.  OspfAuthenticationType
96.  OSPFV3-MIB (revision 2009-08-13 00:00)
    96.1.  Ospfv3UpToRefreshIntervalTC
    96.2.  Ospfv3DeadIntervalRangeTC
    96.3.  Ospfv3RouterIdTC
    96.4.  Ospfv3LsIdTC
    96.5.  Ospfv3AreaIdTC
    96.6.  Ospfv3IfInstIdTC
    96.7.  Ospfv3LsaSequenceTC
    96.8.  Ospfv3LsaAgeTC
97.  P-BRIDGE-MIB (revision 2006-01-09 00:00)
    97.1.  EnabledStatus
98.  PerfHist-TC-MIB (revision 2003-08-13 00:00)
    98.1.  PerfCurrentCount
    98.2.  PerfIntervalCount
    98.3.  PerfTotalCount
99.  PIM-STD-MIB (revision 2007-11-02 00:00)
    99.1.  PimMode
    99.2.  PimGroupMappingOriginType
100.  PINT-MIB (revision 2001-02-01 00:00)
    100.1.  PintServiceType
    100.2.  PintPerfStatPeriod
101.  PKTC-IETF-MTA-MIB (revision 2006-09-18 00:00)
    101.1.  PktcMtaDevProvEncryptAlg
102.  PKTC-IETF-SIG-MIB (revision 2007-12-18 00:00)
    102.1.  TenthdBm
    102.2.  PktcCodecType
    102.3.  PktcRingCadence
    102.4.  PktcSigType
    102.5.  DtmfCode
    102.6.  PktcSubscriberSideSigProtocol
103.  PMIPV6-TC-MIB (revision 2012-05-07 00:00)
    103.1.  Pmip6TimeStamp64
    103.2.  Pmip6MnIdentifier
    103.3.  Pmip6MnLLIdentifier
    103.4.  Pmip6MnIndex
    103.5.  Pmip6MnLLIndex
    103.6.  Pmip6MnInterfaceATT
104.  POLICY-BASED-MANAGEMENT-MIB (revision 2005-02-07 00:00)
    104.1.  PmUTF8String
105.  Printer-MIB (revision 2004-06-02 00:00)
    105.1.  PrtMediaUnitTC
    105.2.  MediaUnit (deprecated)
    105.3.  PrtCapacityUnitTC
    105.4.  CapacityUnit (deprecated)
    105.5.  PrtPrintOrientationTC
    105.6.  PrtSubUnitStatusTC
    105.7.  SubUnitStatus (deprecated)
    105.8.  PresentOnOff
    105.9.  PrtLocalizedDescriptionStringTC
    105.10.  PrtConsoleDescriptionStringTC
    105.11.  CodedCharSet (deprecated)
    105.12.  PrtChannelStateTC
    105.13.  PrtOutputStackingOrderTC
    105.14.  PrtOutputPageDeliveryOrientationTC
    105.15.  PrtMarkerCounterUnitTC
    105.16.  PrtMarkerSuppliesSupplyUnitTC
    105.17.  PrtMarkerSuppliesClassTC
    105.18.  PrtMarkerColorantRoleTC
    105.19.  PrtMarkerAddressabilityUnitTC
    105.20.  PrtMediaPathMaxSpeedPrintUnitTC
    105.21.  PrtInterpreterTwoWayTC
    105.22.  PrtAlertSeverityLevelTC
106.  PTOPO-MIB (revision 2000-09-21 00:00)
    106.1.  PtopoGenAddr
    106.2.  PtopoChassisIdType
    106.3.  PtopoChassisId
    106.4.  PtopoPortIdType
    106.5.  PtopoPortId
    106.6.  PtopoAddrSeenState
107.  PW-CEP-STD-MIB (revision 2011-05-16 00:00)
    107.1.  PwCepSonetEbm
    107.2.  PwCepSdhVc4Ebm
    107.3.  PwCepSonetVtgMap
    107.4.  PwCepFracAsyncMap
108.  PW-TC-STD-MIB (revision 2009-04-21 00:00)
    108.1.  PwGroupID
    108.2.  PwIDType
    108.3.  PwIndexType
    108.4.  PwIndexOrZeroType
    108.5.  PwOperStatusTC
    108.6.  PwAttachmentIdentifierType
    108.7.  PwGenIdType
    108.8.  PwCwStatusTC
    108.9.  PwStatus
    108.10.  PwFragSize
    108.11.  PwFragStatus
    108.12.  PwCfgIndexOrzero
109.  PW-TDM-MIB (revision 2009-06-15 00:00)
    109.1.  PwTDMCfgIndex
110.  Q-BRIDGE-MIB (revision 2006-01-09 00:00)
    110.1.  PortList
    110.2.  VlanIndex
    110.3.  VlanId
    110.4.  VlanIdOrAny
    110.5.  VlanIdOrNone
    110.6.  VlanIdOrAnyOrNone
111.  RBRIDGE-MIB (revision 2013-01-07 00:00)
    111.1.  RbridgeAddress
    111.2.  RbridgeNickname
112.  RIPv2-MIB (revision 1994-07-27 22:53)
    112.1.  RouteTag
113.  RMON2-MIB (revision 2006-05-02 00:00)
    113.1.  ZeroBasedCounter32
    113.2.  LastCreateTime
    113.3.  TimeFilter
    113.4.  DataSource
    113.5.  ControlString
114.  RMON-MIB (revision 2000-05-11 00:00)
    114.1.  OwnerString
    114.2.  EntryStatus
115.  ROHC-MIB (revision 2004-06-03 00:00)
    115.1.  RohcChannelIdentifier
    115.2.  RohcChannelIdentifierOrZero
    115.3.  RohcCompressionRatio
116.  RPKI-ROUTER-MIB (revision 2013-05-01 00:00)
    116.1.  RpkiRtrConnectionType
117.  RSERPOOL-MIB (revision 2009-04-07 00:00)
    117.1.  RSerPoolENRPServerIdentifierTC
    117.2.  RSerPoolOperationScopeTC
    117.3.  RSerPoolPoolHandleTC
    117.4.  RserpoolPoolElementIdentifierTC
    117.5.  RSerPoolPolicyIdentifierTC
    117.6.  RSerPoolPolicyLoadTC
    117.7.  RSerPoolPolicyWeightTC
    117.8.  RSerPoolTransportUseTypeTC
    117.9.  RSerPoolOpaqueAddressTC
118.  RSVP-MIB (revision 1995-11-03 05:00)
    118.1.  RsvpEncapsulation
    118.2.  RefreshInterval
119.  SCSI-MIB (revision 2006-03-30 00:00)
    119.1.  ScsiLUN
    119.2.  ScsiIndexValue
    119.3.  ScsiPortIndexValueOrZero
    119.4.  ScsiIndexValueOrZero
    119.5.  ScsiIdentifier
    119.6.  ScsiName
    119.7.  ScsiLuNameOrZero
    119.8.  ScsiDeviceOrPort
    119.9.  ScsiIdCodeSet
    119.10.  ScsiIdAssociation
    119.11.  ScsiIdType
    119.12.  ScsiIdValue
    119.13.  ScsiHrSWInstalledIndexOrZero
120.  SIP-MIB (revision 1994-03-31 18:18)
    120.1.  SMDSAddress
    120.2.  IfIndex
121.  SIP-TC-MIB (revision 2007-04-20 00:00)
    121.1.  SipTCTransportProtocol
    121.2.  SipTCEntityRole
    121.3.  SipTCOptionTagHeaders
    121.4.  SipTCMethodName
122.  SLAPM-MIB (revision 2000-01-24 00:00)
    122.1.  SlapmNameType (deprecated)
    122.2.  SlapmStatus
    122.3.  SlapmPolicyRuleName
123.  SMON-MIB (revision 1998-12-16 00:00)
    123.1.  SmonDataSource
124.  SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB (revision 2002-10-14 00:00)
    124.1.  SnmpEngineID
    124.2.  SnmpSecurityModel
    124.3.  SnmpMessageProcessingModel
    124.4.  SnmpSecurityLevel
    124.5.  SnmpAdminString
125.  SNMP-REPEATER-MIB (revision 1996-09-14 00:00)
    125.1.  OptMacAddr
126.  SNMP-SSH-TM-MIB (revision 2009-06-09 00:00)
    126.1.  SnmpSSHAddress
127.  SNMP-TARGET-MIB (revision 2002-10-14 00:00)
    127.1.  SnmpTagValue
    127.2.  SnmpTagList
128.  SNMP-TLS-TM-MIB (revision 2010-05-07 00:00)
    128.1.  SnmpTLSAddress
    128.2.  SnmpTLSFingerprint
129.  SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB (revision 2002-10-16 00:00)
    129.1.  KeyChange
130.  SNMP-USM-DH-OBJECTS-MIB (revision 2000-03-06 00:00)
    130.1.  DHKeyChange
131.  SNMPv2-TC
    131.1.  DisplayString
    131.2.  PhysAddress
    131.3.  MacAddress
    131.4.  TruthValue
    131.5.  TestAndIncr
    131.6.  AutonomousType
    131.7.  InstancePointer (obsolete)
    131.8.  VariablePointer
    131.9.  RowPointer
    131.10.  RowStatus
    131.11.  TimeStamp
    131.12.  TimeInterval
    131.13.  DateAndTime
    131.14.  StorageType
    131.15.  TDomain
    131.16.  TAddress
132.  SNMPv2-TM (revision 2002-10-16 00:00)
    132.1.  SnmpUDPAddress
    132.2.  SnmpOSIAddress
    132.3.  SnmpNBPAddress
    132.4.  SnmpIPXAddress
133.  SNMPv2-USEC-MIB (revision 1996-01-12 00:00)
    133.1.  AgentID
134.  SSPM-MIB (revision 2005-07-28 00:00)
    134.1.  SspmMicroSeconds
    134.2.  SspmClockSource
    134.3.  SspmClockMaxSkew
135.  SYSAPPL-MIB (revision 1997-10-20 00:00)
    135.1.  RunState
    135.2.  LongUtf8String
    135.3.  Utf8String
136.  T11-FC-FABRIC-ADDR-MGR-MIB (revision 2006-03-02 00:00)
    136.1.  T11FamDomainPriority
    136.2.  T11FamDomainInterfaceRole
    136.3.  T11FamState
137.  T11-FC-FABRIC-CONFIG-SERVER-MIB (revision 2007-06-27 00:00)
    137.1.  T11FcListIndex
    137.2.  T11FcListIndexPointerOrZero
    137.3.  T11FcIeType
    137.4.  T11FcPortState
    137.5.  T11FcPortTxType
    137.6.  T11FcsRejectReasonExplanation
138.  T11-FC-FSPF-MIB (revision 2006-08-14 00:00)
    138.1.  T11FspfLsrType
    138.2.  T11FspfLinkType
    138.3.  T11FspfInterfaceState
    138.4.  T11FspfLastCreationTime
139.  T11-FC-NAME-SERVER-MIB (revision 2006-03-02 00:00)
    139.1.  T11NsGs4RejectReasonCode
    139.2.  T11NsRejReasonCodeExpl
140.  T11-FC-ZONE-SERVER-MIB (revision 2007-06-27 00:00)
    140.1.  T11ZsZoneMemberType
    140.2.  T11ZsRejectReasonExplanation
    140.3.  T11ZoningName
141.  T11-TC-MIB (revision 2006-03-02 00:00)
    141.1.  T11FabricIndex
142.  TCP-ESTATS-MIB (revision 2007-05-18 00:00)
    142.1.  TcpEStatsNegotiated
143.  TED-MIB (revision 2012-12-21 00:00)
    143.1.  TedAreaIdTC
    143.2.  TedRouterIdTC
    143.3.  TedLinkIndexTC
144.  TE-LINK-STD-MIB (revision 2005-10-11 00:00)
    144.1.  TeLinkBandwidth
    144.2.  TeLinkPriority
    144.3.  TeLinkProtection
    144.4.  TeLinkSwitchingCapability
    144.5.  TeLinkEncodingType
    144.6.  TeLinkSonetSdhIndication
145.  TIME-AGGREGATE-MIB (revision 2006-04-27 00:00)
    145.1.  TAggrMOErrorStatus
    145.2.  TimeAggrMOValue
    145.3.  CompressedTimeAggrMOValue
146.  TN3270E-MIB (revision 1998-07-27 00:00)
    146.1.  SnaResourceName
    146.2.  Tn3270eTraceData
147.  TOKENRING-STATION-SR-MIB (revision 1994-12-16 10:00)
    147.1.  SourceRoute
148.  TRANSPORT-ADDRESS-MIB (revision 2002-11-01 00:00)
    148.1.  TransportDomain
    148.2.  TransportAddressType
    148.3.  TransportAddress
    148.4.  TransportAddressIPv4
    148.5.  TransportAddressIPv6
    148.6.  TransportAddressIPv4z
    148.7.  TransportAddressIPv6z
    148.8.  TransportAddressLocal
    148.9.  TransportAddressDns
149.  TRIP-TC-MIB (revision 2004-09-02 00:00)
    149.1.  TripItad
    149.2.  TripId
    149.3.  TripAddressFamily
    149.4.  TripAppProtocol
    149.5.  TripCommunityId
    149.6.  TripProtocolVersion
    149.7.  TripSendReceiveMode
150.  UPS-MIB (revision 1994-02-23 00:00)
    150.1.  PositiveInteger
    150.2.  NonNegativeInteger
151.  URI-TC-MIB (revision 2007-09-10 00:00)
    151.1.  Uri
    151.2.  Uri255
    151.3.  Uri1024
152.  UUID-TC-MIB (revision 2013-04-05 00:00)
    152.1.  UUID
    152.2.  UUIDorZero
153.  VDSL2-LINE-TC-MIB (revision 2009-09-30 00:00)
    153.1.  Xdsl2Unit
    153.2.  Xdsl2Direction
    153.3.  Xdsl2Band
    153.4.  Xdsl2TransmissionModeType
    153.5.  Xdsl2RaMode
    153.6.  Xdsl2InitResult
    153.7.  Xdsl2OperationModes
    153.8.  Xdsl2PowerMngState
    153.9.  Xdsl2ConfPmsForce
    153.10.  Xdsl2LinePmMode
    153.11.  Xdsl2LineLdsf
    153.12.  Xdsl2LdsfResult
    153.13.  Xdsl2LineBpsc
    153.14.  Xdsl2BpscResult
    153.15.  Xdsl2LineReset
    153.16.  Xdsl2LineProfiles
    153.17.  Xdsl2LineClassMask
    153.18.  Xdsl2LineLimitMask
    153.19.  Xdsl2LineUs0Disable
    153.20.  Xdsl2LineUs0Mask
    153.21.  Xdsl2SymbolProtection
    153.22.  Xdsl2SymbolProtection8
    153.23.  Xdsl2MaxBer
    153.24.  Xdsl2ChInitPolicy
    153.25.  Xdsl2ScMaskDs
    153.26.  Xdsl2ScMaskUs
    153.27.  Xdsl2CarMask
    153.28.  Xdsl2RfiBands
    153.29.  Xdsl2PsdMaskDs
    153.30.  Xdsl2PsdMaskUs
    153.31.  Xdsl2Tssi
    153.32.  Xdsl2LastTransmittedState
    153.33.  Xdsl2LineStatus
    153.34.  Xdsl2ChInpReport
    153.35.  Xdsl2ChAtmStatus
    153.36.  Xdsl2ChPtmStatus
    153.37.  Xdsl2UpboKLF
    153.38.  Xdsl2BandUs
    153.39.  Xdsl2LinePsdMaskSelectUs
    153.40.  Xdsl2LineCeFlag
    153.41.  Xdsl2LineSnrMode
    153.42.  Xdsl2LineTxRefVnDs
    153.43.  Xdsl2LineTxRefVnUs
    153.44.  Xdsl2BitsAlloc
    153.45.  Xdsl2MrefPsdDs
    153.46.  Xdsl2MrefPsdUs
154.  VDSL-LINE-EXT-SCM-MIB (revision 2005-04-28 00:00)
    154.1.  VdslSCMBandId
155.  VDSL-LINE-MIB (revision 2004-02-19 00:00)
    155.1.  VdslLineCodingType
    155.2.  VdslLineEntity
156.  VPN-TC-STD-MIB (revision 2005-11-15 00:00)
    156.1.  VPNId
    156.2.  VPNIdOrZero
157.  VRRP-MIB (revision 2000-03-03 00:00)
    157.1.  VrId
158.  VRRPV3-MIB (revision 2012-02-13 00:00)
    158.1.  Vrrpv3VrIdTC
159.  WWW-MIB (revision 1999-02-25 14:00)
    159.1.  WwwRequestType
    159.2.  WwwResponseType
    159.3.  WwwOperStatus
    159.4.  WwwDocName
160.  Security Considerations
§  Author's Address




 TOC 

1.  ACCOUNTING-CONTROL-MIB (revision 1998-09-28 10:00)

The MIB module for managing the collection and storage of accounting information for connections in a connection- oriented network such as ATM.



 TOC 

1.1.  DataCollectionSubtree

The subtree component of a (subtree, list) tuple.  Such a
(subtree, list) tuple defines a set of objects and their
values to be collected as accounting data for a connection.
The subtree specifies a single OBJECT IDENTIFIER value such
that each object in the set is named by the subtree value
appended with a single additional sub-identifier.



 TOC 

1.2.  DataCollectionList

The list component of a (subtree, list) tuple.  Such a
(subtree, list) tuple defines a set of objects and their
values to be collected as accounting data for a connection.
The subtree specifies a single OBJECT IDENTIFIER value such
that each object in the set is named by the subtree value
appended with a single additional sub-identifier.  The list
specifies a set of data items, where the presence of an item
in the list indicates that the item is (to be) present in
the data collected for a connection; the absence of an item
from the list indicates that the item is not (to be) present
in the data collected for a connection.  Each data item is
represented by an integer which when appended (as as
additional sub-identifier) to the OBJECT IDENTIFIER value of
the subtree identified by the tuple, is the name of an
object defining that data item (its description and its
syntax).

The list is specified as an OCTET STRING in which each data
item is represented by a single bit, where data items 1
through 8 are represented by the bits in the first octet,
data items 9 through 16 by the bits in the second octet,
etc.  In each octet, the lowest numbered data item is
represented by the most significant bit, and the highest
numbered data item by the least significant bit.  A data
item is present in the list when its bit is set, and absent
when its bit is reset.  If the length of an OCTET STRING
value is too short to represent one or more data items
defined in a subtree, then those data items are absent from
the set identified by the tuple of that subtree and that
OCTET STRING value.



 TOC 

1.3.  FileIndex

An arbitrary integer value identifying a file into which
accounting data is being collected.



 TOC 

2.  ADSL2-LINE-TC-MIB (revision 2006-10-04 00:00)

This MIB Module provides Textual Conventions to be used by the ADSL2-LINE-MIB module for the purpose of managing ADSL, ADSL2, and ADSL2+ lines. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4706: see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

2.1.  Adsl2Unit

Identifies a transceiver as being either an ATU-C or
an ATU-R.  An ADSL line consists of two transceivers, an ATU-C
and an ATU-R.  Attributes with this syntax reference the two
sides of a line.  Specified as an INTEGER, the two values



are:

 atuc(1)  -- Central office ADSL terminal unit (ATU-C).
 atur(2)  -- Remote ADSL terminal unit (ATU-R).



 TOC 

2.2.  Adsl2Direction

Identifies the direction of a band as being
either upstream or downstream.  Specified as an INTEGER,
the two values are:
 upstream(1), and
 downstream(2).



 TOC 

2.3.  Adsl2TransmissionModeType

A set of ADSL2 line transmission modes, with one bit
per mode.  The notes (F) and (L) denote Full-Rate
and Lite/splitterless, respectively:
   Bit 00 : Regional Std. (ANSI T1.413) (F)
   Bit 01 : Regional Std. (ETSI DTS/TM06006) (F)
   Bit 02 : G.992.1 POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 03 : G.992.1 POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 04 : G.992.1 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 05 : G.992.1 ISDN overlapped (F)
   Bit 06 : G.992.1 TCM-ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 07 : G.992.1 TCM-ISDN overlapped (F)
   Bit 08 : G.992.2 POTS non-overlapped (L)
   Bit 09 : G.992.2 POTS overlapped (L)
   Bit 10 : G.992.2 with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped (L)
   Bit 11 : G.992.2 with TCM-ISDN overlapped (L)
   Bit 12 : G.992.1 TCM-ISDN symmetric (F) -- not in G.997.1
   Bit 13-17: Reserved
   Bit 18 : G.992.3 POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 19 : G.992.3 POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 20 : G.992.3 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 21 : G.992.3 ISDN overlapped (F)



   Bit 22-23: Reserved
   Bit 24 : G.992.4 POTS non-overlapped (L)
   Bit 25 : G.992.4 POTS overlapped (L)
   Bit 26-27: Reserved
   Bit 28 : G.992.3 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 29 : G.992.3 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (F)
   Bit 30 : G.992.3 Annex J All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 31 : G.992.3 Annex J All-Digital overlapped (F)
   Bit 32 : G.992.4 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (L)
   Bit 33 : G.992.4 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (L)
   Bit 34 : G.992.3 Annex L POTS non-overlapped, mode 1,
                            wide U/S (F)
   Bit 35 : G.992.3 Annex L POTS non-overlapped, mode 2,
                            narrow U/S(F)
   Bit 36 : G.992.3 Annex L POTS overlapped, mode 3,
                            wide U/S (F)
   Bit 37 : G.992.3 Annex L POTS overlapped, mode 4,
                            narrow U/S (F)
   Bit 38 : G.992.3 Annex M POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 39 : G.992.3 Annex M POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 40 : G.992.5 POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 41 : G.992.5 POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 42 : G.992.5 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 43 : G.992.5 ISDN overlapped (F)
   Bit 44-45: Reserved
   Bit 46 : G.992.5 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 47 : G.992.5 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (F)
   Bit 48 : G.992.5 Annex J All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 49 : G.992.5 Annex J All-Digital overlapped (F)
   Bit 50 : G.992.5 Annex M POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 51 : G.992.5 Annex M POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 52-55: Reserved



 TOC 

2.4.  Adsl2RaMode

Specifies the rate adaptation behavior for the line.
The three possible behaviors are:



 manual(1)    - No Rate-Adaptation.  The initialization
                process attempts to synchronize to a
                specified rate.
 raInit(2)    - Rate-Adaptation during initialization process
                only, which attempts to synchronize to a rate
                between minimum and maximum specified values.
 dynamicRa(3) - Dynamic Rate-Adaptation during initialization
                process as well as during SHOWTIME.



 TOC 

2.5.  Adsl2InitResult

Specifies the result of a full initialization attempt; the
six possible result values are:
 noFail(0)            - Successful initialization.
 configError(1)       - Configuration failure.
 configNotFeasible(2) - Configuration details not supported.
 commFail(3)          - Communication failure.
 noPeerAtu(4)         - Peer ATU not detected.
 otherCause(5)        - Other initialization failure reason.

The values used are as defined in ITU-T G.997.1,
paragraph 7.5.1.3



 TOC 

2.6.  Adsl2OperationModes

The ADSL2 management model specified includes an ADSL Mode
attribute that identifies an instance of ADSL Mode-Specific
PSD Configuration object in the ADSL Line Profile.  The
following classes of ADSL operating mode are defined.
The notes (F) and (L) denote Full-Rate and Lite/splitterless
respectively:




+-------+--------------------------------------------------+
| Value |         ADSL operation mode description          |
+-------+--------------------------------------------------+

    1   - The default/generic PSD configuration.  Default
          configuration will be used when no other matching
          mode-specific configuration can be found.
    2   - ADSL family.  The attributes included in the Mode-
          Specific PSD Configuration are irrelevant for
          ITU-T G.992.1 and G.992.2 ADSL modes.  Hence, it
          is possible to map those modes to this generic
          class.
   3-7  - Unused. Reserved for future ITU-T specification.
    8   - G.992.3 POTS non-overlapped (F)
    9   - G.992.3 POTS overlapped (F)
   10   - G.992.3 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   11   - G.992.3 ISDN overlapped (F)
 12-13  - Unused. Reserved for future ITU-T specification.
   14   - G.992.4 POTS non-overlapped (L)
   15   - G.992.4 POTS overlapped (L)
 16-17  - Unused. Reserved for future ITU-T specification.
   18   - G.992.3 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   19   - G.992.3 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (F)
   20   - G.992.3 Annex J All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   21   - G.992.3 Annex J All-Digital overlapped (F)
   22   - G.992.4 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (L)
   23   - G.992.4 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (L)
   24   - G.992.3 Annex L POTS non-overlapped, mode 1,
          wide U/S (F)
   25   - G.992.3 Annex L POTS non-overlapped, mode 2,
          narrow U/S(F)
   26   - G.992.3 Annex L POTS overlapped, mode 3,
          wide U/S (F)
   27   - G.992.3 Annex L POTS overlapped, mode 4,
          narrow U/S (F)
   28   - G.992.3 Annex M POTS non-overlapped (F)
   29   - G.992.3 Annex M POTS overlapped (F)
   30   - G.992.5 POTS non-overlapped (F)
   31   - G.992.5 POTS overlapped (F)
   32   - G.992.5 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   33   - G.992.5 ISDN overlapped (F)
 34-35  - Unused. Reserved for future ITU-T specification.
   36   - G.992.5 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   37   - G.992.5 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (F)
   38   - G.992.5 Annex J All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   39   - G.992.5 Annex J All-Digital overlapped (F)
   40   - G.992.5 Annex M POTS non-overlapped (F)
   41   - G.992.5 Annex M POTS overlapped (F)



 TOC 

2.7.  Adsl2PowerMngState

Attributes with this syntax uniquely identify each power
management state defined for the ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+ link.
The possible values are:
  l0(1) - L0 - Full power management state.
  l1(2) - L1 - Low power management state (for G.992.2).
  l2(3) - L2 - Low power management state (for G.992.3,
               G.992.4, and G.992.5).
  l3(4) - L3 - Idle power management state.



 TOC 

2.8.  Adsl2ConfPmsForce

Attributes with this syntax are configuration parameters
that reference the desired power management state for the
ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+ link:
  l3toL0(0)          - Perform a transition from L3 to L0
                       (Full power management state).
  l0toL2(2)          - Perform a transition from L0 to L2
                       (Low power management state).
  l0orL2toL3(3)      - Perform a transition into L3 (Idle
                       power management state).

The values used are as defined in ITU-T G.997.1,
paragraph 7.3.1.1.3



 TOC 

2.9.  Adsl2LConfProfPmMode

Attributes with this syntax are configuration parameters
that reference the power modes/states into which the ATU-C or
ATU-R may autonomously transit.

It is a BITS structure that allows control of the following
transit options:
 allowTransitionsToIdle(0)     - XTU may autonomously transit
                                 to idle (L3) state.
 allowTransitionsToLowPower(1) - XTU may autonomously transit
                                 to low-power (L2) state.



 TOC 

2.10.  Adsl2LineLdsf

Attributes with this syntax are configuration parameters
that control the Loop Diagnostic mode for the ADSL/ADSL2 or
ADSL2+ link.  The possible values are:
  inhibit(0)  - Inhibit Loop Diagnostic mode.
  force(1)    - Force/Initiate Loop Diagnostic mode.

The values used are as defined in ITU-T G.997.1,
paragraph 7.3.1.1.8



 TOC 

2.11.  Adsl2LdsfResult

Possible failure reasons associated with performing
a Dual Ended Loop Test (DELT) on a DSL line.
Possible values are:
 none(1)         - The default value in case LDSF was never
                   requested for the associated line.
 success(2)      - The recent command completed
                   successfully.
 inProgress(3)   - The Loop Diagnostics process is in
                   progress.
 unsupported(4)  - The NE or the line card doesn't support
                   LDSF.
 cannotRun(5)    - The NE cannot initiate the command, due
                   to a nonspecific reason.
 aborted(6)      - The Loop Diagnostics process aborted.
 failed(7)       - The Loop Diagnostics process failed.
 illegalMode(8)  - The NE cannot initiate the command, due
                   to the specific mode of the relevant
                   line.
 adminUp(9)      - The NE cannot initiate the command, as
                   the relevant line is administratively
                   'Up'.
 tableFull(10)   - The NE cannot initiate the command, due
                   to reaching the maximum number of rows
                   in the results table.
 noResources(11) - The NE cannot initiate the command, due
                   to lack of internal memory resources.



 TOC 

2.12.  Adsl2SymbolProtection

Attributes with this syntax are configuration parameters
that reference the minimum-length impulse noise protection
(INP) in terms of number of symbols.  The possible values are:
noProtection (i.e., INP not required), halfSymbol (i.e., INP
length is 1/2 symbol), and 1-16 symbols in steps of 1 symbol.



 TOC 

2.13.  Adsl2MaxBer

Attributes with this syntax are configuration parameters
that reference the maximum Bit Error Rate (BER).
The possible values are:

  eminus3(1)   - Maximum BER=E^-3



  eminus5(2)   - Maximum BER=E^-5
  eminus7(3)   - Maximum BER=E^-7



 TOC 

2.14.  Adsl2ScMaskDs

Each one of the 512 bits in this OCTET
STRING array represents the corresponding bin
in the downstream direction.  A value of one
indicates that the bin is not in use.



 TOC 

2.15.  Adsl2ScMaskUs

Each one of the 64 bits in this OCTET
STRING array represents the corresponding bin
in the upstream direction.  A value of one
indicates that the bin is not in use.



 TOC 

2.16.  Adsl2RfiDs

Each one of the 512 bits in this OCTET
STRING array represents the corresponding bin
in the downstream direction.  A value of one
indicates that the bin is part of a notch
filter.



 TOC 

2.17.  Adsl2PsdMaskDs

This is a structure that represents up to
32 PSD Mask breakpoints.
Each breakpoint occupies 3 octets: The first
two octets hold the index of the sub-carrier
associated with the breakpoint.  The third octet
holds the PSD reduction at the breakpoint from 0
(0 dBm/Hz) to 255 (-127.5 dBm/Hz) using units of
0.5 dBm/Hz.



 TOC 

2.18.  Adsl2PsdMaskUs

This is a structure that represents up to
4 PSD Mask breakpoints.
Each breakpoint occupies 3 octets: The first
two octets hold the index of the sub-carrier
associated with the breakpoint.  The third octet
holds the PSD reduction at the breakpoint from 0
(0 dBm/Hz) to 255 (-127.5 dBm/Hz) using units of
0.5 dBm/Hz.



 TOC 

2.19.  Adsl2Tssi

This is a structure that represents up to
32 transmit spectrum shaping (TSSi) breakpoints.
Each breakpoint occupies 3 octets: The first
two octets hold the index of the sub-carrier
associated with the breakpoint.  The third octet
holds the shaping parameter at the breakpoint.  It
is a value from 0 to 127 (units of -0.5 dB).  The
special value 127 indicates that the sub-carrier
is not transmitted.



 TOC 

2.20.  Adsl2LastTransmittedState

This parameter represents the last successfully
transmitted initialization state in the last full
initialization performed on the line.  States are
per the specific xDSL technology and are numbered
from 0 (if G.994.1 is used) or 1 (if G.994.1 is
not used) up to Showtime.



 TOC 

2.21.  Adsl2LineStatus

Attributes with this syntax are status parameters
that reflect the failure status for a given endpoint of
ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+ link.

This BITS structure can report the following failures:

 noDefect(0)       - This bit position positively reports
                     that no defect or failure exists.
 lossOfFrame(1)    - Loss of frame synchronization.
 lossOfSignal(2)   - Loss of signal.
 lossOfPower(3)    - Loss of power.  Usually this failure may
                     be reported for ATU-Rs only.
 initFailure(4)    - Recent initialization process failed.
                     Never active on ATU-R.



 TOC 

2.22.  Adsl2ChAtmStatus

Attributes with this syntax are status parameters that
reflect the failure status for Transmission Convergence (TC)
layer of a given ATM interface (data path over an ADSL/ADSL2
or ADSL2+ link).

This BITS structure can report the following failures:
 noDefect(0)              - This bit position positively
                            reports that no defect or failure
                            exists.
 noCellDelineation(1)     - The link was successfully



                            initialized, but cell delineation
                            was never acquired on the
                            associated ATM data path.
 lossOfCellDelineation(2) - Loss of cell delineation on the
                            associated ATM data path.



 TOC 

2.23.  Adsl2ChPtmStatus

Attributes with this syntax are status parameters that
reflect the failure status for a given PTM interface (packet
data path over an ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+ link).

This BITS structure can report the following failures:
    noDefect(0)     - This bit position positively
                      reports that no defect or failure exists.
    outOfSync(1)    - Out of synchronization.



 TOC 

3.  ADSL-LINE-EXT-MIB (revision 2002-12-10 00:00)

Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2002). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3440; see the RFC itself for full legal notices. This MIB Module is a supplement to the ADSL-LINE-MIB [RFC2662].



 TOC 

3.1.  AdslTransmissionModeType

A set of ADSL line transmission modes, with one bit
per mode.  The notes (F) and (L) denote Full-Rate
and G.Lite respectively:
  Bit 00 : Regional Std. (ANSI T1.413) (F)
  Bit 01 : Regional Std. (ETSI DTS/TM06006) (F)
  Bit 02 : G.992.1 POTS non-overlapped (F)
  Bit 03 : G.992.1 POTS overlapped (F)
  Bit 04 : G.992.1 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
  Bit 05 : G.992.1 ISDN overlapped (F)
  Bit 06 : G.992.1 TCM-ISDN non-overlapped (F)
  Bit 07 : G.992.1 TCM-ISDN overlapped (F)
  Bit 08 : G.992.2 POTS non-overlapped (L)
  Bit 09 : G.992.2 POTS overlapped (L)
  Bit 10 : G.992.2 with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped (L)
  Bit 11 : G.992.2 with TCM-ISDN overlapped (L)
  Bit 12 : G.992.1 TCM-ISDN symmetric (F)



 TOC 

4.  ADSL-TC-MIB (revision 1999-08-19 00:00)

The MIB module which provides a ADSL Line Coding Textual Convention to be used by ADSL Lines.



 TOC 

4.1.  AdslLineCodingType

This data type is used as the syntax for the ADSL
Line Code.



 TOC 

4.2.  AdslPerfCurrDayCount

A counter associated with interface performance
measurements in a current 1-day (24 hour) measurement
interval.

The value of this counter starts at zero at the
beginning of an interval and is increased when
associated events occur, until the end of the
1-day interval.  At that time the value of the
counter is stored in the previous 1-day history
interval, if available, and the current interval
counter is restarted at zero.

In the case where the agent has no valid data available
for this interval the corresponding object
instance is not available and upon a retrieval
request a corresponding error message shall be
returned to indicate that this instance does
not exist (for example, a noSuchName error for
SNMPv1 and a noSuchInstance for SNMPv2 GET
operation).



 TOC 

4.3.  AdslPerfPrevDayCount

A counter associated with interface performance
measurements during the most previous 1-day (24 hour)
measurement interval.  The value of this counter is
equal to the value of the current day counter at
the end of its most recent interval.

In the case where the agent has no valid data available
for this interval the corresponding object
instance is not available and upon a retrieval
request a corresponding error message shall be
returned to indicate that this instance does
not exist (for example, a noSuchName error for
SNMPv1 and a noSuchInstance for SNMPv2 GET
operation).



 TOC 

4.4.  AdslPerfTimeElapsed

The number of seconds that have elapsed since
the beginning of the current measurement period.
If, for some reason, such as an adjustment in the
system's time-of-day clock, the current interval
exceeds the maximum value, the agent will return
the maximum value.



 TOC 

5.  AGENTX-MIB (revision 2000-01-10 00:00)

This is the MIB module for the SNMP Agent Extensibility Protocol (AgentX). This MIB module will be implemented by the master agent.



 TOC 

5.1.  AgentxTAddress

Denotes a transport service address.  This is identical to
the TAddress textual convention (SNMPv2-SMI) except that
zero-length values are permitted.



 TOC 

6.  AGGREGATE-MIB (revision 2006-04-27 00:00)

The MIB for servicing aggregate objects. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4498; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

6.1.  AggrMOErrorStatus

This data type is used to model the error status of the
constituent MO instances.  The error status for a
constituent MO instance is given in terms of two elements:
  o The moIndex, which indicates the position of the MO
    instance (starting at 1) in the value of the aggregated
    MO instance.
  o The moError, which indicates the error that was
    encountered in fetching that MO instance.
The syntax in ASN.1 Notation will be
ErrorStatus :: = SEQUENCE {
   moIndex  Integer32,
   moError  SnmpPduErrorStatus
}
AggrMOErrorStatus ::= SEQUENCE OF {
   ErrorStatus
}
Note1: The command responder will supply values for all
       constituent MO instances, in the same order in
       which the MO instances are specified for the AgMO.
       If an error is encountered for an MO instance, then
       the corresponding value will have an ASN.1 value NULL,
       and an error will be flagged in the corresponding
       AggrMOErrorStatus object.
       Only MOs for which errors have been encountered will
       have their corresponding moIndex and moError values
       set.
Note2: The error code for the component MO instances will be
       in accordance with the SnmpPduErrorStatus TC defined
       in the DISMAN-SCHEDULE-MIB [RFC3231].
Note3: The command generator will need to know
       constituent MO instances and their order to correctly
       interpret AggrMOErrorStatus.



 TOC 

6.2.  AggrMOValue

This data type is used to model the aggregate
MOs.  It will have a format dependent on the constituent
MOs, a sequence of values.  The syntax in ASN.1 Notation will
be
MOValue :: = SEQUENCE {
     value ObjectSyntax
}
where 'value' is the value of a constituent MO instance.
AggrMOValue :: = SEQUENCE OF {
    MOValue
}

Note: The command generator will need to know the
constituent MO instances and their order to
correctly interpret AggrMOValue.



 TOC 

6.3.  AggrMOCompressedValue

This data type is used to model the compressed
aggregate MOs.



 TOC 

7.  ALARM-MIB (revision 2004-09-09 00:00)

The MIB module describes a generic solution to model alarms and to store the current list of active alarms. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). The initial version of this MIB module was published in RFC 3877. For full legal notices see the RFC itself. Supplementary information may be available on: http://www.ietf.org/copyrights/ianamib.html



 TOC 

7.1.  ResourceId

A unique identifier for this resource.

The type of the resource can be determined by looking
at the OID that describes the resource.

Resources must be identified in a consistent manner.
For example, if this resource is an interface, this
object MUST point to an ifIndex and if this resource
is a physical entity [RFC2737], then this MUST point
to an entPhysicalDescr, given that entPhysicalIndex
is not accessible.  In general, the value is the
name of the instance of the first accessible columnar
object in the conceptual row of a table that is
meaningful for this resource type, which SHOULD
be defined in an IETF standard MIB.



 TOC 

7.2.  LocalSnmpEngineOrZeroLenStr

An SNMP Engine ID or a zero-length string.  The
instantiation of this textual convention will provide
guidance on when this will be an SNMP Engine ID and
when it will be a zero lengths string



 TOC 

8.  APM-MIB (revision 2004-02-19 00:00)

The MIB module for measuring application performance as experienced by end-users. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3729; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

8.1.  AppLocalIndex

A locally arbitrary unique identifier associated with an
application or application verb.

All objects of type AppLocalIndex are assigned by the agent
out of a common number space. In other words, AppLocalIndex
values assigned to entries in one table must not overlap with
AppLocalIndex values assigned to entries in another
table. Further, every protocolDirLocalIndex value registered
by the agent automatically assigns the same value out of the



AppLocalIndex number space.

For example, if the protocolDirLocalIndex values { 1, 3, 5, 7 }
have been assigned, and the apmHttpFilterAppLocalIndex values
{ 6, 8, 9 } have been assigned:

    - Assignment of new AppLocalIndex values must not use the
      values { 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 }.
    - AppLocalIndex values { 1, 3, 5, 7 } are automatically
      assigned and are associated with the identical value of
      protocolDirLocalIndex. In particular, an entry in the
      apmAppDirTable indexed by a value provides further
      information about a protocol indexed by the same value
      in the protocolDirTable of RMON2.

The value for each supported application must remain constant
at least from one re-initialization of the entity's network
management system to the next re-initialization, except that
if an application is deleted and re-created, it must be
re-created with a new value that has not been used since the
last re-initialization.

The specific value is meaningful only within a given SNMP
entity. An AppLocalIndex value must not be re-used until the
next agent restart.



 TOC 

8.2.  ProtocolDirNetworkAddress

A network level address whose semantics and encoding are
specified by an associated protocolDirLocalIndex
value. Objects of this type must specify which
protocolDirLocalIndex value is used. This value is encoded
according to the encoding rules for the identified
protocolDirectory entry.

For example, if the associated protocolDirLocalIndex indicates
an encapsulation of ip, this object is encoded as a length
octet of 4, followed by the 4 octets of the ip address,
in network byte order.

Objects of this type may allow this value to be the zero
length string. If so, they must identify they meaning of this
value.



 TOC 

8.3.  DataSourceOrZero

Identifies the source of the data that the associated
function is configured to analyze. This source can be any
interface on this device.

In order to identify a particular interface, this
object shall identify the instance of the ifIndex
object, defined in [4], for the desired interface.

For example, if an entry were to receive data from
interface #1, this object would be set to ifIndex.1.

If the source of the data isn't an interface or cannot be
localized to an interface, this object would be set to 0.0



 TOC 

8.4.  RmonClientID

A long-lived unique ID assigned to an end-system. This ID is
assigned by the agent using an implementation-specific
algorithm.

Because a client machine may be assigned multiple addresses
over any time period it can be difficult to attribute
behavior to a particular client based solely on its
address. A ClientID may be assigned to provide a more
stable handle for referencing that client. The entity that
assigns the ClientID may use various implementation
techniques to keep track of a client but if the assigning
entity is unable to track client address mappings, it may map
client identifiers to client addresses rather than to
distinct client machines.

This is named ClientID because it helps to solve a problem
seen in network clients (servers usually have well-known,
long-lived addresses). However, ClientID's may be assigned to
any end-system regardless of its role on the network.



 TOC 

8.5.  TransactionAggregationType

Specifies one of 4 different techniques for aggregating
transactions.

The metrics for a single transaction are the responsiveness of
the transaction and whether the transaction succeeded (a
boolean). When such metrics are aggregated in this MIB Module,
these metrics are replaced by averages and distributions of
responsiveness and availability. The metrics describing
aggregates are constant no matter which type of aggregation is
being performed. These metrics may be found in the
apmReportTable.

The flows(1) aggregation is the simplest. All transactions
that share common application/server/client 3-tuples are
aggregated together, resulting in a set of metrics for all
such unique 3-tuples.

The clients(2) aggregation results in somewhat more
aggregation (i.e., fewer resulting records). All transactions
that share common application/client tuples are aggregated
together, resulting in a set of metrics for all such unique
tuples.

The servers(3) aggregation usually results in still more
aggregation (i.e., fewer resulting records). All transactions
that share common application/server tuples are aggregated
together, resulting in a set of metrics for all such unique
tuples.

The applications(4) aggregation results in the most
aggregation (i.e., the fewest resulting records). All
transactions that share a common application are aggregated
together, resulting in a set of metrics for all such unique
applications.

Note that it is not meaningful to aggregate applications, as
different applications have widely varying characteristics. As a
result, this set of aggregations is complete.



 TOC 

9.  APPC-MIB (revision 1995-12-15 00:00)

This is the MIB module for objects used to manage network devices with APPC capabilities.



 TOC 

9.1.  SnaSenseData

To facilitate their display by a Management Station, sense
data objects in the MIB are represented as DisplayStrings of
size 8.  Eight '0' characters indicates that no sense data
identifying an SNA error condition is available.



 TOC 

10.  APPLICATION-MIB (revision 1998-11-17 18:15)

This MIB defines objects representing generic aspects of applications that are of interest to management but typically require instrumentation within managed application elements.



 TOC 

10.1.  Unsigned64TC

A non-negative 64-bit bit integer, without counter
semantics.



 TOC 

10.2.  ApplTAddress

Denotes a transport service address.

For snmpUDPDomain, an ApplTAddress is 6 octets long,
the initial 4 octets containing the IP-address in
network-byte order and the last 2 containing the UDP
port in network-byte order.  Consult 'Transport Mappings
for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMPv2)' for further information on snmpUDPDomain.



 TOC 

11.  APPN-MIB (revision 1998-07-15 18:00)

This is the MIB module for objects used to manage network devices with APPN capabilities.



 TOC 

11.1.  SnaNodeIdentification

An SNA Node Identification consists of two parts, which
together comprise four bytes of hexadecimal data.  In SNA the
Node Identification is transported in bytes 2-5 of the XID.

The block number is the first three digits of the Node
Identification.  These 3 hexadecimal digits identify the
product.

The ID number is the last 5 digits of the Node Identification.
These 5 hexadecimal digits are administratively defined and
combined with the 3-digit block number form the 8-digit Node
Identification.  A unique value is required for connections to
SNA subarea.  In some implementations, the value 'bbb00000'
(where 'bbb' represents a 3-digit block number) is returned to
mean that the ID number is not unique on this node.

An SNA Node Identification is represented as eight
ASCII-encoded hexadecimal digits, using the characters '0' -
'9' and 'A' - 'F'.



 TOC 

11.2.  SnaControlPointName

A fully qualified SNA control point name, consisting of a 1 to
8 character network identifier (NetId), a period ('.'), and a 1
to 8 character control point name (CpName).

The NetId and CpName are constructed from the uppercase letters
'A' - 'Z' and the numerics '0' - '9', all encoded in ASCII,
with the restriction that the first character of each must be
a letter.  Trailing blanks are not allowed.

Earlier versions of SNA permitted three additional characters
in NetIds and CpNames:  '#', '@', and '$'.  While this use of
these characters has been retired, a Management Station should
still accept them for backward compatibility.



 TOC 

11.3.  SnaClassOfServiceName

An SNA class-of-service (COS) name, ranging from 1 to 8
ASCII characters.  COS names take one of two forms:

   -  a user-defined COS name is constructed from the uppercase
      letters 'A' - 'Z' and the numerics '0' - '9', with the
      restriction that the first character of the name must be
      a letter.
   -  an SNA-defined user-session COS name begins with the
      character '#', which is followed by up to seven
      additional characters from the set of uppercase letters
      and numerics.

Trailing blanks are not allowed in either form of COS name.

A zero-length string indicates that a COS name is not
available.



 TOC 

11.4.  SnaModeName

An SNA mode name, ranging from 1 to 8 ASCII characters.
Mode names take one of two forms:

   -  a user-defined mode name is constructed from the
      uppercase letters 'A' - 'Z' and the numerics '0' - '9',
      with the restriction that the first character of the name
      must be a letter.
   -  an SNA-defined user-session mode name begins with the
      character '#', which is followed by up to seven
      additional characters from the set of uppercase letters
      and numerics.

Trailing blanks are not allowed in either form of mode name,
with the single exception of the all-blank mode name, where
a string consisting of 8 blanks is returned.

A zero-length string indicates that a mode name is not
available.



 TOC 

11.5.  SnaSenseData

To facilitate their display by a Management Station, sense
data objects in the MIB are represented as OCTET STRINGS
containing eight ASCII characters.  Eight '0' characters
indicates that no sense data identifying an SNA error
condition is available.

An SNA sense data is represented as eight hexadecimal digits,
using the characters '0' - '9' and 'A' - 'F'.



 TOC 

11.6.  DisplayableDlcAddress

DLC address of a port or link station, represented as an
OCTET STRING containing 0 to 64 ASCII characters.
A Management Station should use a value of this type only
for display.  The 'real' DLC address, i.e., the sequence of
bytes that flow in the DLC header, is often available in a
DLC-specific MIB.

The zero-length string indicates that the DLC address in
question is not known to the agent.



 TOC 

11.7.  AppnNodeCounter

An object providing global statistics for the entire APPN
node.  A Management Station can detect discontinuities in this
counter by monitoring the appnNodeCounterDisconTime object.



 TOC 

11.8.  AppnPortCounter

An object providing statistics for an APPN port.  A
Management Station can detect discontinuities in this counter
by monitoring the appnPortCounterDisconTime object.



 TOC 

11.9.  AppnLinkStationCounter

An object providing statistics for an APPN link station.  A
Management Station can detect discontinuities in this counter
by monitoring the appnLsCounterDisconTime object.



 TOC 

11.10.  AppnTopologyEntryTimeLeft

Number of days before deletion of this entry from the topology
database.  Range is 0-15.  A value of 0 indicates that the
entry is either in the process of being deleted, or is being
marked for deletion at the next garbage collection cycle.



 TOC 

11.11.  AppnTgDlcData

DLC-specific data related to a connection network transmission
group.  For other TGs, a zero-length string is returned.

Examples of the type of data returned by an object with this
syntax include the following:

      Token-Ring      - MAC/SAP
      X.25 Switched   - dial digits
      X.21 Switched   - dial digits
      Circuit Switch  - dial digits
This MIB does not specify formats for these or any other types
of DLC-specific data.  Formats may, however, be specified in
documents related to a particular DLC.

The contents of an object with this syntax correspond to the
contents of the DLC-specific subfields of cv46, documented in
(6).



 TOC 

11.12.  AppnTgEffectiveCapacity

A value representing the effective capacity of a transmission
group.  This is an administratively assigned value derived from
the link bandwidth and maximum load factor.  It is encoded in
the same way as byte 7 of cv47, and represents a floating-point
number in units of 300 bits per second.



 TOC 

11.13.  AppnTgSecurity

A value representing the level of security on a transmission
group.  A class of service definition includes an indication of
the acceptable TG security value(s) for that class of service.

The following seven values are defined:

  nonsecure(1) -
                    (X'01'):  none of the values listed below;
                    for example, satellite-connected or
                    located in a nonsecure country
  publicSwitchedNetwork(32) -
                    (X'20'):  public switched network; secure
                    in the sense that there is no
                    predetermined route that traffic will take
  undergroundCable(64) -
                    (X'40'):  underground cable; located in a
                    secure country (as determined by the
                    network administrator)
  secureConduit(96) -
                    (X'60'):  secure conduit, not guarded; for
                    example, pressurized pipe
  guardedConduit(128) -
                    (X'80'):  guarded conduit; protected
                    against physical tapping
  encrypted(160) -
                    (X'A0'):  link-level encryption is provided
  guardedRadiation(192) -
                    (X'C0'):  guarded conduit containing the
                    transmission medium; protected against
                    physical and radiation tapping



 TOC 

11.14.  AppnTgDelay

Relative amount of time that it takes for a signal to travel
the length of a logical link.  This time is represented in
microseconds, using the same encoding scheme used in cv47 in a
topology update.  Some of the more common values, along with
their encoded hex values, are:

           minimum(0),                 X'00'
           negligible(384),            X'4C'
           terrestrial(9216),          X'71'
           packet(147456),             X'91'
           long(294912),               X'99'
           maximum(2013265920)         X'FF'



 TOC 

12.  APS-MIB (revision 2003-02-28 00:00)

This management information module supports the configuration and management of SONET linear APS groups. The definitions and descriptions used in this MIB have been derived from Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic Criteria, GR-253-CORE Issue 3, September 2000, section 5.3. The MIB is also consistent with the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) protocol as specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.783, Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment function blocks, Annex A and B. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2003). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3498; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

12.1.  ApsK1K2

This Textual Convention describes an object that stores
a SONET K1 and K2 byte APS protocol field.

K1 is located in the first octet, K2 is located in
the second octet. Bits are numbered from left to right.

Bits 1-4 of the K1 byte indicate a request.

1111  Lockout of Protection
1110  Forced Switch
1101  SF - High Priority
1100  SF - Low Priority
1011  SD - High Priority
1010  SD - Low Priority
1001  not used
1000  Manual Switch
0111  not used
0110  Wait-to-Restore
0101  not used
0100  Exercise
0011  not used
0010  Reverse Request
0001  Do Not Revert
0000  No Request

Bits 5-8 of the K1 byte indicate the channel associated with
the request defined in bits 1-4.

0000 is the Null channel.





1-14 are working channels.
15   is the extra traffic channel

Bits 1-4 of the K2 byte indicate a channel. The channel is
defined with the same syntax as K1 Bits 5-8.

Bit 5 of the K2 byte indicates the
architecture.

0 if the architecture is 1+1
1 if the architecture is 1:n

Bits 6-8 of the K2 byte indicates the mode.

000 - 011 are reserved for future use
100  indicates the mode is unidirectional
101  indicates the mode is bidirectional
110  RDI-L
111  AIS-L



 TOC 

12.2.  ApsSwitchCommand

An APS switch command allows a user to perform protection
switch actions.

If the APS switch command cannot be executed because an
equal or higher priority request is in effect, an
inconsistentValue error is returned.

The Switch command values are:

noCmd

This value should be returned by a read request when no switch
command has been written to the object in question since
initialization. This value may not be used in a write
operation.  If noCmd is used in a write operation a wrongValue
error is returned.







clear

Clears all of the switch commands listed below for the
specified channel.

lockoutOfProtection

Prevents any of the working channels from switching to the
protection line. The specified channel should be the protection
channel, otherwise an inconsistentValue error is returned.

forcedSwitchWorkToProtect

Switches the specified working channel to the protection line.
If the protection channel is specified an inconsistentValue
error is returned.

forcedSwitchProtectToWork

Switches the working channel back from the protection
line to the working line. The specified channel should be
the protection channel, otherwise an inconsistentValue
error is returned.

manualSwitchWorkToProtect

Switches the specified working channel to the protection line.
If the protection channel is specified an inconsistentValue
error is returned.

manualSwitchProtectToWork

Switches the working channel back from the protection
line to the working line. The specified channel should be
the protection channel, otherwise an inconsistentValue
error is returned.

exercise

Exercises the protocol for a protection switch of the specified
channel by issuing an Exercise request for that channel and
checking the response on the APS channel.



 TOC 

12.3.  ApsControlCommand

An APS control command applies only to LTE that support the
1:n architecture and performs the following actions.

The Control command values are:

noCmd

This value should be returned by a read request when no control
command has been written to the object in question since
initialization. This value may not be used in a write
operation.  If noCmd is used in a write operation a wrongValue
error is returned.

lockoutWorkingChannel

Prevents the specified working channel from switching to the
protection line. If the protection line is specified an
inconsistentValue error is returned.

clearLockoutWorkingChannel

Clears the lockout a working channel command for the channel
specified. If the protection line is specified an
inconsistentValue error is returned.



 TOC 

13.  ARC-MIB (revision 2004-09-09 00:00)

The MIB module describes the objects for controlling a resource in reporting alarm conditions that it detects. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3878; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

13.1.  IANAItuProbableCauseOrZero

This TC can take any value of IANAItuProbableCause or 0.
IANAItuProbableCause is defined in the IANA-ITU-ALARM-TC
module, which is maintained at the IANA web site and
published in the Alarm MIB document (see RFC 3877).



 TOC 

14.  ATM-TC-MIB (revision 1998-10-19 02:00)

This MIB Module provides Textual Conventions and OBJECT-IDENTITY Objects to be used by ATM systems.



 TOC 

14.1.  AtmAddr

An ATM address. The semantics are implied by
the length. The address types are: - no
address (0 octets) - E.164 (8 octets) - NSAP
(20 octets) In addition, when subaddresses
are used the AtmAddr may represent the
concatenation of address and subaddress. The
associated address types are: - E.164, E.164
(16 octets) - E.164, NSAP (28 octets) - NSAP,
NSAP (40 octets) Address lengths other than
defined in this definition imply address
types defined elsewhere.  Note: The E.164
address is encoded in BCD format.



 TOC 

14.2.  AtmConnCastType

The type of topology of a connection (point-
to-point, point-to-multipoint). In the case
of point-to-multipoint, the orientation of
this VPL or VCL in the connection.
On a host:
- p2mpRoot indicates that the host
  is the root of the p2mp connection.
- p2mpLeaf indicates that the host
  is a leaf of the p2mp connection.
On a switch interface:
- p2mpRoot indicates that cells received
  by the switching fabric from the interface
  are from the root of the p2mp connection.
- p2mpLeaf indicates that cells transmitted
  to the interface from the switching fabric
  are to the leaf of the p2mp connection.



 TOC 

14.3.  AtmConnKind

The type of call control used for an ATM
connection at a particular interface. The use
is as follows:
   pvc(1)
      Virtual link of a PVC. Should not be
      used for an PVC/SVC (i.e., Soft PVC)
      crossconnect.
   svcIncoming(2)
      Virtual link established after a
      received signaling request to setup
      an SVC.
   svcOutgoing(3)
      Virtual link established after a
      transmitted or forwarded signaling
      request to setup an SVC.
   spvcInitiator(4)
      Virtual link at the PVC side of an
      SVC/PVC crossconnect, where the
      switch is the initiator of the Soft PVC
      setup.
   spvcTarget(5)
      Virtual link at the PVC side of an
      SVC/PVC crossconnect, where the
      switch is the target of the Soft PVC
      setup.

For PVCs, a pvc virtual link is always cross-
connected to a pvc virtual link.

For SVCs, an svcIncoming virtual link is always cross-
connected to an svcOutgoing virtual link.

For Soft PVCs, an spvcInitiator is either cross-connected to
an svcOutgoing or an spvcTarget, and an spvcTarget is either
cross-connected to an svcIncoming or an spvcInitiator.



 TOC 

14.4.  AtmIlmiNetworkPrefix

A network prefix used for ILMI address
registration.  In the case of ATM endsystem
addresses (AESAs), the network prefix is the first
13 octets of the address which includes the AFI,
IDI, and HO-DSP fields.  In the case of native
E.164 addresses, the network prefix is the entire
E.164 address encoded in 8 octets, as if it were
an E.164 IDP in an ATM endsystem address
structure.



 TOC 

14.5.  AtmInterfaceType

The connection setup procedures used for the
identified interface.

Other: Connection setup procedures other than
   those listed below.
Auto-configuration:
   Indicates that the connection setup
   procedures are to be determined dynamically,
   or that determination has not yet been
   completed. One such mechanism is via ATM
   Forum ILMI auto-configuration procedures.

ITU-T DSS2:
-  ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931, Broadband
   Integrated Service Digital Network (B-ISDN)
   Digital Subscriber Signalling System No.2
   (DSS2) User-Network Interface (UNI) Layer 3
   Specification for Basic Call/Connection
   Control (September 1994)
-  ITU-T Draft Recommendation Q.2961,
   B-ISDN DSS 2 Support of Additional Traffic
   Parameters (May 1995)

-  ITU-T Draft Recommendation Q.2971,
   B-ISDN DSS 2 User Network Interface Layer 3
   Specification for Point-to-multipoint
   Call/connection Control (May 1995)

ATM Forum UNI 3.0:
   ATM Forum, ATM User-Network Interface,
   Version 3.0 (UNI 3.0) Specification,
   (1994).

ATM Forum UNI 3.1:
   ATM Forum, ATM User-Network Interface,
   Version 3.1 (UNI 3.1) Specification,
   (November 1994).

ATM Forum UNI Signalling 4.0:
   ATM Forum, ATM User-Network Interface (UNI)
   Signalling Specification Version 4.0,
   af-sig-0061.000 (June 1996).

ATM Forum IISP (based on UNI 3.0 or UNI 3.1) :
   Interim Inter-switch Signaling Protocol
   (IISP) Specification, Version 1.0,
   af-pnni-0026.000, (December 1994).

ATM Forum PNNI 1.0 :
   ATM Forum, Private Network-Network Interface
   Specification, Version 1.0, af-pnni-0055.000,
   (March 1996).
ATM Forum B-ICI:
   ATM Forum, B-ICI Specification, Version 2.0,
   af-bici-0013.002, (November 1995).

ATM Forum UNI PVC Only:
   An ATM Forum compliant UNI with the
   signalling disabled.
ATM Forum NNI PVC Only:
   An ATM Forum compliant NNI with the
   signalling disabled.



 TOC 

14.6.  AtmServiceCategory

The service category for a connection.



 TOC 

14.7.  AtmSigDescrParamIndex

The value of this object identifies a row in the
atmSigDescrParamTable. The value 0 signifies that
none of the signalling parameters defined in the
atmSigDescrParamTable are applicable.



 TOC 

14.8.  AtmTrafficDescrParamIndex

The value of this object identifies a row in the
atmTrafficDescrParamTable.  The value 0 signifies
that no row has been identified.



 TOC 

14.9.  AtmVcIdentifier

The VCI value for a VCL. The maximum VCI value
cannot exceed the value allowable by
atmInterfaceMaxVciBits defined in ATM-MIB.



 TOC 

14.10.  AtmVpIdentifier

The VPI value for a VPL or VCL. The value VPI=0
is only allowed for a VCL. For ATM UNIs supporting
VPCs the VPI value ranges from 0 to 255.  The VPI
value 0 is supported for ATM UNIs conforming to
the ATM Forum UNI 4.0 Annex 8 (Virtual UNIs)
specification. For ATM UNIs supporting VCCs the
VPI value ranges from 0 to 255.  For ATM NNIs the
VPI value ranges from 0 to 4095.  The maximum VPI
value cannot exceed the value allowable by
atmInterfaceMaxVpiBits defined in ATM-MIB.



 TOC 

14.11.  AtmVorXAdminStatus

The value determines the desired administrative
status of a virtual link or cross-connect. The up
and down states indicate that the traffic flow is
enabled or disabled respectively on the virtual
link or cross-connect.



 TOC 

14.12.  AtmVorXLastChange

The value of MIB II's sysUpTime at the time a
virtual link or cross-connect entered its current
operational state. If the current state was
entered prior to the last re-initialization of the
agent then this object contains a zero value.



 TOC 

14.13.  AtmVorXOperStatus

The value determines the operational status of a
virtual link or cross-connect. The up and down
states indicate that the traffic flow is enabled
or disabled respectively on the virtual link or
cross-connect. The unknown state indicates that
the state of it cannot be determined. The state
will be down or unknown if the supporting ATM
interface(s) is down or unknown respectively.



 TOC 

15.  BLDG-HVAC-MIB (revision 2003-03-27 00:00)

This example MIB module defines a set of management objects for heating ventilation and air conditioning systems. It also includes objects that can be used to create policies that are applied to rooms. This eliminates the need to send per-instance configuration commands to the system. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2003). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3512; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

15.1.  BldgHvacOperation

Operations supported by a heating and cooling system.
A reference to underlying general systems would go here.



 TOC 

16.  BRIDGE-MIB (revision 2005-09-19 00:00)

The Bridge MIB module for managing devices that support IEEE 802.1D. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4188; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

16.1.  BridgeId

The Bridge-Identifier, as used in the Spanning Tree
Protocol, to uniquely identify a bridge.  Its first two
octets (in network byte order) contain a priority value,
and its last 6 octets contain the MAC address used to
refer to a bridge in a unique fashion (typically, the
numerically smallest MAC address of all ports on the
bridge).



 TOC 

16.2.  Timeout

A Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) timer in units of 1/100
seconds.  Several objects in this MIB module represent
values of timers used by the Spanning Tree Protocol.
In this MIB, these timers have values in units of
hundredths of a second (i.e., 1/100 secs).

These timers, when stored in a Spanning Tree Protocol's
BPDU, are in units of 1/256 seconds.  Note, however, that
802.1D-1998 specifies a settable granularity of no more
than one second for these timers.  To avoid ambiguity,
a conversion algorithm is defined below for converting
between the different units, which ensures a timer's
value is not distorted by multiple conversions.

To convert a Timeout value into a value in units of
1/256 seconds, the following algorithm should be used:

    b = floor( (n * 256) / 100)

where:
    floor   =  quotient [ignore remainder]
    n is the value in 1/100 second units
    b is the value in 1/256 second units

To convert the value from 1/256 second units back to
1/100 seconds, the following algorithm should be used:

    n = ceiling( (b * 100) / 256)

where:
    ceiling = quotient [if remainder is 0], or
              quotient + 1 [if remainder is nonzero]
    n is the value in 1/100 second units



    b is the value in 1/256 second units

Note: it is important that the arithmetic operations are
done in the order specified (i.e., multiply first,
divide second).



 TOC 

17.  CAPWAP-BASE-MIB (revision 2010-04-30 00:00)

Copyright (c) 2010 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5833; see the RFC itself for full legal notices. This MIB module contains managed object definitions for the CAPWAP Protocol.



 TOC 

17.1.  CapwapBaseWtpProfileIdTC

Represents the unique identifier of a WTP profile.



 TOC 

17.2.  CapwapBaseWtpIdTC

Represents the unique identifier of a WTP instance.
As usual, the Base MAC address of the WTP is used.



 TOC 

17.3.  CapwapBaseStationIdTC

Represents the unique identifier of a station instance.
As usual, the MAC address of the station is used.



 TOC 

17.4.  CapwapBaseRadioIdTC

Represents the unique identifier of a radio on a WTP.



 TOC 

17.5.  CapwapBaseTunnelModeTC

Represents the tunneling modes of operation that are
supported by a WTP.
The WTP MAY support more than one option, represented by
the bit field below:
  localBridging(0) - Local bridging mode
  dot3Tunnel(1)    - 802.3 frame tunnel mode
  nativeTunnel(2)  - Native frame tunnel mode



 TOC 

17.6.  CapwapBaseMacTypeTC

Represents the MAC mode of operation supported by a WTP.
The following enumerated values are supported:
  localMAC(0) - Local-MAC mode
  splitMAC(1) - Split-MAC mode
  both(2)     - Both Local-MAC and Split-MAC
Note that the CAPWAP field [RFC5415] modeled by this
object takes zero as starting value; this MIB object
follows that rule.



 TOC 

17.7.  CapwapBaseChannelTypeTC

Represents the channel type for CAPWAP protocol.
The following enumerated values are supported:
  data(1)    - Data channel
  control(2) - Control channel



 TOC 

17.8.  CapwapBaseAuthenMethodTC

Represents the authentication credential type for a WTP.
The following enumerated values are supported:
  other(1) - Other method, for example, vendor specific
  clear(2) - Clear text and no authentication
  x509(3)  - X.509 certificate authentication
  psk(4)   - Pre-Shared secret authentication
As a mandatory requirement, CAPWAP control channel
authentication SHOULD use DTLS, either by certificate or
PSK.  For data channel authentication, DTLS is optional.



 TOC 

18.  CAPWAP-DOT11-MIB (revision 2010-04-30 00:00)

Copyright (c) 2010 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5834; see the RFC itself for full legal notices. This MIB module contains managed object definitions for CAPWAP Protocol binding for IEEE 802.11.



 TOC 

18.1.  CapwapDot11WlanIdTC

Represents the unique identifier of a Wireless Local Area
Network (WLAN).



 TOC 

18.2.  CapwapDot11WlanIdProfileTC

Represents the unique identifier of a WLAN profile.



 TOC 

19.  CHARACTER-MIB (revision 1994-05-26 17:00)

The MIB module for character stream devices.



 TOC 

19.1.  PortIndex

A unique value, greater than zero, for each
character port in the managed system.  It is
recommended that values are assigned contiguously
starting from 1.  The value for each interface sub-
layer must remain constant at least from one re-
initialization of the entity's network management
system to the next re-initialization.

In a system where the character ports are attached
to hardware represented by an ifIndex, it is
conventional, but not required, to make the
character port index equal to the corresponding
ifIndex.



 TOC 

20.  CIRCUIT-IF-MIB (revision 2002-01-03 00:00)

The MIB module to allow insertion of selected circuit into the ifTable.



 TOC 

20.1.  CiFlowDirection

The direction of data flow thru a circuit.

transmit(1) - Only transmitted data
receive(2)  - Only received data
both(3)     - Both transmitted and received data.



 TOC 

21.  COPS-CLIENT-MIB (revision 2000-09-28 00:00)

The COPS Client MIB module



 TOC 

21.1.  CopsClientState

A value indicating the state of a COPS client.



 TOC 

21.2.  CopsServerEntryType

A value indicating how a COPS server entry came into existence.



 TOC 

21.3.  CopsErrorCode

A value describing a COPS protocol error. Codes are identical
to those used by the COPS protocol itself.



 TOC 

21.4.  CopsTcpPort

A value indicating a TCP protocol port number.



 TOC 

21.5.  CopsAuthType

A value indicating a type of security authentication mechanism.



 TOC 

22.  DIAL-CONTROL-MIB (revision 1996-09-23 15:44)

The MIB module to describe peer information for demand access and possibly other kinds of interfaces.



 TOC 

22.1.  AbsoluteCounter32

Represents a Counter32-like value that starts at zero,
does not decrease, and does not wrap. This may be used
only in situations where wrapping is not possible or
extremely unlikely. Should such a counter overflow,
it locks at the maxium value of 4,294,967,295.

The primary use of this type of counter is situations
where a counter value is to be recorded as history
and is thus no longer subject to reading for changing
values.



 TOC 

23.  DIFFSERV-DSCP-TC (revision 2002-05-09 00:00)

The Textual Conventions defined in this module should be used whenever a Differentiated Services Code Point is used in a MIB.



 TOC 

23.1.  Dscp

A Differentiated Services Code-Point that may be used for
marking a traffic stream.



 TOC 

23.2.  DscpOrAny

The IP header Differentiated Services Code-Point that may be



used for discriminating among traffic streams. The value -1 is
used to indicate a wild card i.e. any value.



 TOC 

24.  DIFFSERV-MIB (revision 2002-02-07 00:00)

This MIB defines the objects necessary to manage a device that uses the Differentiated Services Architecture described in RFC 2475. The Conceptual Model of a Differentiated Services Router provides supporting information on how such a router is modeled.



 TOC 

24.1.  IndexInteger

An integer which may be used as a table index.



 TOC 

24.2.  IndexIntegerNextFree

An integer which may be used as a new Index in a table.

The special value of 0 indicates that no more new entries can be
created in the relevant table.

When a MIB is used for configuration, an object with this SYNTAX
always contains a legal value (if non-zero) for an index that is
not currently used in the relevant table. The Command Generator
(Network Management Application) reads this variable and uses the
(non-zero) value read when creating a new row with an SNMP SET.
When the SET is performed, the Command Responder (agent) must
determine whether the value is indeed still unused; Two Network
Management Applications may attempt to create a row
(configuration entry) simultaneously and use the same value. If
it is currently unused, the SET succeeds and the Command
Responder (agent) changes the value of this object, according to
an implementation-specific algorithm.  If the value is in use,



however, the SET fails.  The Network Management Application must
then re-read this variable to obtain a new usable value.

An OBJECT-TYPE definition using this SYNTAX MUST specify the
relevant table for which the object is providing this
functionality.



 TOC 

24.3.  IfDirection

IfDirection specifies a direction of data travel on an
interface. 'inbound' traffic is operated on during reception from
the interface, while 'outbound' traffic is operated on prior to
transmission on the interface.



 TOC 

25.  DISMAN-EVENT-MIB (revision 2000-10-16 00:00)

The MIB module for defining event triggers and actions for network management purposes.



 TOC 

25.1.  FailureReason

Reasons for failures in an attempt to perform a management
request.

The first group of errors, numbered less than 0, are related
to problems in sending the request.  The existence of a
particular error code here does not imply that all
implementations are capable of sensing that error and


returning that code.

The second group, numbered greater than 0, are copied
directly from SNMP protocol operations and are intended to
carry exactly the meanings defined for the protocol as returned
in an SNMP response.

localResourceLack       some local resource such as memory
                        lacking or
                        mteResourceSampleInstanceMaximum
                        exceeded
badDestination          unrecognized domain name or otherwise
                        invalid destination address
destinationUnreachable  can't get to destination address
noResponse              no response to SNMP request
badType                 the data syntax of a retrieved object
                        as not as expected
sampleOverrun           another sample attempt occurred before
                        the previous one completed



 TOC 

26.  DISMAN-PING-MIB (revision 2006-06-13 00:00)

The Ping MIB (DISMAN-PING-MIB) provides the capability of controlling the use of the ping function at a remote host. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4560; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

26.1.  OperationResponseStatus

Used to report the result of an operation:

responseReceived(1) - Operation is completed successfully.
unknown(2) - Operation failed due to unknown error.
internalError(3) - An implementation detected an error
     in its own processing that caused an operation
     to fail.
requestTimedOut(4) - Operation failed to receive a
     valid reply within the time limit imposed on it.
unknownDestinationAddress(5) - Invalid destination
     address.
noRouteToTarget(6) - Could not find a route to target.
interfaceInactiveToTarget(7) - The interface to be
     used in sending a probe is inactive, and an
     alternate route does not exist.
arpFailure(8) - Unable to resolve a target address to a
     media-specific address.
maxConcurrentLimitReached(9) - The maximum number of
     concurrent active operations would have been exceeded
     if the corresponding operation was allowed.
unableToResolveDnsName(10) - The DNS name specified was
     unable to be mapped to an IP address.
invalidHostAddress(11) - The IP address for a host
     has been determined to be invalid.  Examples of this
     are broadcast or multicast addresses.



 TOC 

27.  DISMAN-SCHEDULE-MIB (revision 2002-01-07 00:00)

This MIB module defines a MIB which provides mechanisms to schedule SNMP set operations periodically or at specific points in time.



 TOC 

27.1.  SnmpPduErrorStatus

This TC enumerates the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 PDU error status
codes as defined in RFC 1157 and RFC 1905.  It also adds a
pseudo error status code `noResponse' which indicates a
timeout condition.



 TOC 

28.  DLSW-MIB (revision 1996-06-04 09:00)

This MIB module contains objects to manage Data Link Switches.



 TOC 

28.1.  NBName

Represents a single qualified NetBIOS name, which can include
`don't care' and `wildcard' characters to represent a number
of real NetBIOS names.  If an individual character position in
the qualified name contains a `?', the corresponding character
position in a real NetBIOS name is a `don't care'.  If the
qualified name ends in `*', the remainder of a real NetBIOS
name is a `don't care'. `*' is only considered a wildcard if it
appears at the end of a name.



 TOC 

28.2.  MacAddressNC

Represents an 802 MAC address represented in
non-canonical format.  That is, the most significant
bit will be transmitted first.  If this information
is not available, the value is a zero length string.



 TOC 

28.3.  TAddress

Denotes a transport service address.
For dlswTCPDomain, a TAddress is 4 octets long,
containing the IP-address in network-byte order.



 TOC 

28.4.  EndStationLocation

Representing the location of an end station related
to the managed DLSw node.



 TOC 

28.5.  DlcType

Representing the type of DLC of an end station, if
applicable.



 TOC 

28.6.  LFSize

The largest size of the INFO field (including DLC header,
not including any MAC-level or framing octets).
64 valid values as defined by the IEEE 802.1D
Addendum are acceptable.



 TOC 

28.7.  DlswTCPAddress

Represents the IP address of a DLSw which uses
TCP as a transport protocol.



 TOC 

29.  DNS-SERVER-MIB (revision 1994-01-28 22:51)

The MIB module for entities implementing the server side of the Domain Name System (DNS) protocol.



 TOC 

29.1.  DnsName

A DNS name is a sequence of labels.  When DNS names are
displayed, the boundaries between labels are typically
indicated by dots (e.g. `Acme' and `COM' are labels in
the name `Acme.COM').  In the DNS protocol, however, no
such separators are needed because each label is encoded
as a length octet followed by the indicated number of
octets of label.  For example, `Acme.COM' is encoded as
the octet sequence { 4, 'A', 'c', 'm', 'e', 3, 'C', 'O',
'M', 0 } (the final 0 is the length of the name of the
root domain, which appears implicitly at the end of any
DNS name).  This MIB uses the same encoding as the DNS
protocol.

A DnsName must always be a fully qualified name.  It is
an error to encode a relative domain name as a DnsName
without first making it a fully qualified name.



 TOC 

29.2.  DnsNameAsIndex

This textual convention is like a DnsName, but is used
as an index componant in tables.  Alphabetic characters
in names of this type are restricted to uppercase: the
characters 'a' through 'z' are mapped to the characters
'A' through 'Z'.  This restriction is intended to make
the lexical ordering imposed by SNMP useful when applied
to DNS names.

Note that it is theoretically possible for a valid DNS
name to exceed the allowed length of an SNMP object
identifer, and thus be impossible to represent in tables
in this MIB that are indexed by DNS name.  Sampling of
DNS names in current use on the Internet suggests that
this limit does not pose a serious problem in practice.



 TOC 

29.3.  DnsClass

This data type is used to represent the class values
which appear in Resource Records in the DNS.  A 16-bit
unsigned integer is used to allow room for new classes
of records to be defined.  Existing standard classes are
listed in the DNS specifications.



 TOC 

29.4.  DnsType

This data type is used to represent the type values
which appear in Resource Records in the DNS.  A 16-bit
unsigned integer is used to allow room for new record
types to be defined.  Existing standard types are listed
in the DNS specifications.



 TOC 

29.5.  DnsQClass

This data type is used to represent the QClass values
which appear in Resource Records in the DNS.  A 16-bit
unsigned integer is used to allow room for new QClass
records to be defined.  Existing standard QClasses are
listed in the DNS specification.



 TOC 

29.6.  DnsQType

This data type is used to represent the QType values
which appear in Resource Records in the DNS.  A 16-bit
unsigned integer is used to allow room for new QType
records to be defined.  Existing standard QTypes are
listed in the DNS specification.



 TOC 

29.7.  DnsTime

DnsTime values are 32-bit unsigned integers which
measure time in seconds.



 TOC 

29.8.  DnsOpCode

This textual convention is used to represent the DNS
OPCODE values used in the header section of DNS
messages.  Existing standard OPCODE values are listed in
the DNS specifications.



 TOC 

29.9.  DnsRespCode

This data type is used to represent the DNS RCODE value
in DNS response messages.  Existing standard RCODE
values are listed in the DNS specifications.



 TOC 

30.  DOCS-IETF-BPI2-MIB (revision 2005-07-20 00:00)

This is the MIB module for the DOCSIS Baseline Privacy Plus Interface (BPI+) at cable modems (CMs) and cable modem termination systems (CMTSs). Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4131; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

30.1.  DocsX509ASN1DEREncodedCertificate

An X509 digital certificate encoded as an ASN.1 DER
object.



 TOC 

30.2.  DocsSAId

Security Association identifier (SAID).



 TOC 

30.3.  DocsSAIdOrZero

Security Association identifier (SAID).  The value
zero indicates that the SAID is yet to be determined.



 TOC 

30.4.  DocsBpkmSAType

The type of security association (SA).
The values of the named-numbers are associated
with the BPKM SA-Type attributes:
'primary' corresponds to code '1', 'static' to code '2',



and 'dynamic' to code '3'.
The 'none' value must only be used if the SA type has yet
to be determined.



 TOC 

30.5.  DocsBpkmDataEncryptAlg

The list of data encryption algorithms defined for
the DOCSIS interface in the BPKM cryptographic-suite
parameter.  The value 'none' indicates that the SAID
being referenced has no data encryption.



 TOC 

30.6.  DocsBpkmDataAuthentAlg

The list of data integrity algorithms defined for the
DOCSIS interface in the BPKM cryptographic-suite parameter.
The value 'none' indicates that no data integrity is used for
the SAID being referenced.



 TOC 

31.  DOCS-IETF-QOS-MIB (revision 2006-01-23 00:00)

This is the management information for Quality Of Service (QOS) for DOCSIS 1.1 and 2.0. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4323; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

31.1.  DocsIetfQosRfMacIfDirection

Indicates a direction on an RF MAC interface.

The value downstream(1) is from Cable Modem
Termination System to Cable Modem.

The value upstream(2) is from Cable Modem to
Cable Modem Termination System.



 TOC 

31.2.  DocsIetfQosBitRate

The rate of traffic in unit of bits per second.
Used to specify traffic rate for QOS.



 TOC 

31.3.  DocsIetfQosSchedulingType

The scheduling service provided by a CMTS for an
upstream Service Flow.  If the parameter is omitted
from an upstream QOS Parameter Set, this object
takes the value of bestEffort (2).  This parameter
must be reported as undefined (1) for downstream
QOS Parameter Sets.



 TOC 

32.  DOCS-IF-MIB (revision 2006-05-24 00:00)

This is the MIB Module for DOCSIS 2.0-compliant Radio Frequency (RF) interfaces in Cable Modems and Cable Modem Termination Systems. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4546; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

32.1.  TenthdBmV

This data type represents power levels that are normally
expressed in dBmV.  Units are in tenths of a dBmV;
for example, 5.1 dBmV will be represented as 51.



 TOC 

32.2.  TenthdB

This data type represents power levels that are normally
expressed in dB.  Units are in tenths of a dB;
for example, 5.1 dB will be represented as 51.



 TOC 

32.3.  DocsisVersion

Indicates the DOCSIS Radio Frequency specification being
referenced.
'docsis10' indicates DOCSIS 1.0.
'docsis11' indicates DOCSIS 1.1.
'docsis20' indicates DOCSIS 2.0.



 TOC 

32.4.  DocsisQosVersion

Indicates the referenced quality-of-service
level.
'docsis10 refers to DOCSIS 1.0 Class of
Service queuing services, and 'docsis11' refers
to DOCSIS 1.1 Quality of Service.



 TOC 

32.5.  DocsisUpstreamType

Indicates the DOCSIS Upstream Channel Type.
'unknown' means information not available.
'tdma' is related to TDMA, Time Division
Multiple Access; 'atdma' is related to A-TDMA,
Advanced Time Division Multiple Access,
'scdma' is related to S-CDMA, Synchronous
Code Division Multiple Access.
'tdmaAndAtdma is related to simultaneous support of
TDMA and A-TDMA modes.



 TOC 

32.6.  DocsEqualizerData

This data type represents the equalizer data
as measured at the receiver interface.
The format of the equalizer follows the structure of the
Transmit Equalization Adjust RNG-RSP TLV of DOCSIS RFI
v2.0 :
1 byte Main tap location 1..(n + m)
1 byte Number of forward taps per symbol
1 byte Number of forward taps: n
1 byte Number of reverse taps: m

Following are the equalizer coefficients:
First, forward taps coefficients:
2 bytes F1 (real),  2 bytes  F1 (imag)



...
2 bytes Fn (real),  2 bytes  Fn (imag)

Then, reverse taps coefficients:
2 bytes D1 (real),  2 bytes  D1 (imag)
...

2 bytes Dm (real),  2 bytes  Dm (imag)

The equalizer coefficients are considered signed 16-bit
integers in the range from -32768 (0x8000) to 32767
(0x7FFF).

DOCSIS specifications require up to a maximum of
64 equalizer taps (n + m); therefore, this object size
 can get up 260 bytes (4 + 4x64).
The minimum object size (other than zero) for a t-spaced
tap with a minimum of 8 symbols will be 36 (4 + 4x8).



 TOC 

33.  DOT3-OAM-MIB (revision 2007-06-14 00:00)

The MIB module for managing the new Ethernet OAM features introduced by the Ethernet in the First Mile taskforce (IEEE 802.3ah). The functionality presented here is based on IEEE 802.3ah [802.3ah], released in October, 2004. [802.3ah] was prepared as an addendum to the standing version of IEEE 802.3 [802.3-2002]. Since then, [802.3ah] has been merged into the base IEEE 802.3 specification in [802.3-2005]. In particular, this MIB focuses on the new OAM functions introduced in Clause 57 of [802.3ah]. The OAM functionality of Clause 57 is controlled by new management attributes introduced in Clause 30 of [802.3ah]. The OAM functions are not specific to any particular Ethernet physical layer, and can be generically applied to any Ethernet interface of [802.3-2002]. An Ethernet OAM protocol data unit is a valid Ethernet frame with a destination MAC address equal to the reserved MAC address for Slow Protocols (See 43B of [802.3ah]), a lengthOrType field equal to the reserved type for Slow Protocols, and a Slow Protocols subtype equal to that of the subtype reserved for Ethernet OAM. OAMPDU is used throughout this document as an abbreviation for Ethernet OAM protocol data unit. The following reference is used throughout this MIB module: [802.3ah] refers to: IEEE Std 802.3ah-2004: 'Draft amendment to - Information technology - Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks - Specific requirements - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications - Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers and Management Parameters for subscriber access networks', October 2004. [802.3-2002] refers to: IEEE Std 802.3-2002: 'Information technology - Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks - Specific requirements - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications - Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers and Management Parameters for subscriber access networks', March 2002. [802.3-2005] refers to: IEEE Std 802.3-2005: 'Information technology - Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks - Specific requirements - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications - Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers and Management Parameters for subscriber access networks', December 2005. [802-2001] refers to: 'IEEE Standard for LAN/MAN (Local Area Network/Metropolitan Area Network): Overview and Architecture', IEEE 802, June 2001. Copyright (c) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4878; See the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

33.1.  EightOTwoOui

24-bit Organizationally Unique Identifier.  Information on
OUIs can be found in IEEE 802-2001 [802-2001], Clause 9.



 TOC 

34.  DSMON-MIB (revision 2002-05-31 00:00)

This module defines Remote Monitoring MIB extensions for Differentiated Services enabled networks. RMON DIFFSERV DSCP statistics * Per Counter Aggregation Group * Per Protocol Per Counter Aggregation Group * Per Counter Aggregation Group Per Host * Per Counter Aggregation Group Per Host-Pair In order to maintain the RMON 'look-and-feel' and semantic consistency, some of the text from the RMON-2 and HC-RMON MIBs by Steve Waldbusser has been adapted for use in this MIB.



 TOC 

34.1.  DsmonCounterAggGroupIndex

This TC describes a data type which identifies a DSMON
counter aggregation group, which is an arbitrary grouping of
conceptual counters, for monitoring purposes only.  The
range for this data type begins with zero (instead of
one), to allow for a direct mapping between counter
indexing schemes that start at zero (e.g. DSCP values in
packets) and counter aggregation group values.



 TOC 

34.2.  DsmonCounterAggProfileIndex

This TC describes a data type which identifies a DSMON
counter aggregation profile, which is a set of counter
aggregation group assignments for each of the 64 DSCP
values, for a particular statistical collection.



 TOC 

35.  DVB-RCS-MIB (revision 2010-02-16 12:00)

DVB-RCS MIB subtree. This MIB module applies to equipment that is a Return Channel Satellite Terminal (RCST), defined in the Digital Video Broadcasting Return Channel via Satellite system (DVB-RCS) standard (ETSI EN 301 790 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Interaction Channel for Satellite Distribution Systems, European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)). It defines a set of MIB objects to characterize the behavior and performance of network-layer entities implementing DVB-RCS. This MIB module is intended to be used by DVB-RCS equipment following the SatLabs System Recommendations, defined by the SatLabs Group and available at www.satlabs.org. Note that, if not stated otherwise in the object DESCRIPTION clause, all writable objects are persistent. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2010). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5728; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

35.1.  DvbRcsSatLabsProfileMap

This textual convention enumerates the declaration of
the SatLabs-defined terminal profiles.  The mapping to
the profiles is to be understood as described here.  (0)
refers to the most significant bit.

 dvbs(0) -> DVBS profile (DVB-S support)
 dvbs2ccm(1) -> DVB-S2 CCM profile (CCM support)
 dvbs2acm(2) -> DVB-S2 ACM profile (CCM, VCM and ACM
 support)



 TOC 

35.2.  DvbRcsSatLabsOptionMap

This textual convention enumerates the declaration of
the SatLabs-defined options.  A value of 1 indicates
that the respective option is supported.  The mapping
to the options is to be understood as described here.
(0) refers to the most significant bit.

    mpegTrf(0) -> MPEG_TRF
    coarseSync(1) -> COARSE_SYNC
    wideHop(2) -> WIDE_HOPP
    fastHop(3) -> FAST_HOPP
    dynamicMfTdma(4) -> Dynamic_MF_TDMA
    contentionSync(5) -> CONTENTION_SYNC
    qpskLow(6) -> QPSKLOW
    mod16Apsk(7) -> 16APSK
    mod32Apsk(8) -> 32APSK
    normalFec(9) -> NORMALFEC
    multiTs(10) -> MULTITS
    gsTs(11) -> GSTS
    enhQoS(12) -> ENHQOS



    pep(13) -> PEP
    http(14) -> HTTP
    ftp(15) -> FTP
    dns(16) -> DNS
    chIdStrict(17) -> CHID_STRICT
    nlid(18) -> NLID
    snmpMisc(19) -> SNMPMISC

The support of specific options mandates the support of
specific objects and access levels.



 TOC 

35.3.  DvbRcsSatLabsFeatureMap

This textual convention enumerates the declaration
of the SatLabs-specified compatibility and
configuration features.  A value of 1 indicates that
the respective feature is supported.  The mapping to
the features is to be understood as described here.
(0) refers to the most significant bit.

    rcstPara(0) -> RCST_PARA feature
    installLog(1) -> INSTALL_LOG feature
    enhClassifier(2) -> ENHCLASSIFIER feature
    routeId(3) -> ROUTE_ID feature
    oduList(4) -> ODULIST feature
    extNetwork(5) -> EXTNETWORK feature
    extControl(6) -> EXTCONTROL feature
    extConfig(7) -> EXTCONFIG feature
    extStatus(8) -> EXTSTATUS feature
    mpaf(9) -> MPAF feature

The support of specific features mandates the support of
specific objects and access levels.



 TOC 

36.  EBN-MIB (revision 1998-04-28 18:00)

The MIB Module for Extended Border Node



 TOC 

36.1.  SnaNAUWildcardName

Fully-qualified network NAU name. Entries take one of three
forms:
   - Explicit entries do not contain the character '*'.
   - Partial Wildcard entries have the form 'ccc*', where
     'ccc' represents one to sixteen characters in a legal
     SNA NAU Name.
   - A full wildcard  consists of a single character '*'.

Because the characters allowed in an SNA NAU name come from
a restricted character set, these names are not subject to
internationalization.



 TOC 

37.  EFM-CU-MIB (revision 2007-11-14 00:00)

The objects in this MIB module are used to manage the Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) Copper (EFMCu) Interfaces 2BASE-TL and 10PASS-TS, defined in IEEE Std. 802.3ah-2004, which is now a part of IEEE Std. 802.3-2005. The following references are used throughout this MIB module: [802.3ah] refers to: IEEE Std 802.3ah-2004: 'IEEE Standard for Information technology - Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks - Specific requirements - Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications - Amendment: Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers and Management Parameters for Subscriber Access Networks', 07 September 2004. Of particular interest are Clause 61, 'Physical Coding Sublayer (PCS) and common specifications, type 10PASS-TS and type 2BASE-TL', Clause 30, 'Management', Clause 45, 'Management Data Input/Output (MDIO) Interface', Annex 62A, 'PMD profiles for 10PASS-TS' and Annex 63A, 'PMD profiles for 2BASE-TL'. [G.991.2] refers to: ITU-T Recommendation G.991.2: 'Single-pair High-speed Digital Subscriber Line (SHDSL) transceivers', December 2003. [ANFP] refers to: NICC Document ND1602:2005/08: 'Specification of the Access Network Frequency Plan (ANFP) applicable to transmission systems used on the BT Access Network,' August 2005. The following normative documents are quoted by the DESCRIPTION clauses in this MIB module: [G.993.1] refers to: ITU-T Recommendation G.993.1: 'Very High speed Digital Subscriber Line transceivers', June 2004. [T1.424] refers to: ANSI T1.424-2004: 'Interface Between Networks and Customer Installation Very-high-bit-rate Digital Subscriber Lines (VDSL) Metallic Interface (DMT Based)', June 2004. [TS 101 270-1] refers to: ETSI TS 101 270-1: 'Transmission and Multiplexing (TM); Access transmission systems on metallic access cables; Very high speed Digital Subscriber Line (VDSL); Part 1: Functional requirements', October 2005. Naming Conventions: Atn - Attenuation CO - Central Office CPE - Customer Premises Equipment EFM - Ethernet in the First Mile EFMCu - EFM Copper MDIO - Management Data Input/Output Mgn - Margin PAF - PME Aggregation Function PBO - Power Back-Off PCS - Physical Coding Sublayer PMD - Physical Medium Dependent PME - Physical Medium Entity PSD - Power Spectral Density SNR - Signal to Noise Ratio TCPAM - Trellis Coded Pulse Amplitude Modulation Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5066; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

37.1.  EfmProfileIndex

A unique value, greater than zero, for each PME configuration
profile in the managed EFMCu port.  It is RECOMMENDED that
values are assigned contiguously starting from 1.  The value
for each profile MUST remain constant at least from one
re-initialization of the entity's network management system
to the next re-initialization.



 TOC 

37.2.  EfmProfileIndexOrZero

This textual convention is an extension of the
EfmProfileIndex convention.  The latter defines a greater than
zero value used to identify a PME profile in the managed EFMCu
port.  This extension permits the additional value of zero.
The value of zero is object-specific and MUST therefore be
defined as part of the description of any object that uses
this syntax.
Examples of the usage of zero value might include situations
where the current operational profile is unknown.



 TOC 

37.3.  EfmProfileIndexList

This textual convention represents a list of up to 6
EfmProfileIndex values, any of which can be chosen for
configuration of a PME in a managed EFMCu port.
The EfmProfileIndex textual convention defines a greater than
zero value used to identify a PME profile.
The value of this object is a concatenation of zero or
more (up to 6) octets, where each octet contains an 8-bit
EfmProfileIndex value.
A zero-length octet string is object-specific and MUST
therefore be defined as part of the description of any object
that uses this syntax.  Examples of the usage of a zero-length
value might include situations where an object using this
textual convention is irrelevant for a specific EFMCu port
type.



 TOC 

37.4.  EfmTruthValueOrUnknown

This textual convention is an extension of the TruthValue
convention.  The latter defines a boolean value with possible
values of true(1) and false(2).  This extension permits the
additional value of unknown(0), which can be returned as the
result of a GET operation when an exact true or false value
of the object cannot be determined.



 TOC 

38.  ENTITY-MIB (revision 2013-04-05 00:00)

The MIB module for representing multiple logical entities supported by a single SNMP agent. Copyright (c) 2013 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info).



 TOC 

38.1.  PhysicalIndex

An arbitrary value that uniquely identifies the physical
entity.  The value should be a small positive integer.
Index values for different physical entities are not
necessarily contiguous.



 TOC 

38.2.  PhysicalIndexOrZero

This TEXTUAL-CONVENTION is an extension of the
PhysicalIndex convention, which defines a greater than zero
value used to identify a physical entity.  This extension
permits the additional value of zero.  The semantics of the
value zero are object-specific and must, therefore, be
defined as part of the description of any object that uses
this syntax.  Examples of the usage of this extension are
situations where none or all physical entities need to be
referenced.



 TOC 

38.3.  SnmpEngineIdOrNone

A specially formatted SnmpEngineID string for use with the
Entity MIB.

If an instance of an object of SYNTAX SnmpEngineIdOrNone has
a non-zero length, then the object encoding and semantics
are defined by the SnmpEngineID TEXTUAL-CONVENTION (see STD
62, RFC 3411).








If an instance of an object of SYNTAX SnmpEngineIdOrNone
contains a zero-length string, then no appropriate
SnmpEngineID is associated with the logical entity (i.e.,
SNMPv3 is not supported).



 TOC 

38.4.  PhysicalClass (deprecated)

Starting with version 4 of the ENTITY-MIB, this TC is
deprecated, and the usage of the IANAPhysicalClass TC from
the IANA-ENTITY-MIB is recommended instead.

An enumerated value that provides an indication of the
general hardware type of a particular physical entity.
There are no restrictions as to the number of
entPhysicalEntries of each entPhysicalClass, which must be
instantiated by an agent.

The enumeration 'other' is applicable if the physical entity
class is known but does not match any of the supported
values.

The enumeration 'unknown' is applicable if the physical
entity class is unknown to the agent.

The enumeration 'chassis' is applicable if the physical
entity class is an overall container for networking
equipment.  Any class of physical entity, except a stack,
may be contained within a chassis; a chassis may only
be contained within a stack.

The enumeration 'backplane' is applicable if the physical
entity class is some sort of device for aggregating and
forwarding networking traffic, such as a shared backplane in
a modular ethernet switch.  Note that an agent may model a
backplane as a single physical entity, which is actually
implemented as multiple discrete physical components (within
a chassis or stack).

The enumeration 'container' is applicable if the physical
entity class is capable of containing one or more removable
physical entities, possibly of different types.  For
example, each (empty or full) slot in a chassis will be
modeled as a container.  Note that all removable physical
entities should be modeled within a container entity, such





as field-replaceable modules, fans, or power supplies.  Note
that all known containers should be modeled by the agent,
including empty containers.

The enumeration 'powerSupply' is applicable if the physical
entity class is a power-supplying component.

The enumeration 'fan' is applicable if the physical entity
class is a fan or other heat-reduction component.

The enumeration 'sensor' is applicable if the physical
entity class is some sort of sensor, such as a temperature
sensor within a router chassis.

The enumeration 'module' is applicable if the physical
entity class is some sort of self-contained sub-system.  If
the enumeration 'module' is removable, then it should be
modeled within a container entity; otherwise, it should be
modeled directly within another physical entity (e.g., a
chassis or another module).

The enumeration 'port' is applicable if the physical entity
class is some sort of networking port capable of receiving
and/or transmitting networking traffic.

The enumeration 'stack' is applicable if the physical entity
class is some sort of super-container (possibly virtual)
intended to group together multiple chassis entities.  A
stack may be realized by a 'virtual' cable, a real
interconnect cable, attached to multiple chassis, or may in
fact be comprised of multiple interconnect cables.  A stack
should not be modeled within any other physical entities,
but a stack may be contained within another stack.  Only
chassis entities should be contained within a stack.

The enumeration 'cpu' is applicable if the physical entity
class is some sort of central processing unit.



 TOC 

39.  ENTITY-SENSOR-MIB (revision 2002-12-16 00:00)

This module defines Entity MIB extensions for physical sensors. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2002). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3433; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

39.1.  EntitySensorDataType

An object using this data type represents the Entity Sensor
measurement data type associated with a physical sensor
value. The actual data units are determined by examining an
object of this type together with the associated
EntitySensorDataScale object.

An object of this type SHOULD be defined together with
objects of type EntitySensorDataScale and
EntitySensorPrecision.  Together, associated objects of
these three types are used to identify the semantics of an
object of type EntitySensorValue.






Valid values are:

   other(1):        a measure other than those listed below
   unknown(2):      unknown measurement, or arbitrary,
                    relative numbers
   voltsAC(3):      electric potential
   voltsDC(4):      electric potential
   amperes(5):      electric current
   watts(6):        power
   hertz(7):        frequency
   celsius(8):      temperature
   percentRH(9):    percent relative humidity
   rpm(10):         shaft revolutions per minute
   cmm(11),:        cubic meters per minute (airflow)
   truthvalue(12):  value takes { true(1), false(2) }



 TOC 

39.2.  EntitySensorDataScale

An object using this data type represents a data scaling
factor, represented with an International System of Units
(SI) prefix.  The actual data units are determined by
examining an object of this type together with the
associated EntitySensorDataType object.

An object of this type SHOULD be defined together with
objects of type EntitySensorDataType and
EntitySensorPrecision.  Together, associated objects of
these three types are used to identify the semantics of an
object of type EntitySensorValue.



 TOC 

39.3.  EntitySensorPrecision

An object using this data type represents a sensor
precision range.

An object of this type SHOULD be defined together with
objects of type EntitySensorDataType and
EntitySensorDataScale.  Together, associated objects of
these three types are used to identify the semantics of an
object of type EntitySensorValue.

If an object of this type contains a value in the range 1 to
9, it represents the number of decimal places in the
fractional part of an associated EntitySensorValue fixed-
point number.

If an object of this type contains a value in the range -8
to -1, it represents the number of accurate digits in the
associated EntitySensorValue fixed-point number.

The value zero indicates the associated EntitySensorValue
object is not a fixed-point number.

Agent implementors must choose a value for the associated
EntitySensorPrecision object so that the precision and



accuracy of the associated EntitySensorValue object is
correctly indicated.

For example, a physical entity representing a temperature
sensor that can measure 0 degrees to 100 degrees C in 0.1
degree increments, +/- 0.05 degrees, would have an
EntitySensorPrecision value of '1', an EntitySensorDataScale
value of 'units(9)', and an EntitySensorValue ranging from
'0' to '1000'.  The EntitySensorValue would be interpreted
as 'degrees C * 10'.



 TOC 

39.4.  EntitySensorValue

An object using this data type represents an Entity Sensor
value.
An object of this type SHOULD be defined together with
objects of type EntitySensorDataType, EntitySensorDataScale
and EntitySensorPrecision.  Together, associated objects of
those three types are used to identify the semantics of an
object of this data type.

The semantics of an object using this data type are
determined by the value of the associated
EntitySensorDataType object.

If the associated EntitySensorDataType object is equal to
'voltsAC(3)', 'voltsDC(4)', 'amperes(5)', 'watts(6),
'hertz(7)', 'celsius(8)', or 'cmm(11)', then an object of
this type MUST contain a fixed point number ranging from
-999,999,999 to +999,999,999.  The value -1000000000
indicates an underflow error. The value +1000000000
indicates an overflow error.  The EntitySensorPrecision
indicates how many fractional digits are represented in the
associated EntitySensorValue object.

If the associated EntitySensorDataType object is equal to
'percentRH(9)', then an object of this type MUST contain a
number ranging from 0 to 100.

If the associated EntitySensorDataType object is equal to
'rpm(10)', then an object of this type MUST contain a number
ranging from -999,999,999 to +999,999,999.

If the associated EntitySensorDataType object is equal to
'truthvalue(12)', then an object of this type MUST contain
either the value 'true(1)' or the value 'false(2)'.



If the associated EntitySensorDataType object is equal to
'other(1)' or unknown(2)', then an object of this type MUST
contain a number ranging from -1000000000 to 1000000000.



 TOC 

39.5.  EntitySensorStatus

An object using this data type represents the operational
status of a physical sensor.

The value 'ok(1)' indicates that the agent can obtain the
sensor value.

The value 'unavailable(2)' indicates that the agent
presently cannot obtain the sensor value.

The value 'nonoperational(3)' indicates that the agent
believes the sensor is broken.  The sensor could have a hard
failure (disconnected wire), or a soft failure such as out-
of-range, jittery, or wildly fluctuating readings.



 TOC 

40.  ENTITY-STATE-TC-MIB (revision 2005-11-22 00:00)

This MIB defines state textual conventions. Copyright (C) The Internet Society 2005. This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4268; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

40.1.  EntityAdminState

 Represents the various possible administrative states.





A value of 'locked' means the resource is administratively
prohibited from use.  A value of 'shuttingDown' means that
usage is administratively limited to current instances of
use.  A value of 'unlocked' means the resource is not
administratively prohibited from use.  A value of
'unknown' means that this resource is unable to
report administrative state.



 TOC 

40.2.  EntityOperState

 Represents the possible values of operational states.

A value of 'disabled' means the resource is totally
inoperable.  A value of 'enabled' means the resource
is partially or fully operable.  A value of 'testing'
means the resource is currently being tested
and cannot therefore report whether it is operational
or not.  A value of 'unknown' means that this
resource is unable to report operational state.



 TOC 

40.3.  EntityUsageState

 Represents the possible values of usage states.
A value of 'idle' means the resource is servicing no
users.  A value of 'active' means the resource is
currently in use and it has sufficient spare capacity
to provide for additional users.  A value of 'busy'
means the resource is currently in use, but it
currently has no spare capacity to provide for
additional users.  A value of 'unknown' means
that this resource is unable to report usage state.



 TOC 

40.4.  EntityAlarmStatus

 Represents the possible values of alarm status.
An Alarm [RFC3877] is a persistent indication
of an error or warning condition.

When no bits of this attribute are set, then no active
alarms are known against this entity and it is not under
repair.

When the 'value of underRepair' is set, the resource is
currently being repaired, which, depending on the
implementation, may make the other values in this bit
string not meaningful.

When the value of 'critical' is set, one or more critical
alarms are active against the resource.  When the value
of 'major' is set, one or more major alarms are active
against the resource.  When the value of 'minor' is set,
one or more minor alarms are active against the resource.
When the value of 'warning' is set, one or more warning
alarms are active against the resource.  When the value
of 'indeterminate' is set, one or more alarms of whose
perceived severity cannot be determined are active
against this resource.

A value of 'unknown' means that this resource is
unable to report alarm state.



 TOC 

40.5.  EntityStandbyStatus

 Represents the possible values of standby status.

A value of 'hotStandby' means the resource is not
providing service, but it will be immediately able to
take over the role of the resource to be backed up,
without the need for initialization activity, and will
contain the same information as the resource to be
backed up.  A value of 'coldStandy' means that the
resource is to back up another resource, but will not
be immediately able to take over the role of a resource
to be backed up, and will require some initialization
activity.  A value of 'providingService' means the
resource is providing service.  A value of
'unknown' means that this resource is unable to
report standby state.



 TOC 

41.  FCIP-MGMT-MIB (revision 2006-02-06 00:00)

The module defines management information specific to FCIP devices. Copyright(C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4404; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

41.1.  FcipDomainIdInOctetForm

The Domain ID of a FC entity in octet form
to support the concatenation(000000h||Domain_ID)
format defined in the FSPF routing protocol.



 TOC 

41.2.  FcipEntityMode

The type of port mode provided by an FCIP Entity
for an FCIP Link.  An FCIP Entity can be an E-Port
mode for one of its FCIP Link Endpoints or a B-Port
mode for another of its FCIP Link Endpoints.



 TOC 

41.3.  FcipEntityId

The FCIP entity identifier as defined in RFC 3821.



 TOC 

42.  FC-MGMT-MIB (revision 2005-04-26 00:00)

This module defines management information specific to Fibre Channel-attached devices. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4044; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

42.1.  FcNameIdOrZero

The World Wide Name (WWN) associated with a Fibre Channel
(FC) entity.  WWNs were initially defined as 64-bits in
length.  The latest definition (for future use) is 128-bits
long.  The zero-length string value is used in
circumstances in which the WWN is unassigned/unknown.



 TOC 

42.2.  FcAddressIdOrZero

A Fibre Channel Address ID, a 24-bit value unique within
the address space of a Fabric.  The zero-length string value
is used in circumstances in which the WWN is
unassigned/unknown.



 TOC 

42.3.  FcDomainIdOrZero

The Domain Id (of an FC switch), or zero if the no Domain
Id has been assigned.



 TOC 

42.4.  FcPortType

The type of a Fibre Channel port, as indicated by the use
of the appropriate value assigned by IANA.



 TOC 

42.5.  FcClasses

A set of Fibre Channel classes of service.



 TOC 

42.6.  FcBbCredit

The buffer-to-buffer credit of an FC port.



 TOC 

42.7.  FcBbCreditModel

The buffer-to-buffer credit model of an Fx_Port.



 TOC 

42.8.  FcDataFieldSize

The Receive Data Field Size associated with an FC port.



 TOC 

42.9.  FcUnitFunctions

A set of functions that a Fibre Channel Interconnect
Element or Platform might perform.  A value with no bits set
indicates the function(s) are unknown.  The individual bits
have the following meanings:

other - none of the following.

hub - a device that interconnects L_Ports, but does not
operate as an FL_Port.

switch - a fabric element conforming to the Fibre Channel
switch fabric set of standards (e.g., [FC-SW-3]).

bridge - a device that encapsulates Fibre Channel frames
within another protocol (e.g., [FC-BB], FC-BB-2).

gateway - a device that converts an FC-4 to another protocol
(e.g., FCP to iSCSI).

host - a computer system that provides end users with
services such as computation and storage access.

storageSubsys - an integrated collection of storage
controllers, storage devices, and necessary software that
provides storage services to one or more hosts.

storageAccessDev - a device that provides storage management
and access for heterogeneous hosts and heterogeneous devices
(e.g., medium changer).

nas - a device that connects to a network and provides file
access services.

wdmux - a device that modulates/demodulates each of several
data streams (e.g., Fibre Channel protocol data streams)
onto/from a different part of the light spectrum in an
optical fiber.

storageDevice - a disk/tape/etc. device (without the
controller and/or software required for it to be a
'storageSubsys').



 TOC 

43.  FIBRE-CHANNEL-FE-MIB (revision 2000-05-18 00:00)

The MIB module for Fibre Channel Fabric Element.



 TOC 

43.1.  MilliSeconds

Represents time unit value in milliseconds.



 TOC 

43.2.  MicroSeconds

Represents time unit value in microseconds.



 TOC 

43.3.  FcNameId

Represents the Worldwide Name associated with
a Fibre Channel (FC) entity.



 TOC 

43.4.  FcAddressId

Represents Fibre Channel Address ID, a 24-bit
value unique within the address space of a Fabric.



 TOC 

43.5.  FcRxDataFieldSize

Represents the receive data field size of an
NxPort or FxPort.



 TOC 

43.6.  FcBbCredit

Represents the buffer-to-buffer credit of an
NxPort or FxPort.



 TOC 

43.7.  FcphVersion

Represents the version of FC-PH supported by an
NxPort or FxPort.



 TOC 

43.8.  FcStackedConnMode

Represents an enumerated value used to indicate
the Class 1 Stacked Connect Mode supported by
an NxPort or FxPort.



 TOC 

43.9.  FcCosCap

Represents the class of service capability of an
NxPort or FxPort.



 TOC 

43.10.  FcFeModuleCapacity

Represents the maximum number of modules within
a Fabric Element.



 TOC 

43.11.  FcFeFxPortCapacity

Represents the maximum number of FxPorts within
a module.



 TOC 

43.12.  FcFeModuleIndex

Represents the module index within a conceptual table.



 TOC 

43.13.  FcFeFxPortIndex

Represents the FxPort index within a conceptual table.



 TOC 

43.14.  FcFeNxPortIndex

Represents the NxPort index within a conceptual table.



 TOC 

43.15.  FcBbCreditModel

Represents the BB_Credit model of an FxPort.



 TOC 

44.  FLOAT-TC-MIB (revision 2011-07-27 00:00)

Textual conventions for the representation of floating-point numbers. Copyright (c) 2011 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 6340; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

44.1.  Float32TC

This type represents a 32-bit (4-octet) IEEE
floating-point number in binary interchange format.



 TOC 

44.2.  Float64TC

This type represents a 64-bit (8-octet) IEEE
floating-point number in binary interchange format.



 TOC 

44.3.  Float128TC

This type represents a 128-bit (16-octet) IEEE
floating-point number in binary interchange format.



 TOC 

45.  FLOW-METER-MIB (revision 1999-10-25 00:00)

MIB for the RTFM Traffic Flow Meter.



 TOC 

45.1.  UTF8OwnerString

An administratively assigned name for the owner of a
resource, conceptually the same as OwnerString in the RMON
MIB [RMON-MIB].

To facilitate internationalisation, this name information
is represented using the ISO/IEC IS 10646-1 character set,
encoded as an octet string using the UTF-8 transformation
format described in the UTF-8 standard [UTF-8].



 TOC 

45.2.  PeerType

Indicates the type of a PeerAddress (see below).  The values
used are from the 'Address Family Numbers' section of the
Assigned Numbers RFC [ASG-NBR].  Peer types from other address
families may also be used, provided only that they are
identified by their assigned Address Family numbers.



 TOC 

45.3.  PeerAddress

Specifies the value of a peer address for various network
protocols.  Address format depends on the actual protocol,
as indicated below:

IPv4:        ipv4(1)
    4-octet IpAddress  (defined in the SNMPv2 SMI [RFC2578])

IPv6:        ipv6(2)
    16-octet IpAddress  (defined in the
                            IPv6 Addressing RFC [V6-ADDR])

CLNS:        nsap(3)
    NsapAddress  (defined in the SNMPv2 SMI [RFC2578])

Novell:      ipx(11)
    4-octet Network number,
    6-octet Host number (MAC address)

AppleTalk:   appletalk(12)
    2-octet Network number (sixteen bits),
    1-octet Host number (eight bits)

DECnet:      decnet(13)
    1-octet Area number (in low-order six bits),
    2-octet Host number (in low-order ten bits)



 TOC 

45.4.  AdjacentType

Indicates the type of an adjacent address.  May be a medium
type or (if metering is taking place inside a tunnel) a
PeerType (see above).

The values used for IEEE 802 medium types are from the 'Network
Management Parameters (ifType definitions)' section of the
Assigned Numbers RFC [ASG-NBR].  Other medium types may also
be used, provided only that they are identified by their
assigned ifType numbers.



 TOC 

45.5.  AdjacentAddress

Specifies the value of an adjacent address.  May be a Medium
Access Control (MAC) address or (if metering is taking place
inside a tunnel) a PeerAddress (see above).

MAC Address format depends on the actual medium, as follows:

Ethernet:     ethernet(7)
    6-octet 802.3 MAC address in 'canonical' order
Token Ring:   tokenring(9)
    6-octet 802.5 MAC address in 'canonical' order

FDDI:         fddi(15)
    FddiMACLongAddress, i.e. a 6-octet MAC address
    in 'canonical' order  (defined in [FDDI-MIB])



 TOC 

45.6.  TransportType

Indicates the type of a TransportAddress (see below).  Values
will depend on the actual protocol; for IP they will be those
given in the 'Protocol Numbers' section of the  Assigned Numbers
RFC [ASG-NBR], including icmp(1), tcp(6) and udp(17).



 TOC 

45.7.  TransportAddress

Specifies the value of a transport address for various
network protocols.  Format as follows:

IP:
    2-octet UDP or TCP port number

Other protocols:
    2-octet port number



 TOC 

45.8.  RuleAddress

Specifies the value of an address.  Is a superset of
MediumAddress, PeerAddress and TransportAddress.



 TOC 

45.9.  FlowAttributeNumber

Uniquely identifies an attribute within a flow data record.



 TOC 

45.10.  RuleAttributeNumber

Uniquely identifies an attribute which may be tested in
a rule.  These include attributes whose values come directly
from (or are computed from) the flow's packets, and the five
'meter' variables used to hold an Attribute Number.



 TOC 

45.11.  ActionNumber

Uniquely identifies the action of a rule, i.e. the Pattern
Matching Engine's opcode number.  Details of the opcodes
are given in the 'Traffic Flow Measurement: Architecture'
document [RTFM-ARC].



 TOC 

46.  FORCES-MIB (revision 2010-03-10 00:00)

This MIB module contains managed object definitions for the ForCES Protocol. Copyright (c) 2010 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5813; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

46.1.  ForcesID

The ForCES identifier is a 4-octet quantity.



 TOC 

46.2.  ForcesProtocolVersion

ForCES protocol version number.
The version numbers used are defined in the
specifications of the respective protocol:
1 - ForCESv1, RFC 5810.



 TOC 

47.  FRAME-RELAY-DTE-MIB (revision 1997-05-01 02:29)

The MIB module to describe the use of a Frame Relay interface by a DTE.



 TOC 

47.1.  DLCI

The range of DLCI values.  Note that this varies by
interface configuration; normally, interfaces may use
0..1023, but may be configured to use ranges as large
as 0..2^23.



 TOC 

48.  FR-MFR-MIB (revision 2000-11-30 00:00)

This is the MIB used to control and monitor the multilink frame relay (MFR) function described in FRF.16.



 TOC 

48.1.  MfrBundleLinkState

The possible states for a bundle link, as defined in
Annex A of FRF.16.



 TOC 

49.  FRSLD-MIB (revision 2002-01-03 00:00)

The MIB module to describe generic objects for FRF.13 Frame Relay Service Level Definitions.



 TOC 

49.1.  FrsldTxRP

The reference point a PVC uses for calculation
of transmitter related statistics.

The valid values for this type of object are as follows:
  - srcLocalRP(1) for the local source
  - ingTxLocalRP(2) for the local ingress queue input
  - tpTxLocalRP(3) for the local traffic policing
  - eqiTxLocalRP(4) for the local egress queue input
  - eqoTxLocalRP(5) for the local egress queue output
  - otherTxLocalRP(6) for any other local transmit point
  - srcRemoteRP(7) for the remote source
  - ingTxLocalRP(8) for the remote ingress queue input
  - tpTxLocalRP(9) for the remote traffic policing
  - eqiTxRemoteRP(10) for the remote egress queue input
  - eqoTxRemoteRP(11) for the remote egress queue output
  - otherTxRemoteRP(12) for any other remote xmit point



 TOC 

49.2.  FrsldRxRP

The reference point a PVC uses for calculation
of receiver related statistics.

The valid values for this object are as follows:
  - desLocalRP(1) for the local destination
  - ingRxLocalRP(2) for the local ingress queue input
  - tpRxLocalRP(3) for the local traffic policing
  - eqiRxLocalRP(4) for the local egress queue input
  - eqoRxLocalRP(5) for the local egress queue output
  - otherRxLocalRP(6) for any other local receive point
  - desRemoteRP(7) for the remote destination
  - ingRxRemoteRP(8) for the remote ingress input
  - tpRxRemoteRP(9) for the remote traffic policing
  - eqiRxRemoteRP(10) for the remote egress queue input
  - eqoRxRemoteRP(11) for the remote egress queue output
  - otherRxRemoteRP(12) for any other remote receive point



 TOC 

50.  GMPLS-TC-STD-MIB (revision 2007-02-28 00:00)

Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4801; see the RFC itself for full legal notices. This MIB module defines TEXTUAL-CONVENTIONs for concepts used in Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching (GMPLS) networks.



 TOC 

50.1.  GmplsFreeformLabelTC

This TEXTUAL-CONVENTION can be used as the syntax of an object
that contains any GMPLS Label.  Objects with this syntax can be
used to represent labels that have label types that are not
defined in any RFCs.  The freeform GMPLS Label may also be used
by systems that do not wish to represent labels that have
label types defined in RFCs using type-specific syntaxes.



 TOC 

50.2.  GmplsLabelTypeTC

Determines the interpretation that should be applied to an
object that encodes a label.  The possible types are:

gmplsMplsLabel(1)           - The label is an MPLS Packet, Cell,
                              or Frame Label and is encoded as
                              described for the TEXTUAL-
                              CONVENTION MplsLabel defined in
                              RFC 3811.

gmplsPortWavelengthLabel(2) - The label is a Port or Wavelength
                              Label as defined in RFC 3471.

gmplsFreeformLabel(3)       - The label is any form of label
                              encoded as an OCTET STRING using
                              the TEXTUAL-CONVENTION
                              GmplsFreeformLabel.

gmplsSonetLabel(4)          - The label is a Synchronous Optical
                              Network (SONET) Label as
                              defined in RFC 4606.

gmplsSdhLabel(5)            - The label is a Synchronous Digital
                              Hierarchy (SDH) Label as defined
                              in RFC 4606.

gmplsWavebandLabel(6)       - The label is a Waveband Label as
                              defined in RFC 3471.



 TOC 

50.3.  GmplsSegmentDirectionTC

The direction of data flow on an Label Switched Path (LSP)
segment with respect to the head of the LSP.

Where an LSP is signaled using a conventional signaling
protocol, the 'head' of the LSP is the source of the signaling
(also known as the ingress) and the 'tail' is the destination
(also known as the egress).  For unidirectional LSPs, this
usually matches the direction of flow of data.

For manually configured unidirectional LSPs, the direction of
the LSP segment matches the direction of flow of data.  For
manually configured bidirectional LSPs, an arbitrary decision
must be made about which LER is the 'head'.



 TOC 

51.  GSMP-MIB (revision 2002-05-31 00:00)

This MIB contains managed object definitions for the General Switch Management Protocol, GSMP, version 3



 TOC 

51.1.  GsmpNameType

The Name is a 48-bit quantity.
A 48-bit IEEE 802 MAC address, if
available, may be used.



 TOC 

51.2.  GsmpPartitionType

Defining if partitions are used and how the partition id
is negotiated.



 TOC 

51.3.  GsmpPartitionIdType

A 8-bit quantity. The format of the Partition ID is not
defined in GSMP. If desired, the Partition ID can be
divided into multiple sub-identifiers within a single



partition. For example: the Partition ID could be
subdivided into a 6-bit partition number and a 2-bit
sub-identifier which would allow a switch to support 64
partitions with 4 available IDs per partition.



 TOC 

51.4.  GsmpVersion

The version numbers defined for the GSMP protocol.
The version numbers used are defined in the
specifications of the respective protocol,
1 - GSMPv1.1 [RFC1987]
2 - GSMPv2.0 [RFC2397]
3 - GSMPv3   [RFC3292]
Other numbers may be defined for other versions
of the GSMP protocol.



 TOC 

51.5.  GsmpLabelType

The label is structured as a TLV, a tuple, consisting of
a Type, a Length, and a Value. The structure is defined
in [RFC 3292]. The label TLV is encoded as a 2 octet type
field, followed by a 2 octet Length field, followed by a
variable length Value field.
Additionally, a label field can be composed of many stacked
labels that together constitute the label.



 TOC 

52.  HC-ALARM-MIB (revision 2002-12-16 00:00)

This module defines Remote Monitoring MIB extensions for High Capacity Alarms. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2002). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3434; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

52.1.  HcValueStatus

This data type indicates the validity and sign of the data
in associated object instances which represent the absolute
value of a high capacity numeric quantity.  Such an object
may be represented with one or more object instances. An
object of type HcValueStatus MUST be defined within the same



structure as the object(s) representing the high capacity
absolute value.

If the associated object instance(s) representing the high
capacity absolute value could not be accessed during the
sampling interval, and is therefore invalid, then the
associated HcValueStatus object will contain the value
'valueNotAvailable(1)'.

If the associated object instance(s) representing the high
capacity absolute value are valid and actual value of the
sample is greater than or equal to zero, then the associated
HcValueStatus object will contain the value
'valuePositive(2)'.

If the associated object instance(s) representing the high
capacity absolute value are valid and the actual value of
the sample is less than zero, then the associated
HcValueStatus object will contain the value
'valueNegative(3)'.  The associated absolute value should be
multiplied by -1 to obtain the true sample value.



 TOC 

53.  HCNUM-TC (revision 2000-06-08 00:00)

A MIB module containing textual conventions for high capacity data types. This module addresses an immediate need for data types not directly supported in the SMIv2. This short-term solution is meant to be deprecated as a long-term solution is deployed.



 TOC 

53.1.  CounterBasedGauge64

The CounterBasedGauge64 type represents a non-negative
integer, which may increase or decrease, but shall never
exceed a maximum value, nor fall below a minimum value. The
maximum value can not be greater than 2^64-1
(18446744073709551615 decimal), and the minimum value can


not be smaller than 0.  The value of a CounterBasedGauge64
has its maximum value whenever the information being modeled
is greater than or equal to its maximum value, and has its
minimum value whenever the information being modeled is
smaller than or equal to its minimum value.  If the
information being modeled subsequently decreases below
(increases above) the maximum (minimum) value, the
CounterBasedGauge64 also decreases (increases).

Note that this TC is not strictly supported in SMIv2,
because the 'always increasing' and 'counter wrap' semantics
associated with the Counter64 base type are not preserved.
It is possible that management applications which rely
solely upon the (Counter64) ASN.1 tag to determine object
semantics will mistakenly operate upon objects of this type
as they would for Counter64 objects.

This textual convention represents a limited and short-term
solution, and may be deprecated as a long term solution is
defined and deployed to replace it.



 TOC 

53.2.  ZeroBasedCounter64

This TC describes an object which counts events with the
following semantics: objects of this type will be set to
zero(0) on creation and will thereafter count appropriate
events, wrapping back to zero(0) when the value 2^64 is
reached.

Provided that an application discovers the new object within
the minimum time to wrap it can use the initial value as a
delta since it last polled the table of which this object is
part.  It is important for a management station to be aware
of this minimum time and the actual time between polls, and
to discard data if the actual time is too long or there is
no defined minimum time.

Typically this TC is used in tables where the INDEX space is
constantly changing and/or the TimeFilter mechanism is in
use.

Note that this textual convention does not retain all the
semantics of the Counter64 base type. Specifically, a
Counter64 has an arbitrary initial value, but objects
defined with this TC are required to start at the value


zero.  This behavior is not likely to have any adverse
effects on management applications which are expecting
Counter64 semantics.

This textual convention represents a limited and short-term
solution, and may be deprecated as a long term solution is
defined and deployed to replace it.



 TOC 

54.  HC-PerfHist-TC-MIB (revision 2004-02-03 00:00)

This MIB Module provides Textual Conventions to be used by systems supporting 15 minute based performance history counts that require high-capacity counts. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3705: see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

54.1.  HCPerfValidIntervals

The number of near end intervals for which data was



collected.  The value of an object with an
HCPerfValidIntervals syntax will be 96 unless the
measurement was (re-)started within the last 1440 minutes,
in which case the value will be the number of complete 15
minute intervals for which the agent has at least some data.
In certain cases (e.g., in the case where the agent is a
proxy) it is possible that some intervals are unavailable.
In this case, this interval is the maximum interval number
for which data is available.



 TOC 

54.2.  HCPerfInvalidIntervals

The number of near end intervals for which no data is
available.  The value of an object with an
HCPerfInvalidIntervals syntax will typically be zero except
in cases where the data for some intervals are not available
(e.g., in proxy situations).



 TOC 

54.3.  HCPerfTimeElapsed

The number of seconds that have elapsed since the beginning
of the current measurement period.  If, for some reason,
such as an adjustment in the system's time-of-day clock or
the addition of a leap second, the duration of the current
interval exceeds the maximum value, the agent will return
the maximum value.

For 15 minute intervals, the range is limited to (0..899).
For 24 hour intervals, the range is limited to (0..86399).



 TOC 

54.4.  HCPerfIntervalThreshold

This convention defines a range of values that may be set
in a fault threshold alarm control.  As the number of
seconds in a 15-minute interval numbers at most 900,
objects of this type may have a range of 0...900, where the
value of 0 disables the alarm.



 TOC 

54.5.  HCPerfCurrentCount

A gauge associated with a performance measurement in a
current 15 minute measurement interval.  The value of an
object with an HCPerfCurrentCount syntax starts from zero
and is increased when associated events occur, until the
end of the 15 minute interval.  At that time the value of
the gauge is stored in the first 15 minute history
interval, and the gauge is restarted at zero.  In the case
where the agent has no valid data available for the
current interval, the corresponding object instance is not
available and upon a retrieval request a corresponding
error message shall be returned to indicate that this
instance does not exist.

This count represents a non-negative integer, which
may increase or decrease, but shall never exceed 2^64-1
(18446744073709551615 decimal), nor fall below 0.  The
value of an object with HCPerfCurrentCount syntax
assumes its maximum value whenever the underlying count
exceeds 2^64-1.  If the underlying count subsequently
decreases below 2^64-1 (due, e.g., to a retroactive
adjustment as a result of entering or exiting unavailable
time), then the object's value also decreases.

Note that this TC is not strictly supported in SMIv2,
because the 'always increasing' and 'counter wrap'
semantics associated with the Counter64 base type are not
preserved.  It is possible that management applications
which rely solely upon the (Counter64) ASN.1 tag to
determine object semantics will mistakenly operate upon
objects of this type as they would for Counter64 objects.

This textual convention represents a limited and short-
term solution, and may be deprecated as a long term
solution is defined and deployed to replace it.



 TOC 

54.6.  HCPerfIntervalCount

A gauge associated with a performance measurement in
a previous 15 minute measurement interval.  In the case
where the agent has no valid data available for a
particular interval, the corresponding object instance is
not available and upon a retrieval request a corresponding
error message shall be returned to indicate that this
instance does not exist.

Let X be an object with HCPerfIntervalCount syntax.



Let Y be an object with HCPerfCurrentCount syntax.
Let Z be an object with HCPerfTotalCount syntax.
Then, in a system supporting a history of n intervals with
X(1) and X(n) the most and least recent intervals
respectively, the following applies at the end of a 15
minute interval:

   - discard the value of X(n)
   - the value of X(i) becomes that of X(i-1)
     for n >= i > 1
   - the value of X(1) becomes that of Y.
   - the value of Z, if supported, is adjusted.

This count represents a non-negative integer, which
may increase or decrease, but shall never exceed 2^64-1
(18446744073709551615 decimal), nor fall below 0.  The
value of an object with HCPerfIntervalCount syntax
assumes its maximum value whenever the underlying count
exceeds 2^64-1.  If the underlying count subsequently
decreases below 2^64-1 (due, e.g., to a retroactive
adjustment as a result of entering or exiting unavailable
time), then the value of the object also decreases.

Note that this TC is not strictly supported in SMIv2,
because the 'always increasing' and 'counter wrap'
semantics associated with the Counter64 base type are not
preserved.  It is possible that management applications
which rely solely upon the (Counter64) ASN.1 tag to
determine object semantics will mistakenly operate upon
objects of this type as they would for Counter64 objects.

This textual convention represents a limited and short-
term solution, and may be deprecated as a long term
solution is defined and deployed to replace it.



 TOC 

54.7.  HCPerfTotalCount

A gauge representing the aggregate of previous valid 15
minute measurement intervals.  Intervals for which no
valid data was available are not counted.

This count represents a non-negative integer, which
may increase or decrease, but shall never exceed 2^64-1
(18446744073709551615 decimal), nor fall below 0.  The
value of an object with HCPerfTotalCount syntax
assumes its maximum value whenever the underlying count



exceeds 2^64-1.  If the underlying count subsequently
decreases below 2^64-1 (due, e.g., to a retroactive
adjustment as a result of entering or exiting unavailable
time), then the object's value also decreases.

Note that this TC is not strictly supported in SMIv2,
because the 'always increasing' and 'counter wrap'
semantics associated with the Counter64 base type are not
preserved.  It is possible that management applications
which rely solely upon the (Counter64) ASN.1 tag to
determine object semantics will mistakenly operate upon
objects of this type as they would for Counter64 objects.

This textual convention represents a limited and short-
term solution, and may be deprecated as a long term
solution is defined and deployed to replace it.



 TOC 

55.  HDSL2-SHDSL-LINE-MIB (revision 2005-12-07 00:00)

This MIB module defines a collection of objects for managing HDSL2/SHDSL lines. An agent may reside at either end of the line; however, the MIB module is designed to require no management communication between the modems beyond that inherent in the low-level EOC line protocol as defined in ANSI T1E1.4/2000-006 (for HDSL2 lines) or in ITU G.991.2 (for SHDSL lines). Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4319; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

55.1.  Hdsl2ShdslPerfCurrDayCount

A gauge associated with interface performance measurements in
a current 1-day (24 hour) measurement interval.

The value of this gauge starts at zero at the beginning of an
interval and is increased when associated events occur, until
the end of the 1-day interval.  At that time, the value of the
gauge is stored in the previous 1-day history interval, as
defined in a companion object of type
Hdsl2Shdsl1DayIntevalCount, and the current interval gauge
is restarted at zero.

In the case where the agent has no valid data available for
this interval, the corresponding object instance is not
available, and upon a retrieval request, a corresponding error
message shall be returned to indicate that this instance does
not exist.  Please note that zero is a valid value.



 TOC 

55.2.  Hdsl2Shdsl1DayIntervalCount

A counter associated with interface performance measurements
during the most previous 1-day (24 hour) measurement interval.
The value of this gauge is equal to the value of the current
day gauge, as defined in a companion object of type
Hdsl2ShdslPerfCurrDayCount, at the end of its most recent
interval.

In the case where the agent has no valid data available for
this interval, the corresponding object instance is not
available, and upon a retrieval request, a corresponding error
message shall be returned to indicate that this instance does
not exist.



 TOC 

55.3.  Hdsl2ShdslPerfTimeElapsed

The number of seconds that have elapsed since the beginning of
the current measurement period.  If, for some reason, such as
an adjustment in the system's time-of-day clock or the addition
of a leap second, the current interval exceeds the maximum
value, the agent will return the maximum value.

For 15-minute intervals, the range is limited to (0..899).
For 24-hour intervals, the range is limited to (0..86399).



 TOC 

55.4.  Hdsl2ShdslPerfIntervalThreshold

This convention defines a range of values that may be set in
a fault threshold alarm control.  As the number of seconds in
a 15-minute interval numbers at most 900, objects of this type
may have a range of 0...900, where the value of 0 disables the
alarm.



 TOC 

55.5.  Hdsl2ShdslUnitId

This is the unique identification for all units in an
HDSL2/SHDSL span.  It is based on the EOC unit addressing
scheme with reference to the xtuC.



 TOC 

55.6.  Hdsl2ShdslUnitSide

This is the referenced side of an HDSL2/SHDSL unit - Network
or Customer side.  The side facing the Network is the Network
side, while the side facing the Customer is the Customer side.



 TOC 

55.7.  Hdsl2ShdslWirePair

This is the referenced pair of wires in an HDSL2/SHDSL segment.
HDSL2 only supports a single pair (wirePair1 or two wire),
SHDSL lines support an optional second pair (wirePair2 or four
wire), and G.shdsl.bis support an optional third pair
(wirePair3 or six wire) and an optional fourth pair
(wirePair4 or eight wire).



 TOC 

55.8.  Hdsl2ShdslTransmissionModeType

Contains the regional setting of the HDSL2/SHDSL span,
represented as a bit-map of possible settings.  The various
bit positions are as follows:



Bit   Meaning      Description
1     region 1     Indicates ITU-T G.991.2 Annex A.
2     region 2     Indicates ITU-T G.991.2 Annex B.



 TOC 

55.9.  Hdsl2ShdslClockReferenceType

The various STU-C symbol clock references for the
HDSL2/SHDSL span, represented as an enumeration.



 TOC 

56.  HOST-RESOURCES-MIB (revision 2000-03-06 00:00)

This MIB is for use in managing host systems. The term `host' is construed to mean any computer that communicates with other similar computers attached to the internet and that is directly used by one or more human beings. Although this MIB does not necessarily apply to devices whose primary function is communications services (e.g., terminal servers, routers, bridges, monitoring equipment), such relevance is not explicitly precluded. This MIB instruments attributes common to all internet hosts including, for example, both personal computers and systems that run variants of Unix.



 TOC 

56.1.  KBytes

Storage size, expressed in units of 1024 bytes.



 TOC 

56.2.  ProductID

This textual convention is intended to identify the
manufacturer, model, and version of a specific
hardware or software product.  It is suggested that
these OBJECT IDENTIFIERs are allocated such that all
products from a particular manufacturer are registered
under a subtree distinct to that manufacturer.  In
addition, all versions of a product should be
registered under a subtree distinct to that product.
With this strategy, a management station may uniquely
determine the manufacturer and/or model of a product
whose productID is unknown to the management station.
Objects of this type may be useful for inventory
purposes or for automatically detecting
incompatibilities or version mismatches between
various hardware and software components on a system.

For example, the product ID for the ACME 4860 66MHz
clock doubled processor might be:
enterprises.acme.acmeProcessors.a4860DX2.MHz66

A software product might be registered as:
enterprises.acme.acmeOperatingSystems.acmeDOS.six(6).one(1)



 TOC 

56.3.  InternationalDisplayString

This data type is used to model textual information
in some character set.  A network management station
should use a local algorithm to determine which
character set is in use and how it should be
displayed.  Note that this character set may be
encoded with more than one octet per symbol, but will
most often be NVT ASCII. When a size clause is
specified for an object of this type, the size refers
to the length in octets, not the number of symbols.



 TOC 

57.  HPR-IP-MIB (revision 1998-09-24 00:00)

The MIB module for HPR over IP. This module contains two groups: - the HPR over IP Monitoring Group provides a count of the UDP packets sent by a link station for each APPN traffic type. - the HPR over IP Configuration Group provides for reading and setting the mappings between APPN traffic types and TOS Precedence settings in the IP header. These mappings are configured at the APPN port level, and are inherited by the APPN connection networks and link stations associated with an APPN port. A port-level mapping can, however, be overridden for a particular connection network or link station.



 TOC 

57.1.  AppnTrafficType

APPN traffic type.  The first four values correspond
to APPN transmission priorities (network, high, medium and
low), while the fifth is used for both LLC commands (XID,
TEST, DISC, and DM) and function-routed NLPs (XID_DONE_RQ
and XID_DONE_RSP).



 TOC 

57.2.  AppnTOSPrecedence

A DisplayString representing the setting of the three TOS
Precedence bits in the IP Type of Service field for this APPN
traffic type.  The HPR over IP architecture specifies the
following default mapping:

     APPN traffic type           IP TOS Precedence bits
     ------------------          ----------------------
      Network                     110
      High                        100
      Medium                      010
      Low                         001
      LLC commands, etc.          110



 TOC 

58.  HPR-MIB (revision 1997-05-14 00:00)

This is the MIB module for objects used to manage network devices with HPR capabilities.



 TOC 

58.1.  HprNceTypes

A bit string identifying the set of functions provided by a
network connection endpoint (NCE).  The following values are
defined:

      bit 0:  control point
      bit 1:  logical unit
      bit 2:  boundary function
      bit 3:  route setup



 TOC 

58.2.  HprRtpCounter

An object providing statistics for an RTP connection.  A
Management Station can detect discontinuities in this counter
by monitoring the correspondingly indexed
hprRtpCounterDisconTime object.



 TOC 

59.  IANA-ITU-ALARM-TC-MIB (revision 2004-09-09 00:00)

The MIB module defines the ITU Alarm textual convention for objects expected to require regular extension. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). The initial version of this MIB module was published in RFC 3877. For full legal notices see the RFC itself. Supplementary information may be available on: http://www.ietf.org/copyrights/ianamib.html



 TOC 

59.1.  IANAItuProbableCause

ITU-T probable cause values.  Duplicate values defined in
X.733 are appended with X733 to ensure syntactic uniqueness.
Probable cause value 0 is reserved for special purposes.

The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) is responsible
for the assignment of the enumerations in this TC.
IANAItuProbableCause value of 0 is reserved for special
purposes and MUST NOT be assigned.

Values of IANAItuProbableCause in the range 1 to 1023 are
reserved for causes that correspond to ITU-T probable cause.

All other requests for new causes will be handled on a
first-come, first served basis and will be assigned
enumeration values starting with 1025.

Request should  come in the form of well-formed


SMI [RFC2578] for enumeration names that are unique and
sufficiently descriptive.

While some effort will be taken to ensure that new probable
causes do not conceptually duplicate existing probable
causes it is acknowledged that the existence of conceptual
duplicates in the starting probable cause list is an known
industry reality.

To aid IANA in the administration of probable cause names
and values, the OPS Area Director will appoint one or more
experts to help review requests.

See http://www.iana.org



 TOC 

59.2.  IANAItuEventType

The ITU event Type values.

The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) is
responsible for the assignment of the enumerations
in this TC.

Request should  come in the form of well-formed
SMI [RFC2578] for enumeration names that are unique
and sufficiently descriptive.

See http://www.iana.org



 TOC 

60.  IFCP-MGMT-MIB (revision 2011-03-09 00:00)

This module defines management information specific to Internet Fibre Channel Protocol (iFCP) gateway management. Copyright (c) 2011 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info).



 TOC 

60.1.  IfcpIpTOVorZero

The maximum propagation delay, in seconds,
for an encapsulated FC frame to traverse the
IP network.  A value of 0 implies fibre
channel frame lifetime limits will not be
enforced.



 TOC 

60.2.  IfcpLTIorZero

The value for the Liveness Test Interval
(LTI) being used in an iFCP connection, in
seconds.  A value of 0 implies no Liveness
Test Interval will be used.



 TOC 

60.3.  IfcpSessionStates

The value for an iFCP session state.



 TOC 

60.4.  IfcpAddressMode

The values for iFCP Address Translation
Mode.



 TOC 

61.  IF-MIB (revision 2000-06-14 00:00)

The MIB module to describe generic objects for network interface sub-layers. This MIB is an updated version of MIB-II's ifTable, and incorporates the extensions defined in RFC 1229.



 TOC 

61.1.  OwnerString (deprecated)

This data type is used to model an administratively
assigned name of the owner of a resource.  This information
is taken from the NVT ASCII character set.  It is suggested
that this name contain one or more of the following: ASCII
form of the manager station's transport address, management
station name (e.g., domain name), network management
personnel's name, location, or phone number.  In some cases
the agent itself will be the owner of an entry.  In these
cases, this string shall be set to a string starting with
'agent'.



 TOC 

61.2.  InterfaceIndex

A unique value, greater than zero, for each interface or
interface sub-layer in the managed system.  It is
recommended that values are assigned contiguously starting
from 1.  The value for each interface sub-layer must remain
constant at least from one re-initialization of the entity's
network management system to the next re-initialization.



 TOC 

61.3.  InterfaceIndexOrZero

This textual convention is an extension of the
InterfaceIndex convention.  The latter defines a greater
than zero value used to identify an interface or interface
sub-layer in the managed system.  This extension permits the
additional value of zero.  the value zero is object-specific
and must therefore be defined as part of the description of
any object which uses this syntax.  Examples of the usage of
zero might include situations where interface was unknown,
or when none or all interfaces need to be referenced.



 TOC 

62.  INET-ADDRESS-MIB (revision 2005-02-04 00:00)

This MIB module defines textual conventions for representing Internet addresses. An Internet address can be an IPv4 address, an IPv6 address, or a DNS domain name. This module also defines textual conventions for Internet port numbers, autonomous system numbers, and the length of an Internet address prefix. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4001, see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

62.1.  InetAddressType

A value that represents a type of Internet address.

unknown(0)  An unknown address type.  This value MUST
            be used if the value of the corresponding
            InetAddress object is a zero-length string.
            It may also be used to indicate an IP address
            that is not in one of the formats defined
            below.

ipv4(1)     An IPv4 address as defined by the
            InetAddressIPv4 textual convention.

ipv6(2)     An IPv6 address as defined by the
            InetAddressIPv6 textual convention.

ipv4z(3)    A non-global IPv4 address including a zone
            index as defined by the InetAddressIPv4z
            textual convention.

ipv6z(4)    A non-global IPv6 address including a zone
            index as defined by the InetAddressIPv6z
            textual convention.

dns(16)     A DNS domain name as defined by the
            InetAddressDNS textual convention.

Each definition of a concrete InetAddressType value must be
accompanied by a definition of a textual convention for use
with that InetAddressType.

To support future extensions, the InetAddressType textual
convention SHOULD NOT be sub-typed in object type definitions.
It MAY be sub-typed in compliance statements in order to
require only a subset of these address types for a compliant
implementation.

Implementations must ensure that InetAddressType objects
and any dependent objects (e.g., InetAddress objects) are
consistent.  An inconsistentValue error must be generated
if an attempt to change an InetAddressType object would,
for example, lead to an undefined InetAddress value.  In



particular, InetAddressType/InetAddress pairs must be
changed together if the address type changes (e.g., from
ipv6(2) to ipv4(1)).



 TOC 

62.2.  InetAddress

Denotes a generic Internet address.

An InetAddress value is always interpreted within the context
of an InetAddressType value.  Every usage of the InetAddress
textual convention is required to specify the InetAddressType
object that provides the context.  It is suggested that the
InetAddressType object be logically registered before the
object(s) that use the InetAddress textual convention, if
they appear in the same logical row.

The value of an InetAddress object must always be
consistent with the value of the associated InetAddressType
object.  Attempts to set an InetAddress object to a value
inconsistent with the associated InetAddressType
must fail with an inconsistentValue error.

When this textual convention is used as the syntax of an
index object, there may be issues with the limit of 128
sub-identifiers specified in SMIv2, STD 58.  In this case,
the object definition MUST include a 'SIZE' clause to
limit the number of potential instance sub-identifiers;
otherwise the applicable constraints MUST be stated in
the appropriate conceptual row DESCRIPTION clauses, or
in the surrounding documentation if there is no single
DESCRIPTION clause that is appropriate.



 TOC 

62.3.  InetAddressIPv4

Represents an IPv4 network address:




Octets   Contents         Encoding
 1-4     IPv4 address     network-byte order

The corresponding InetAddressType value is ipv4(1).

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions, as it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or in
conjunction with InetAddressType, as a pair.



 TOC 

62.4.  InetAddressIPv6

Represents an IPv6 network address:

Octets   Contents         Encoding
 1-16    IPv6 address     network-byte order

The corresponding InetAddressType value is ipv6(2).

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions, as it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or in
conjunction with InetAddressType, as a pair.



 TOC 

62.5.  InetAddressIPv4z

Represents a non-global IPv4 network address, together
with its zone index:

  Octets   Contents         Encoding
   1-4     IPv4 address     network-byte order
   5-8     zone index       network-byte order

The corresponding InetAddressType value is ipv4z(3).

The zone index (bytes 5-8) is used to disambiguate identical
address values on nodes that have interfaces attached to
different zones of the same scope.  The zone index may contain
the special value 0, which refers to the default zone for each
scope.

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object



definitions, as it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or in
conjunction with InetAddressType, as a pair.



 TOC 

62.6.  InetAddressIPv6z

Represents a non-global IPv6 network address, together
with its zone index:

  Octets   Contents         Encoding
   1-16    IPv6 address     network-byte order
  17-20    zone index       network-byte order

The corresponding InetAddressType value is ipv6z(4).

The zone index (bytes 17-20) is used to disambiguate
identical address values on nodes that have interfaces
attached to different zones of the same scope.  The zone index
may contain the special value 0, which refers to the default
zone for each scope.

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions, as it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or in
conjunction with InetAddressType, as a pair.



 TOC 

62.7.  InetAddressDNS

Represents a DNS domain name.  The name SHOULD be fully
qualified whenever possible.

The corresponding InetAddressType is dns(16).

The DESCRIPTION clause of InetAddress objects that may have
InetAddressDNS values MUST fully describe how (and when)
these names are to be resolved to IP addresses.

The resolution of an InetAddressDNS value may require to
query multiple DNS records (e.g., A for IPv4 and AAAA for
IPv6).  The order of the resolution process and which DNS
record takes precedence depends on the configuration of the
resolver.



This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions, as it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or in
conjunction with InetAddressType, as a pair.



 TOC 

62.8.  InetAddressPrefixLength

Denotes the length of a generic Internet network address
prefix.  A value of n corresponds to an IP address mask
that has n contiguous 1-bits from the most significant
bit (MSB), with all other bits set to 0.

An InetAddressPrefixLength value is always interpreted within
the context of an InetAddressType value.  Every usage of the
InetAddressPrefixLength textual convention is required to
specify the InetAddressType object that provides the
context.  It is suggested that the InetAddressType object be
logically registered before the object(s) that use the
InetAddressPrefixLength textual convention, if they appear
in the same logical row.

InetAddressPrefixLength values larger than
the maximum length of an IP address for a specific
InetAddressType are treated as the maximum significant
value applicable for the InetAddressType.  The maximum
significant value is 32 for the InetAddressType
'ipv4(1)' and 'ipv4z(3)' and 128 for the InetAddressType
'ipv6(2)' and 'ipv6z(4)'.  The maximum significant value
for the InetAddressType 'dns(16)' is 0.

The value zero is object-specific and must be defined as
part of the description of any object that uses this
syntax.  Examples of the usage of zero might include
situations where the Internet network address prefix
is unknown or does not apply.

The upper bound of the prefix length has been chosen to
be consistent with the maximum size of an InetAddress.



 TOC 

62.9.  InetPortNumber

Represents a 16 bit port number of an Internet transport



layer protocol.  Port numbers are assigned by IANA.  A
current list of all assignments is available from
<http://www.iana.org/>.

The value zero is object-specific and must be defined as
part of the description of any object that uses this
syntax.  Examples of the usage of zero might include
situations where a port number is unknown, or when the
value zero is used as a wildcard in a filter.



 TOC 

62.10.  InetAutonomousSystemNumber

Represents an autonomous system number that identifies an
Autonomous System (AS).  An AS is a set of routers under a
single technical administration, using an interior gateway
protocol and common metrics to route packets within the AS,
and using an exterior gateway protocol to route packets to
other ASes'.  IANA maintains the AS number space and has
delegated large parts to the regional registries.

Autonomous system numbers are currently limited to 16 bits
(0..65535).  There is, however, work in progress to enlarge the
autonomous system number space to 32 bits.  Therefore, this
textual convention uses an Unsigned32 value without a
range restriction in order to support a larger autonomous
system number space.



 TOC 

62.11.  InetScopeType

Represents a scope type.  This textual convention can be used
in cases where a MIB has to represent different scope types
and there is no context information, such as an InetAddress
object, that implicitly defines the scope type.

Note that not all possible values have been assigned yet, but
they may be assigned in future revisions of this specification.
Applications should therefore be able to deal with values
not yet assigned.



 TOC 

62.12.  InetZoneIndex

A zone index identifies an instance of a zone of a
specific scope.

The zone index MUST disambiguate identical address
values.  For link-local addresses, the zone index will
typically be the interface index (ifIndex as defined in the
IF-MIB) of the interface on which the address is configured.

The zone index may contain the special value 0, which refers
to the default zone.  The default zone may be used in cases
where the valid zone index is not known (e.g., when a
management application has to write a link-local IPv6
address without knowing the interface index value).  The
default zone SHOULD NOT be used as an easy way out in
cases where the zone index for a non-global IPv6 address
is known.



 TOC 

62.13.  InetVersion

A value representing a version of the IP protocol.

unknown(0)  An unknown or unspecified version of the IP
            protocol.



ipv4(1)     The IPv4 protocol as defined in RFC 791 (STD 5).

ipv6(2)     The IPv6 protocol as defined in RFC 2460.

Note that this textual convention SHOULD NOT be used to
distinguish different address types associated with IP
protocols.  The InetAddressType has been designed for this
purpose.



 TOC 

63.  INTEGRATED-SERVICES-MIB (revision 1995-11-03 05:00)

The MIB module to describe the Integrated Services Protocol



 TOC 

63.1.  SessionNumber

The Session  Number  convention  is  used  for
numbers  identifying  sessions or saved PATH or
RESV information. It is a number in  the  range
returned  by  a TestAndIncr variable, having no
protocol meaning whatsoever but serving instead
as simple identifier.

The alternative was a very complex instance  or
instance object that became unwieldy.



 TOC 

63.2.  Protocol

The value of the IP Protocol field  of  an  IP
Datagram  Header.  This identifies the protocol
layer above IP.  For example, the  value  6  is
used  for TCP and the value 17 is used for UDP.
The values of this field are defined in the As-
signed Numbers RFC.



 TOC 

63.3.  SessionType

The value of the C-Type field of a Session ob-
ject,  as  defined  in  the RSVP specification.
This value  determines  the  lengths  of  octet
strings  and use of certain objects such as the
'port' variables. If the C-Type  calls  for  an
IP6  address, one would expect all source, des-
tination, and next/previous hop addresses to be
16  bytes long, and for the ports to be UDP/TCP
port numbers, for example.



 TOC 

63.4.  Port

The value of the UDP or TCP Source or Destina-
tion  Port field, a virtual destination port or
generalized port identifier used with the IPSEC
Authentication Header or Encapsulating Security
Payload, or other session discriminator.  If it
is  not  used, the value should be of length 0.
This pair, when coupled with the  IP  Addresses
of the source and destination system and the IP
protocol  field,  uniquely  identifies  a  data
stream.



 TOC 

63.5.  MessageSize

The size of a message in bytes. This  is  used
to  specify  the  minimum and maximum size of a
message along an integrated services route.



 TOC 

63.6.  BitRate

The rate, in bits/second, that data  may  move
in  the context.  Applicable contexts minimally
include the speed of an  interface  or  virtual
circuit, the data rate of a (potentially aggre-
gated) data flow, or the data rate to be  allo-
cated for use by a flow.



 TOC 

63.7.  BurstSize

The number of octets of IP Data, including  IP
Headers, that a stream may send without concern
for policing.



 TOC 

63.8.  QosService

The class of service in use by a flow.



 TOC 

64.  IP-MIB (revision 2006-02-02 00:00)

The MIB module for managing IP and ICMP implementations, but excluding their management of IP routes. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4293; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

64.1.  IpAddressOriginTC

The origin of the address.

manual(2) indicates that the address was manually configured
to a specified address, e.g., by user configuration.

dhcp(4) indicates an address that was assigned to this
system by a DHCP server.

linklayer(5) indicates an address created by IPv6 stateless



auto-configuration.

random(6) indicates an address chosen by the system at
random, e.g., an IPv4 address within 169.254/16, or an RFC
3041 privacy address.



 TOC 

64.2.  IpAddressStatusTC

The status of an address.  Most of the states correspond to
states from the IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration
protocol.

The preferred(1) state indicates that this is a valid
address that can appear as the destination or source address
of a packet.

The deprecated(2) state indicates that this is a valid but
deprecated address that should no longer be used as a source
address in new communications, but packets addressed to such
an address are processed as expected.

The invalid(3) state indicates that this isn't a valid
address and it shouldn't appear as the destination or source
address of a packet.

The inaccessible(4) state indicates that the address is not
accessible because the interface to which this address is
assigned is not operational.

The unknown(5) state indicates that the status cannot be
determined for some reason.

The tentative(6) state indicates that the uniqueness of the
address on the link is being verified.  Addresses in this
state should not be used for general communication and
should only be used to determine the uniqueness of the
address.

The duplicate(7) state indicates the address has been
determined to be non-unique on the link and so must not be



used.

The optimistic(8) state indicates the address is available
for use, subject to restrictions, while its uniqueness on
a link is being verified.

In the absence of other information, an IPv4 address is
always preferred(1).



 TOC 

64.3.  IpAddressPrefixOriginTC

The origin of this prefix.

manual(2) indicates a prefix that was manually configured.

wellknown(3) indicates a well-known prefix, e.g., 169.254/16
for IPv4 auto-configuration or fe80::/10 for IPv6 link-local
addresses.  Well known prefixes may be assigned by IANA,
the address registries, or by specification in a standards
track RFC.

dhcp(4) indicates a prefix that was assigned by a DHCP
server.

routeradv(5) indicates a prefix learned from a router
advertisement.

Note: while IpAddressOriginTC and IpAddressPrefixOriginTC
are similar, they are not identical.  The first defines how
an address was created, while the second defines how a
prefix was found.



 TOC 

64.4.  Ipv6AddressIfIdentifierTC

This data type is used to model IPv6 address
interface identifiers.  This is a binary string
of up to 8 octets in network byte-order.



 TOC 

65.  IPMROUTE-STD-MIB (revision 2000-09-22 00:00)

The MIB module for management of IP Multicast routing, but independent of the specific multicast routing protocol in use.



 TOC 

65.1.  LanguageTag

An RFC 1766-style language tag, with all alphabetic
characters converted to lowercase.  This restriction is
intended to make the lexical ordering imposed by SNMP useful


when applied to language tags.  Note that it is
theoretically possible for a valid language tag to exceed
the allowed length of this syntax, and thus be impossible to
represent with this syntax.  Sampling of language tags in
current use on the Internet suggests that this limit does
not pose a serious problem in practice.



 TOC 

66.  IPOA-MIB (revision 1998-02-09 00:00)

This module defines a portion of the management information base (MIB) for managing Classical IP and ARP over ATM entities.



 TOC 

66.1.  IpoaEncapsType

The encapsulation type used on a VC.



 TOC 

66.2.  IpoaVpiInteger

An integer large enough to contain the value of a VPI.



 TOC 

66.3.  IpoaVciInteger

An integer large enough to contain the value of a VCI.



 TOC 

66.4.  IpoaAtmAddr

The ATM address used by the network entity.
The semantics are implied by the length.
The address types are:

- no address (0 octets)
- E.164 (8 octets)
- NSAP (20 octets)

In addition, when subaddresses are used IpoaAtmAddr
may represent the concatenation of address and
subaddress.  The associated address types are:

- E.164, E.164 (16 octets)
- E.164, NSAP (28 octets)
- NSAP, NSAP (40 octets)
Address lengths other than defined in this definition
imply address types defined elsewhere.
Note: The E.164 address is encoded in BCD format.



 TOC 

66.5.  IpoaAtmConnKind

The use of call control.  The use is as follows:
pvc(1)
   Virtual link of a PVC.  Should not be
   used in a PVC/SVC (i.e., SPVC)
   crossconnect.
svcIncoming(2)
   Virtual link established after a
   received signaling request to setup
   an SVC.
svcOutgoing(3)
   Virtual link established after a
   transmitted or forwarded signaling
   request to setup an SVC.
spvcInitiator(4)
   Virtual link at the PVC side of an
   SVC/PVC crossconnect, where the
   switch is the initiator of the SPVC
   setup.
spvcTarget(5)
   Virtual link at the PVC side of an
   SVC/PVC crossconnect, where the
   switch is the target of the SPVC
   setup.

An spvcInitiator is always cross-connected to
an svcOutgoing, and an spvcTarget is always
cross-connected to an svcIncoming.



 TOC 

67.  IPS-AUTH-MIB (revision 2006-05-22 00:00)

The IP Storage Authorization MIB module. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4545; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

67.1.  IpsAuthAddress

IP Storage requires the use of address information
that uses not only the InetAddress type defined in the
INET-ADDRESS-MIB, but also Fibre Channel type defined
in the Fibre Channel Management MIB.  Although these
address types are recognized in the IANA Address Family
Numbers MIB, the addressing mechanisms have not been
merged into a well-known, common type.  This data type,
the IpsAuthAddress, performs the merging for this MIB
module.

The formats of objects of this type are determined by
a corresponding object with syntax AddressFamilyNumbers,
and thus every object defined using this TC must
identify the object with syntax AddressFamilyNumbers
that specifies its type.

The syntax and semantics of this object depend on the
identified AddressFamilyNumbers object as follows:

AddressFamilyNumbers   this object
====================   ===========
ipV4(1)                restricted to the same syntax and
                       semantics as the InetAddressIPv4 TC.

ipV6(2)                restricted to the same syntax and
                       semantics as the InetAddressIPv6 TC.

fibreChannelWWPN (22)
& fibreChannelWWNN(23) restricted to the same syntax and
                       semantics as the FcNameIdOrZero TC.

Types other than the above should not be used unless



the corresponding format of the IpsAuthAddress object is
further specified (e.g., in a future revision of this TC).



 TOC 

68.  IPSEC-SPD-MIB (revision 2007-02-07 00:00)

This MIB module defines configuration objects for managing IPsec Security Policies. In general, this MIB can be implemented anywhere IPsec security services exist (e.g., bump-in-the-wire, host, gateway, firewall, router, etc.). Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4807; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

68.1.  SpdBooleanOperator

The SpdBooleanOperator operator is used to specify
whether sub-components in a decision-making process are



ANDed or ORed together to decide if the resulting
expression is true or false.



 TOC 

68.2.  SpdAdminStatus

The SpdAdminStatus is used to specify the administrative
status of an object.  Objects that are disabled MUST NOT
be used by the packet processing engine.



 TOC 

68.3.  SpdIPPacketLogging

SpdIPPacketLogging specifies whether an audit message
SHOULD be logged if a packet is passed through a Security
Association (SA) and if some of that packet is included in
the log event.  A value of '-1' indicates no logging.  A
value of '0' or greater indicates that logging SHOULD be
done and indicates the number of bytes starting at the
beginning of the packet to place in the log.  Values greater
than the size of the packet being processed indicate that
the entire packet SHOULD be sent.

Examples:
'-1' no logging
'0'  log but do not include any of the packet in the log
'20' log and include the first 20 bytes of the packet
     in the log.



 TOC 

68.4.  SpdTimePeriod

This property identifies an overall range of calendar dates
and time.  In a boolean context, a value within this time
range, inclusive, is considered true.

This information is encoded as an octet string using
the UTF-8 transformation format described in STD 63,
RFC 3629.

It uses the format suggested in RFC 3060.  An octet string



represents a start date and time and an end date and time.
For example:

yyyymmddThhmmss/yyyymmddThhmmss

Where: yyyy = year     mm = month     dd = day
         hh = hour     mm = minute    ss = second

The first 'yyyymmddThhmmss' sub-string indicates the start
date and time.  The second 'yyyymmddThhmmss' sub-string
indicates the end date and time.  The character 'T' within
these sub-strings indicates the beginning of the time
portion of each sub-string.  The solidus character '/'
separates the start from the end date and time.  The end
date and time MUST be subsequent to the start date and
time.

There are also two allowed substitutes for a
'yyyymmddThhmmss' sub-string: one for the start date and
time, and one for the end date and time.

If the start date and time are replaced with the string
'THISANDPRIOR', this sub-string would indicate the current
date and time and the previous dates and time.

If the end date and time are replaced with the string
'THISANDFUTURE', this sub-string would indicate the current
date and time and the subsequent dates and time.

Any of the following SHOULD be considered a
'wrongValue' error:
- Setting a value with the end date and time earlier than
  or equal to the start date and time.
- Setting the start date and time to 'THISANDFUTURE'.
- Setting the end date and time to 'THISANDPRIOR'.



 TOC 

69.  IPV6-FLOW-LABEL-MIB (revision 2003-08-28 00:00)

This MIB module provides commonly used textual conventions for IPv6 Flow Labels. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2003). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3595, see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

69.1.  IPv6FlowLabel

The flow identifier or Flow Label in an IPv6
packet header that may be used to discriminate
traffic flows.



 TOC 

69.2.  IPv6FlowLabelOrAny

The flow identifier or Flow Label in an IPv6
packet header that may be used to discriminate
traffic flows.  The value of -1 is used to
indicate a wildcard, i.e. any value.



 TOC 

70.  IPV6-TC



 TOC 

70.1.  Ipv6Address

This data type is used to model IPv6 addresses.
This is a binary string of 16 octets in network
byte-order.



 TOC 

70.2.  Ipv6AddressPrefix

This data type is used to model IPv6 address
prefixes. This is a binary string of up to 16
octets in network byte-order.



 TOC 

70.3.  Ipv6AddressIfIdentifier

This data type is used to model IPv6 address
interface identifiers. This is a binary string
 of up to 8 octets in network byte-order.



 TOC 

70.4.  Ipv6IfIndex

A unique value, greater than zero for each
internetwork-layer interface in the managed
system. It is recommended that values are assigned
contiguously starting from 1. The value for each
internetwork-layer interface must remain constant
at least from one re-initialization of the entity's
network management system to the next
re-initialization.



 TOC 

70.5.  Ipv6IfIndexOrZero

This textual convention is an extension of the
Ipv6IfIndex convention.  The latter defines
a greater than zero value used to identify an IPv6
interface in the managed system.  This extension
permits the additional value of zero.  The value
zero is object-specific and must therefore be
defined as part of the description of any object
which uses this syntax.  Examples of the usage of
zero might include situations where interface was
unknown, or when none or all interfaces need to be
referenced.



 TOC 

71.  ISCSI-MIB (revision 2006-05-22 00:00)

The iSCSI Protocol MIB module. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4544; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

71.1.  IscsiTransportProtocol

This data type is used to define the transport
protocols that will carry iSCSI PDUs.



 TOC 

71.2.  IscsiDigestMethod

This data type represents the methods possible
for digest negotiation.
none     - a placeholder for a secondary digest method
           that means only the primary method can be
           used.
other    - a digest method other than those defined below.
noDigest - does not support digests (will operate without
           a digest (Note: implementations must support
           digests to be compliant with the RFC3720).
CRC32c   - require a CRC32C digest.



 TOC 

71.3.  IscsiName

This data type is used for objects whose value is an
iSCSI name with the properties described in RFC 3720
section 3.2.6.1, and encoded as specified in RFC 3720
section 3.2.6.2.  A zero-length string indicates the
absence of an iSCSI name.



 TOC 

72.  ISDN-MIB (revision 1996-09-23 16:42)

The MIB module to describe the management of ISDN interfaces.



 TOC 

72.1.  IsdnSignalingProtocol

This data type is used as the syntax of the
isdnSignalingProtocol object in the
definition of ISDN-MIB's isdnSignalingTable.

The definition of this textual convention with the
addition of newly assigned values is published
periodically by the IANA, in either the Assigned
Numbers RFC, or some derivative of it specific to
Internet Network Management number assignments.  (The
latest arrangements can be obtained by contacting the
IANA.)

Requests for new values should be made to IANA via
email (iana@iana.org).



 TOC 

73.  ISIS-MIB (revision 2006-04-04 00:00)

This document describes a management information base for the IS-IS Routing protocol, as described in ISO 10589, when it is used to construct routing tables for IP networks, as described in RFC 1195. This document is based on a 1994 IETF document by Chris Gunner. This version has been modified to include current syntax, to exclude portions of the protocol that are not relevant to IP, and to add management support for current practice. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4444; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

73.1.  IsisOSINSAddress

OSI Network Service Address, e.g., NSAP, SNPA, or Network
Entity Title



 TOC 

73.2.  IsisSystemID

The ID for an Intermediate System.  This should
be unique within a network, and is included
in all PDUs originated by an Intermediate System.
The protocol does not place any meanings upon
the bits, other than using ordering to break
ties in electing a Designated IS on a LAN.



 TOC 

73.3.  IsisLinkStatePDUID

The 8-byte Link State PDU (LSP) ID,
consisting of the 6-byte SystemID of the
originating IS; a one-byte PseudoNode ID,
which is 0 unless the LSP represents the
topology of a LAN; and a one-byte LSP
fragment number that is issued in sequence,
starting with 0.  Non-zero PseudoNode IDs
need to be unique to the IS but need not
match the IfIndex.



 TOC 

73.4.  IsisAdminState

Type used in enabling and disabling a row.



 TOC 

73.5.  IsisLSPBuffSize

Integer sub-range for maximum LSP size.



 TOC 

73.6.  IsisLevelState

States of the IS-IS protocol.



 TOC 

73.7.  IsisSupportedProtocol

Types of network protocol supported by Integrated IS-IS.
The values for ISO8473 and IP are those registered for
these protocols in ISO TR9577.



 TOC 

73.8.  IsisDefaultMetric

Integer sub-range for default metric for single hop.
ISO 10589 provides for 4 types of metric.  Only the
'default' metric is used in practice.



 TOC 

73.9.  IsisWideMetric

Wide metric for IS Neighbors.  ISO 10589 provides a
6-bit metric.  Traffic Engineering extensions provide
24-bit metrics.



 TOC 

73.10.  IsisFullMetric

Full metric for IP Routes.  Traffic Engineering extensions
provide 32-bit metrics.



 TOC 

73.11.  IsisMetricType

Is this an Internal or External Metric?



 TOC 

73.12.  IsisMetricStyle

Do we use RFC 1195 style metrics or wide metrics?



 TOC 

73.13.  IsisISLevel

Identifies a level.



 TOC 

73.14.  IsisLevel

Identifies one or more levels.



 TOC 

73.15.  IsisPDUHeader

A block to contain the header from a PDU.



 TOC 

73.16.  IsisCircuitID

ID for a circuit.



 TOC 

73.17.  IsisISPriority

Integer sub-range for IS-IS priority.



 TOC 

73.18.  IsisUnsigned16TC

An Unsigned32 further restricted to 16 bits.  Note that
the ASN.1 BER encoding may still require 24 bits for
some values.



 TOC 

73.19.  IsisUnsigned8TC

An Unsigned32 further restricted to 8 bits.  Note that
the ASN.1 BER encoding may still require 16 bits for
some values.



 TOC 

74.  ISNS-MIB (revision 2007-07-11 00:00)

This module defines management information specific to internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) management. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4939; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

74.1.  IsnsDiscoveryDomainSetId

The unique Discovery Domain Set Identifier associated with a
Discovery Domain Set (DDS).



 TOC 

74.2.  IsnsDdsStatusType

The status of a Discovery Domain Set (DDS) registered in the
iSNS.  The initially assigned values are below:
             Bit           Status
          ---------       ---------
             31            DDS Enabled
          All others       RESERVED

Setting a bit to 1 indicates the feature is enabled.
Otherwise, it is disabled.  The future assignment of any of
the reserved values will be documented in a revision of
RFC 4171.



 TOC 

74.3.  IsnsDiscoveryDomainId

The unique Discovery Domain Identifier (DD_ID) associated



with each Discovery Domain (DD).  This is used to
uniquely index and reference a DD.



 TOC 

74.4.  IsnsDdFeatureType

This type defines the features that each Discovery Domain
(DD) has.
             Bit           Status
          ---------       ---------
             31            Boot List
          All others       RESERVED

Boot List: this feature indicates that the targets
in this DD provide boot capabilities for the member
initiators.

Setting a bit to 1 indicates the feature is enabled.
Otherwise, it is disabled.  The future assignment of any of
the reserved values will be documented in a revision of
RFC 4171.



 TOC 

74.5.  IsnsDdDdsModificationType

The methods that can be used to modify the Discovery
Domain and Discovery Domain Sets in an iSNS Server
instance.
       Bit             Flag Description
    ---------   ------------------------------------
        0       Control Nodes are allowed



        1       Target iSCSI Nodes are allowed
        2       Initiator iSCSI Nodes are allowed
        3       Target iFCP Ports are allowed
        4       Initiator iFCP Ports are allowed

Setting a bit to 1 indicates the feature is
enabled.  Otherwise, it is disabled.



 TOC 

74.6.  IsnsEntityIndexIdOrZero

The identifier for the unique integer Entity Index
associated with an iSNS registered Entity object, and the
value zero.  The value zero is object-specific and MUST
therefore be defined as part of the description of any
object that uses this syntax.  Examples of the usage of
zero might include situations where the Entity is unknown,
or not yet registered in the iSNS server.  If a value of
zero is not valid for an object, then that MUST be
indicated.



 TOC 

74.7.  IsnsPortalGroupIndexId

The identifier for the unique integer Portal Group Index
associated with an iSNS registered Portal Group object.



 TOC 

74.8.  IsnsPortalIndexId

The identifier for the unique integer Portal Index
associated with an iSNS registered Portal object.  The
index is created by the iSNS Server for mapping between



registered objects.  The Portal Index used for a specific
portal IP-address and port number pair is only persistent
across reboots for portals that have been explicitly added
to a Discovery Domain (DD).  If a portal is not explicitly
registered in any DD, then the index used for a portal can
change after a server reinitialization.



 TOC 

74.9.  IsnsPortalPortTypeId

The UDP or TCP port type being used by a Portal for an
Entity.



 TOC 

74.10.  IsnsPortalGroupTagIdOrNull

The Portal Group Tag (PGT) represents an association
between a Portal and iSCSI Node using the value range
0 to 65535.  A PGT with no association is a NULL
value.  The value of -1 indicates a NULL value.



 TOC 

74.11.  IsnsPortalSecurityType

Indicates security attribute settings for a Portal that is
registered in the iSNS server.  The bitmapVALID field must
be set in order for the contents to be considered valid
information.  The definitions of the bit fields are based
on RFC 4171.  The initial representation of each bit setting
(0 or 1) is indicated below.
      Bit             Flag Description
    ---------   ------------------------------------
       25       1 = Tunnel Mode Preferred; 0 = No Preference
       26       1 = Transport Mode Preferred; 0 = No
                Preference
       27       1 = PFS Enabled; 0 = PFS Disabled
       28       1 = Aggressive Mode Enabled; 0 = Disabled
       29       1 = Main Mode Enabled; 0 = MM Disabled
       30       1 = IKE/IPsec Enabled; 0 = IKE/IPsec
                Disabled
       31       1 = Bitmap VALID; 0 = INVALID



    All others  RESERVED

The future assignment of any of the reserved values will be
documented in a revision of RFC 4171.



 TOC 

74.12.  IsnsNodeIndexId

The identifier for the unique integer Node Index associated
with a storage node.  This index provides a 1-to-1 mapping
to an iSCSI node name.  The iSCSI node name maximum length
is too long to be used for an index directly.  The iSCSI
node index used for a specific iSCSI node name is identical
in all DDs, and is persistent across server
reinitializations when the iSCSI node is a member of a
Discovery Domain (DD) or is registered as a Control Node.
Furthermore, index values for recently deregistered objects
SHOULD NOT be reused in the short term.



 TOC 

74.13.  IsnsIscsiNodeType

The iSCSI Node Type defines the functions of the registered
object.  The definitions of each setting are defined in
RFC 4171.
             Bit          Node Type



          ---------       ---------
             29            Control
             30            Initiator
             31            Target
          All others       RESERVED

Setting a bit to 1 indicates the node has the corresponding
characteristics.  The future assignment of any of the
reserved values will be documented in a revision of
RFC 4171.



 TOC 

74.14.  IsnsFcClassOfServiceType

This defines the Fibre Channel Class of Service types
that are supported by the registered port.  The
definitions are as defined in RFC 4171.
      Bit              FC COS Type
    ---------          ----------------
       28             Fibre Channel Class 3 Supported
       29             Fibre Channel Class 2 Supported
    All others        RESERVED

Setting a bit to 1 indicates the class of service is
supported.  The future assignment of any of the
reserved values will be documented in a revision of
RFC 4171.



 TOC 

74.15.  IsnsIscsiScnType

The iSCSI Node State Change Notification (SCN) values
for a node as defined in RFC 4171.
         Bit                Description
      ------------       ----------------
       24                Initiator and self information only
       25                Target and self information only
       26                Management registration/SCN
       27                Object removed
       28                Object added
       29                Object updated
       30                DD or DDS member removed (Mgmt
                         Reg/SCN only)
       31 (Lsb)          DD or DDS member added (Mgmt
                         Reg/SCN only)
       All others        Reserved

Setting a bit to 1 indicates that type of SCN is enabled.
The future assignment of any of the reserved values will be
documented in a revision of RFC 4171.



 TOC 

74.16.  IsnsIfcpScnType

The iFCP State Change Notification (SCN) values for an iFCP
object as defined in RFC 4171.
         Bit                Description
      ------------       ----------------
       24                Initiator and self information only
       25                Target and self information only
       26                Management registration/SCN
       27                Object removed
       28                Object added
       29                Object updated
       30                DD or DDS member removed (Mgmt
                         Reg/SCN only)
       31 (Lsb)          DD or DDS member added (Mgmt
                         Reg/SCN only)
       All others        Reserved

Setting a bit to 1 indicates that type of SCN is enabled.
The future assignment of any of the reserved values will be
documented in a revision of RFC 4171.



 TOC 

74.17.  IsnsFcPortRoleType

The FC Port Role defines the functions of the registered
object.  The definitions of each setting are defined in
RFC 4171.
             Bit          Port Role
          ---------       ---------
             29            Control
             30            FCP Initiator
             31            FCP Target
         All others        RESERVED

Setting a bit to 1 indicates the port has the corresponding
characteristics.  The future assignment of any of the
reserved values will be documented in a revision of
RFC 4171.



 TOC 

74.18.  IsnsSrvrDiscoveryMethodsType

The types of iSNS Server discovery methods that are enabled
on an iSNS Server.  The options are DHCP, Service Location
Protocol (SLP), multicast group iSNS heartbeat, broadcast
group iSNS heartbeat, configured server list, and other.
The iSNS Server may support additional discovery methods
not indicated.



 TOC 

75.  ITU-ALARM-TC-MIB (revision 2004-09-09 00:00)

This MIB module defines the ITU Alarm textual convention for objects not expected to require regular extension. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). The initial version of this MIB module was published in RFC 3877. For full legal notices see the RFC itself. Supplementary information may be available on: http://www.ietf.org/copyrights/ianamib.html



 TOC 

75.1.  ItuPerceivedSeverity

ITU perceived severity values



 TOC 

75.2.  ItuTrendIndication

ITU trend indication values for alarms.



 TOC 

76.  Job-Monitoring-MIB (revision 1999-02-19 00:00)

The MIB module for monitoring job in servers, printers, and other devices. Version: 1.0



 TOC 

76.1.  JmUTF8StringTC

To facilitate internationalization, this TC represents
information taken from the ISO/IEC IS 10646-1 character set,
encoded as an octet string using the UTF-8 character encoding
scheme.

See section 3.6.1, entitled: 'Text generated by the server or
device'.



 TOC 

76.2.  JmJobStringTC

To facilitate internationalization, this TC represents
information using any coded character set registered by IANA as
specified in section 3.7.  While it is recommended that the
coded character set be UTF-8 [UTF-8], the actual coded
character set SHALL be indicated by the value of the
jobCodedCharSet(8) attribute for the job.

See section 3.6.2, entitled: 'Text supplied by the job
submitter'.



 TOC 

76.3.  JmNaturalLanguageTagTC

An IETF RFC 1766-compliant 'language tag', with zero or more
sub-tags that identify a natural language.  While RFC 1766
specifies that the US-ASCII values are case-insensitive, this
MIB specification requires that all characters SHALL be lower
case in order to simplify comparing by management applications.

See section 3.6.1, entitled: 'Text generated by the server or
device' and section 3.6.2, entitled: 'Text supplied by the job
submitter'.



 TOC 

76.4.  JmTimeStampTC

The simple time at which an event took place.  The units are
in seconds since the system was booted.

NOTE - JmTimeStampTC is defined in units of seconds, rather
than 100ths of seconds, so as to be simpler for agents to
implement (even if they have to implement the 100ths of a
second to comply with implementing sysUpTime in MIB-II[mib-
II].)

NOTE - JmTimeStampTC is defined as an Integer32 so that it can
be used as a value of an attribute, i.e., as a value of the
jmAttributeValueAsInteger object.  The TimeStamp textual-
convention defined in SNMPv2-TC [SMIv2-TC] is defined as an
APPLICATION 3 IMPLICIT INTEGER tag, not an Integer32 which is
defined in SNMPv2-SMI [SMIv2-TC] as UNIVERSAL 2 IMPLICIT
INTEGER, so cannot be used in this MIB as one of the values of
jmAttributeValueAsInteger.



 TOC 

76.5.  JmJobSourcePlatformTypeTC

The source platform type that can submit jobs to servers or
devices in any of the 3 configurations.

This is a type 2 enumeration.  See Section 3.7.1.2.  See also
IANA operating-system-names registry.



 TOC 

76.6.  JmFinishingTC

The type of finishing operation.

These values are the same as the enum values of the IPP
'finishings' attribute.  See Section 3.7.1.2.

other(1),
    Some other finishing operation besides one of the specified
    or registered values.

unknown(2),
    The finishing is unknown.

none(3),
    Perform no finishing.

staple(4),
    Bind the document(s) with one or more staples. The exact
    number and placement of the staples is site-defined.

punch(5),
    Holes are required in the finished document. The exact
    number and placement of the holes is site-defined.  The
    punch specification MAY be satisfied (in a site- and
    implementation-specific manner) either by
    drilling/punching, or by substituting pre-drilled media.

cover(6),
    Select a non-printed (or pre-printed) cover for the
    document. This does not supplant the specification of a
    printed cover (on cover stock medium) by the document
    itself.

bind(7)
    Binding is to be applied to the document; the type and
    placement of the binding is product-specific.

This is a type 2 enumeration.  See Section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.7.  JmPrintQualityTC

Print quality settings.

These values are the same as the enum values of the IPP 'print-
quality' attribute.  See Section 3.7.1.2.

This is a type 2 enumeration.  See Section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.8.  JmPrinterResolutionTC

Printer resolutions.

Nine octets consisting of two 4-octet SIGNED-INTEGERs followed
by a SIGNED-BYTE.  The values are the same as those specified
in the Printer MIB [printmib]. The first SIGNED-INTEGER
contains the value of prtMarkerAddressabilityXFeedDir.  The
second SIGNED-INTEGER contains the value of
prtMarkerAddressabilityFeedDir.  The SIGNED-BYTE contains the
value of prtMarkerAddressabilityUnit.

Note: the latter value is either 3 (tenThousandsOfInches) or 4
(micrometers) and the addressability is in 10,000 units of
measure. Thus the SIGNED-INTEGERs represent integral values in
either dots-per-inch or dots-per-centimeter.

The syntax is the same as the IPP 'printer-resolution'
attribute.  See Section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.9.  JmTonerEconomyTC

Toner economy settings.

This is a type 2 enumeration.  See Section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.10.  JmBooleanTC

Boolean true or false value.

This is a type 2 enumeration.  See Section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.11.  JmMediumTypeTC

Identifies the type of medium.

other(1),
    The type is neither one of the values listed in this
    specification nor a registered value.

unknown(2),
    The type is not known.

stationery(3),
    Separately cut sheets of an opaque material.

transparency(4),
    Separately cut sheets of a transparent material.

envelope(5),
    Envelopes that can be used for conventional mailing
    purposes.

envelopePlain(6),
    Envelopes that are not preprinted and have no windows.

envelopeWindow(7),
    Envelopes that have windows for addressing purposes.

continuousLong(8),
    Continuously connected sheets of an opaque material
    connected along the long edge.

continuousShort(9),
    Continuously connected sheets of an opaque material
    connected along the short edge.

tabStock(10),
    Media with tabs.

multiPartForm(11),
    Form medium composed of multiple layers not pre-attached to
    one another;  each sheet MAY be drawn separately from an
    input source.

labels(12),
    Label-stock.

multiLayer(13)
    Form medium composed of multiple layers which are pre-
    attached to one another, e.g. for use with impact printers.
This is a type 2 enumeration.  See Section 3.7.1.2.  These enum
values correspond to the keyword name strings of the
prtInputMediaType object in the Printer MIB [print-mib].  There
is no printer description attribute in IPP/1.0 that represents
these values.



 TOC 

76.12.  JmJobCollationTypeTC

This value is the type of job collation.  Implementations that
don't support multiple documents or don't support multiple
copies SHALL NOT support the uncollatedDocuments(5) value.

This is a type 2 enumeration.  See Section 3.7.1.2. See also
Section 3.4, entitled 'Monitoring Job Progress'.



 TOC 

76.13.  JmJobSubmissionIDTypeTC

Identifies the format type of a job submission ID.

Each job submission ID is a fixed-length, 48-octet printable
US-ASCII [US-ASCII] coded character string containing no
control characters, consisting of the fields defined in section
3.5.1.

This is like a type 2 enumeration.  See section 3.7.3.



 TOC 

76.14.  JmJobStateTC

The current state of the job (pending, processing, completed,
etc.).  The following figure shows the normal job state
transitions:

                                            +----> canceled(7)
                                           /
+---> pending(3) -------> processing(5) ------+------> completed(9)
|         ^                      ^             \
--->+         |                      |              +----> aborted(8)
|         v                      v             /
+---> pendingHeld(4)  processingStopped(6) ---+


        Figure 4 - Normal Job State Transitions

Normally a job progresses from left to right.  Other state
transitions are unlikely, but are not forbidden.  Not shown are
the transitions to the canceled state from the pending,
pendingHeld, and processingStopped states.

Jobs in the pending, processing, and processingStopped states
are called 'active', while jobs in the pendingHeld, canceled,
aborted, and completed states are called 'inactive'.  Jobs
reach one of the three terminal states: completed, canceled, or
aborted, after the jobs have completed all activity, and all
MIB objects and attributes have reached their final values for
the job.
These values are the same as the enum values of the IPP 'job-
state' job attribute.  See Section 3.7.1.2.

unknown(2),
    The job state is not known, or its state is indeterminate.

pending(3),
    The job is a candidate to start processing, but is not yet
    processing.

pendingHeld(4),
    The job is not a candidate for processing for any number of
    reasons but will return to the pending state as soon as the
    reasons are no longer present.  The job's
    jmJobStateReasons1 object and/or jobStateReasonsN (N=2..4)
    attributes SHALL indicate why the job is no longer a
    candidate for processing.  The reasons are represented as
    bits in the jmJobStateReasons1 object and/or
    jobStateReasonsN (N=2..4) attributes.  See the
    JmJobStateReasonsNTC (N=1..4) textual convention for the
    specification of each reason.

processing(5),
    One or more of:

    1.  the job is using, or is attempting to use, one or
    more purely software processes that are analyzing,
    creating, or interpreting a PDL, etc.,

    2.  the job is using, or is attempting to use, one or
    more hardware devices that are interpreting a PDL,
    making mark on a medium, and/or performing finishing,
    such as stapling, etc.,  OR

    3. (configuration 2) the server has made the job ready
    for printing, but the output device is not yet printing
    it, either because the job hasn't reached the output
    device or because the job is queued in the output
    device or some other spooler, awaiting the output
    device to print it.

    When the job is in the processing state, the entire job
    state includes the detailed status represented in the
    device MIB indicated by the hrDeviceIndex value of the
    job's physicalDevice attribute, if the agent implements
    such a device MIB.

    Implementations MAY, though they NEED NOT, include
    additional values in the job's jmJobStateReasons1 object
    to indicate the progress of the job, such as adding the
    jobPrinting value to indicate when the device is actually
    making marks on a medium and/or the processingToStopPoint
    value to indicate that the server or device is in the
    process of canceling or aborting the job.

processingStopped(6),
    The job has stopped while processing for any number of
    reasons and will return to the processing state as soon
    as the reasons are no longer present.

    The job's jmJobStateReasons1 object and/or the job's
    jobStateReasonsN (N=2..4) attributes MAY indicate why the
    job has stopped processing.  For example, if the output
    device is stopped, the deviceStopped value MAY be
    included in the job's jmJobStateReasons1 object.

    NOTE - When an output device is stopped, the device
    usually indicates its condition in human readable form
    at the device.  The management application can obtain
     more complete device status remotely by querying the
    appropriate device MIB using the job's deviceIndex
    attribute(s), if the agent implements such a device MIB

canceled(7),
    A client has canceled the job and the server or device
    has completed canceling the job AND all MIB objects and
    attributes have reached their final values for the job.
    While the server or device is canceling the job, the
    job's jmJobStateReasons1 object SHOULD contain the
    processingToStopPoint value and one of the
    canceledByUser, canceledByOperator, or canceledAtDevice
    values.  The canceledByUser, canceledByOperator, or
    canceledAtDevice values remain while the job is in the
    canceled state.

aborted(8),
    The job has been aborted by the system, usually while the
    job was in the processing or processingStopped state and
    the server or device has completed aborting the job AND
    all MIB objects and attributes have reached their final
    values for the job.  While the server or device is
    aborting the job, the job's jmJobStateReasons1 object MAY
    contain the processingToStopPoint and abortedBySystem
    values.  If implemented, the abortedBySystem value SHALL
    remain while the job is in the aborted state.
completed(9)
    The job has completed successfully or with warnings or
    errors after processing and all of the media have been
    successfully stacked in the appropriate output bin(s) AND
    all MIB objects and attributes have reached their final
    values for the job.  The job's jmJobStateReasons1 object
    SHOULD contain one of: completedSuccessfully,
    completedWithWarnings, or completedWithErrors values.

This is a type 2 enumeration.  See Section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.15.  JmAttributeTypeTC

The type of the attribute which identifies the attribute.

NOTE - The enum assignments are grouped logically with values
assigned in groups of 20, so that additional values may be
registered in the future and assigned a value that is part of
their logical grouping.

Values in the range 2**30 to 2**31-1 are reserved for private
or experimental usage.  This range corresponds to the same
range reserved in IPP.  Implementers are warned that use of
such values may conflict with other implementations.
Implementers are encouraged to request registration of enum
values following the procedures in Section 3.7.1.

See Section 3.2 entitled 'The Attribute Mechanism' for a
description of this textual-convention and its use in the
jmAttributeTable.  See Section 3.3.8 for the specification of
each attribute.  The comment(s) after each enum assignment
specifies the data type(s) of the attribute.

This is a type 2 enumeration.  See Section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.16.  JmJobServiceTypesTC

Specifies the type(s) of service to which the job has been
submitted (print, fax, scan, etc.).  The service type is
represented as an enum that is bit encoded with each job
service type so that more general and arbitrary services can be
created, such as services with more than one destination type,
or ones with only a source or only a destination.  For example,
a job service might scan, faxOut, and print a single job.  In
this case, three bits would be set in the jobServiceTypes
attribute, corresponding to the hexadecimal values: 0x8 + 0x20
+ 0x4, respectively, yielding: 0x2C.

Whether this attribute is set from a job attribute supplied by
the job submission client or is set by the recipient job
submission server or device depends on the job submission
protocol.  With either implementation, the agent SHALL return a
non-zero value for this attribute indicating the type of the
job.

One of the purposes of this attribute is to permit a requester
to filter out jobs that are not of interest.  For example, a
printer operator MAY only be interested in jobs that include
printing.  That is why the attribute is in the job
identification category.

The following service component types are defined (in
hexadecimal) and are assigned a separate bit value for use with
the jobServiceTypes attribute:

other                             0x1
    The job contains some instructions that are not one of the
    identified types.

unknown                           0x2
    The job contains some instructions whose type is unknown to
    the agent.

print                             0x4
    The job contains some instructions that specify printing

scan                              0x8
    The job contains some instructions that specify scanning

faxIn                             0x10
    The job contains some instructions that specify receive fax

faxOut                            0x20
    The job contains some instructions that specify sending fax

getFile                           0x40
    The job contains some instructions that specify accessing
    files or documents

putFile                           0x80
    The job contains some instructions that specify storing
    files or documents

mailList                          0x100
    The job contains some instructions that specify
    distribution of documents using an electronic mail system.

These bit definitions are the equivalent of a type 2 enum
except that combinations of them MAY be used together.  See
section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.17.  JmJobStateReasons1TC

The JmJobStateReasonsNTC (N=1..4) textual-conventions are used
with the jmJobStateReasons1 object and jobStateReasonsN
(N=2..4), respectively, to provide additional information
regarding the current jmJobState object value.  These values
MAY be used with any job state or states for which the reason
makes sense.  See section 3.3.9.1 for the specification of each
bit value defined for use with the JmJobStateReasons1TC.

These bit definitions are the equivalent of a type 2 enum
except that combinations of bits may be used together.  See
section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.18.  JmJobStateReasons2TC

This textual-convention is used with the jobStateReasons2
attribute to provides additional information regarding the
jmJobState object.  See section 3.3.9.2 for the specification
of JmJobStateReasons2TC.  See section 3.3.9.1 for the
description under JmJobStateReasons1TC for additional
information that applies to all reasons.

These bit definitions are the equivalent of a type 2 enum
except that combinations of them may be used together.  See
section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.19.  JmJobStateReasons3TC

This textual-convention is used with the jobStateReasons3
attribute to provides additional information regarding the
jmJobState object.  See section 3.3.9.3 for the specification
of JmJobStateReasons3TC.  See section 3.3.9.1 for the
description under JmJobStateReasons1TC for additional
information that applies to all reasons.

These bit definitions are the equivalent of a type 2 enum
except that combinations of them may be used together.  See
section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

76.20.  JmJobStateReasons4TC

This textual-convention is used in the jobStateReasons4
attribute to provides additional information regarding the
jmJobState object.  See section 3.3.9.4 for the specification
of JmJobStateReasons4TC.  See section 3.3.9.1 for the
description under JmJobStateReasons1TC for additional
information that applies to all reasons.

These bit definitions are the equivalent of a type 2 enum
except that combinations of them may be used together.  See
section 3.7.1.2.



 TOC 

77.  L2TP-MIB (revision 2002-08-23 00:00)

The MIB module that describes managed objects of general use by the Layer Two Transport Protocol.



 TOC 

77.1.  L2tpMilliSeconds

A period of time measured in units of .001 of seconds
when used in conjunction with the DISPLAY-HINT will
show seconds and fractions of second with a resolution
of .001 of a second.



 TOC 

78.  LANGTAG-TC-MIB (revision 2007-11-09 00:00)

This MIB module defines a textual convention for representing BCP 47 language tags.



 TOC 

78.1.  LangTag

A language tag, constructed in accordance with BCP 47.

Only lowercase characters are allowed.  The purpose of this
restriction is to provide unique language tags for use as
indexes.  BCP 47 recommends case conventions for user
interfaces, but objects using this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION MUST
use only lowercase.

Values MUST be well-formed language tags, in conformance
with the definition of well-formed tags in BCP 47.  An
implementation MAY further limit the values it accepts to
those permitted by a 'validating' processor, as defined in
BCP 47.

In theory, BCP 47 language tags are of unlimited length.
The language tag described in this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION is of
limited length.  The analysis of language tag lengths in BCP
47 confirms that this limit will not pose a problem in
practice.  In particular, this length is greater than the



minimum requirements set out in Section 4.3.1.

A zero-length language tag is not a valid language tag.
This can be used to express 'language tag absent' where
required, for example, when used as an index field.



 TOC 

79.  LISP-MIB (revision 2013-10-21 00:00)

This MIB module contains managed objects to support monitoring devices that support the Locator/ID Separation Protocol (LISP). Copyright (c) 2013 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info).



 TOC 

79.1.  LispAddressType

LISP architecture can be applied to a wide variety of
address-families.  This textual-convention is a generalization
for representing addresses belonging to those address-families.
For convenience, this document refers to any such address as a
LISP address.  LispAddressType textual-convention consists of
the following four-tuple:
1. IANA Address Family Number: A field of length 2 octets,
   whose value is of the form following the assigned
   AddressFamilyNumbers textual-convention described in
   IANA-ADDRESS-FAMILY-NUMBERS-MIB DEFINITIONS, available from
   http://www.iana.org/assignments/ianaaddressfamilynumbers-mib.
   The enumerations are also listed in [IANA].  Note that this
   list of address family numbers is maintained by IANA.
2. Length of LISP address: A field of length 1 octet, whose
   value indicates the octet-length of the next (third)
   field of this LispAddressType four-tuple.
3. LISP address: A field of variable length as indicated in
   the previous (second) field, whose value is an address
   of the IANA Address Family indicated in the first field
   of this LispAddressType four-tuple.  Note that any of
   the IANA Address Families can be represented.
   Particularly when the address family is LISP Canonical
   Address Format (LCAF)
   with IANA-assigned Address Family Number 16387, then the
   first octet of this field indicates the LCAF type, and the
   rest of this field is same as the encoding format of the
   LISP Canonical Address after the length field, as defined
   in LCAF document.
4. Mask-length of address: A field of length 1 octet, whose
   value is the mask-length to be applied to the LISP
   address specified in the previous (third) field.

To illustrate the use of this object, consider the LISP MIB
Object below titled lispMapCacheEntry.  This object begins
with the following entities:

lispMapCacheEntry ::= SEQUENCE {
   lispMapCacheEidLength          INTEGER,
   lispMapCacheEid                LispAddressType,
    ... [skip] ...







Example 1: Suppose that the IPv4 EID-Prefix stored is
192.0.2.0/24.  In this case, the values within
lispMapCacheEntry would be:

   lispMapCacheEidLength  = 8
   lispMapCacheEid = 1, 4, 192.0.2.0, 24
   ... [skip] ...

where 8 is the total length in octets of the next object
(lispMapCacheEID of type LispAddressType).  Then, the value
1 indicates the IPv4 AF (per the
IANA-ADDRESS-FAMILY-NUMBERS-MIB), the value 4 indicates that
the AF is 4 octets in length, 192.0.2.0 is the IPv4 address,
and the value 24 is the mask-length in bits.  Note that the
lispMapCacheEidLength value of 8 is used to compute the
length of the fourth (last) field in lispMapCacheEid to be 1
octet -- as computed by 8 - (2 + 1 + 4) = 1.

Example 2: Suppose that the IPv6 EID-Prefix stored is
2001:db8:a::/48.  In this case, the values within
lispMapCacheEntry would be:

   lispMapCacheEidLength  = 20
   lispMapCacheEid = 2, 16, 2001:db8:a::, 48
   ... [skip] ...

where 20 is the total length in octets of the next object
(lispMapCacheEID of type LispAddressType).  Then, the value
2 indicates the IPv6 AF (per the
IANA-ADDRESS-FAMILY-NUMBERS-MIB), the value 16 indicates
that the AF is 16 octets in length, 2001:db8:a:: is the IPv6
address, and the value 48 is the mask-length in bits.  Note
that the lispMapCacheEidLength value of 20 is used to
compute the length of the fourth (last) field in
lispMapCacheEid to be 1 octet -- as computed by
20 - (2 + 1 + 16) = 1.

Example 3: As an example where LCAF is used, suppose
that the IPv4 EID-Prefix stored is 192.0.2.0/24 and it
is part of LISP Instance ID 101.  In this case, the values
within lispMapCacheEntry would be:

   lispMapCacheEidLength  = 11
   lispMapCacheEid = 16387, 7, 2, 101, 1, 192.0.2.0, 24
   ... [skip] ...






where 11 is the total length in octets of the next object
(lispMapCacheEID of type LispAddressType).  Then, the value
16387 indicates the LCAF AF (see the
IANA-ADDRESS-FAMILY-NUMBERS-MIB), the value 7 indicates that
the LCAF AF is 7 octets in length in this case, 2 indicates
that LCAF Type 2 encoding is used (see the LCAF document), 101
gives the Instance ID, 1 gives the AFI (per the
IANA-ADDRESS-FAMILY-NUMBERS-MIB) for an IPv4 address, 192.0.2.0
is the IPv4 address, and 24 is the mask-length in bits.  Note
that the lispMapCacheEidLength value of 11 octets is used to
compute the length of the last field in lispMapCacheEid to be 1
octet -- as computed by 11 - (2 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 4) = 1.

Note: all LISP header formats and locations of specific
flags, bits, and fields are as given in the base LISP
references of RFC 6830, RFC 6832, and RFC 6833.



 TOC 

80.  LMP-MIB (revision 2006-08-14 00:00)

Copyright (C) 2006 The Internet Society. This version of the MIB module is part of RFC 4631; see the RFC itself for full legal notices. This MIB module contains managed object definitions for the Link Management Protocol (LMP) as defined in 'Link Management Protocol'.



 TOC 

80.1.  LmpInterval

The interval delay, in milliseconds.



 TOC 

80.2.  LmpRetransmitInterval

The retransmission interval delay in milliseconds.



 TOC 

80.3.  LmpNodeId

Represents a Node ID in network byte order.  Node ID is an
address of type IPv4.



 TOC 

81.  MAU-MIB (revision 2007-04-21 00:00)

Management information for 802.3 MAUs. The following reference is used throughout this MIB module: [IEEE802.3] refers to: IEEE Std 802.3, 2005 Edition: 'IEEE Standard for Information technology - Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks - Specific requirements - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications'. Of particular interest is Clause 30, 'Management'. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4836; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

81.1.  JackType (deprecated)

********* THIS TC IS DEPRECATED **********

This TC has been deprecated in favour of
IANAifJackType.

Common enumeration values for repeater
and interface MAU jack types.



 TOC 

82.  MIDCOM-MIB (revision 2007-08-09 10:11)

This MIB module defines a set of basic objects for configuring middleboxes, such as firewalls and network address translators, in order to enable communication across these devices. Managed objects defined in this MIB module are structured in three kinds of objects: - transaction objects required according to the MIDCOM protocol requirements defined in RFC 3304 and according to the MIDCOM protocol semantics defined in RFC 3989, - configuration objects that can be used for retrieving or setting parameters of the implementation of transaction objects, - optional monitoring objects that provide information about used resource and statistics The transaction objects are organized in two subtrees: - objects modeling MIDCOM policy rules in the midcomRuleTable - objects modeling MIDCOM policy rule groups in the midcomGroupTable Note that typically, configuration objects are not intended to be written by MIDCOM clients. In general, write access to these objects needs to be restricted more strictly than write access to objects in the transaction subtrees. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2008). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5190; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

82.1.  MidcomNatBindMode

An indicator of the kind of NAT resources used by a policy
rule.  This definition corresponds to the definition of
NatBindMode in the NAT-MIB (RFC 4008).  Value none(3) can
be used to indicate that the policy rule does not use
any NAT binding.



 TOC 

82.2.  MidcomNatSessionIdOrZero

A unique ID that is assigned to each NAT session by
a NAT implementation.  This definition corresponds to
the definition of NatSessionId in the NAT-MIB (RFC 4008).
Value 0 can be used to indicate that the policy rule does
not use any NAT binding.



 TOC 

83.  MIP-MIB (revision 1996-06-04 00:00)

The MIB Module for the Mobile IP.



 TOC 

83.1.  RegistrationFlags

This data type is used to define the registration
flags for Mobile IP registration extension:
   vjCompression
       -- Request to use VJ compression
   gre
       -- Request to use GRE
   minEnc
       -- Request to use minimal encapsulation
   decapsulationByMN
       -- Decapsulation by mobile node
   broadcastDatagram
       -- Request to receive broadcasts
   simultaneoursBindings
       -- Request to retain prior binding(s).



 TOC 

84.  MOBILEIPV6-MIB (revision 2006-02-01 00:00)

The MIB module for monitoring Mobile-IPv6 entities. Copyright (C) The Internet Society 2006. This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4295; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

84.1.  Mip6BURequestRejectionCode

The value of the status field in the Binding
Acknowledgment message when the Binding Update
was rejected.



 TOC 

85.  MPLS-FTN-STD-MIB (revision 2004-06-03 00:00)

Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). The initial version of this MIB module was published in RFC 3814. For full legal notices see the RFC itself or see: http://www.ietf.org/copyrights/ianamib.html This MIB module contains managed object definitions for specifying FEC to NHLFE (FTN) mappings and corresponding performance for MPLS.



 TOC 

85.1.  MplsFTNEntryIndex

Index for an entry in mplsFTNTable.



 TOC 

85.2.  MplsFTNEntryIndexOrZero

Index for an entry in mplsFTNTable or the special value
zero. The value zero is object-specific and must
therefore be defined as part of the description of any
object which uses this syntax.  Examples of the usage
of zero might include situations when none or all
entries in mplsFTNTable need to be referenced.



 TOC 

86.  MPLS-L3VPN-STD-MIB (revision 2006-01-23 00:00)

This MIB contains managed object definitions for the Layer-3 Multiprotocol Label Switching Virtual Private Networks. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC4382; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

86.1.  MplsL3VpnName

An identifier that is assigned to each MPLS/BGP VPN and
is used to uniquely identify it.  This is assigned by the
system operator or NMS and SHOULD be unique throughout
the MPLS domain.  If this is the case, then this identifier
can then be used at any LSR within a specific MPLS domain
to identify this MPLS/BGP VPN.  It may also be possible to
preserve the uniqueness of this identifier across MPLS
domain boundaries, in which case this identifier can then
be used to uniquely identify MPLS/BGP VPNs on a more global
basis.  This object MAY be set to the VPN ID as defined in
RFC 2685.



 TOC 

86.2.  MplsL3VpnRouteDistinguisher

Syntax for a route distinguisher and route target
as defined in [RFC4364].



 TOC 

86.3.  MplsL3VpnRtType

Used to define the type of a route target usage.
Route targets can be specified to be imported,
exported, or both.  For a complete definition of a
route target, see [RFC4364].



 TOC 

87.  MPLS-LSR-STD-MIB (revision 2004-06-03 00:00)

This MIB module contains managed object definitions for the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Router as defined in: Rosen, E., Viswanathan, A., and R. Callon, Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture, RFC 3031, January 2001. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). The initial version of this MIB module was published in RFC 3812. For full legal notices see the RFC itself or see: http://www.ietf.org/copyrights/ianamib.html



 TOC 

87.1.  MplsIndexType

This is an octet string that can be used as a table
index in cases where a large addressable space is
required such as on an LSR where many applications
may be provisioning labels.

Note that the string containing the single octet with
the value 0x00 is a reserved value used to represent
special cases. When this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION is used
as the SYNTAX of an object, the DESCRIPTION clause
MUST specify if this special value is valid and if so
what the special meaning is.

In systems that provide write access to the MPLS-LSR-STD
MIB, mplsIndexType SHOULD be used as a simple multi-digit
integer encoded as an octet string.
No further overloading of the meaning of an index SHOULD
be made.

In systems that do not offer write access to the MPLS-LSR-STD
MIB, the mplsIndexType may contain implicit formatting that is
specific to the implementation to convey additional
information such as interface index, physical card or
device, or application id. The interpretation of this
additional formatting is implementation dependent and
not covered in this document. Such formatting MUST



NOT impact the basic functionality of read-only access
to the MPLS-LSR-STD MIB by management applications that are
not aware of the formatting rules.



 TOC 

87.2.  MplsIndexNextType

When a MIB module is used for configuration, an object with
this SYNTAX always contains a legal value (a non-zero-length
string) for an index that is not currently used in the relevant
table. The Command Generator (Network Management Application)
reads this variable and uses the (non-zero-length string)
value read when creating a new row with an SNMP SET.

When the SET is performed, the Command Responder (agent) must
determine whether the value is indeed still unused; Two Network
Management Applications may attempt to create a row
(configuration entry) simultaneously and use the same value. If
it is currently unused, the SET succeeds and the Command
Responder (agent) changes the value of this object, according
to an implementation-specific algorithm.  If the value is in
use, however, the SET fails.  The Network Management
Application must then re-read this variable to obtain a new
usable value.

Note that the string containing the single octet with
the value 0x00 is a reserved value used to represent
the special case where no additional indexes can be
provisioned, or in systems that do not offer
write access, objects defined using this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION
MUST return the string containing the single
octet with the value 0x00.



 TOC 

88.  MPLS-TC-STD-MIB (revision 2004-06-03 00:00)

Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). The initial version of this MIB module was published in RFC 3811. For full legal notices see the RFC itself or see: http://www.ietf.org/copyrights/ianamib.html This MIB module defines TEXTUAL-CONVENTIONs for concepts used in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) networks.



 TOC 

88.1.  MplsAtmVcIdentifier

A Label Switching Router (LSR) that
creates LDP sessions on ATM interfaces
uses the VCI or VPI/VCI field to hold the
LDP Label.

VCI values MUST NOT be in the 0-31 range.
The values 0 to 31 are reserved for other uses
by the ITU and ATM Forum.  The value
of 32 can only be used for the Control VC,
although values greater than 32 could be
configured for the Control VC.

If a value from 0 to 31 is used for a VCI
the management entity controlling the LDP
subsystem should reject this with an
inconsistentValue error.  Also, if
the value of 32 is used for a VC which is
NOT the Control VC, this should
result in an inconsistentValue error.



 TOC 

88.2.  MplsBitRate

If the value of this object is greater than zero,
then this represents the bandwidth of this MPLS
interface (or Label Switched Path) in units of
'1,000 bits per second'.

The value, when greater than zero, represents the
bandwidth of this MPLS interface (rounded to the
nearest 1,000) in units of 1,000 bits per second.
If the bandwidth of the MPLS interface is between
((n * 1000) - 500) and ((n * 1000) + 499), the value
of this object is n, such that n > 0.

If the value of this object is 0 (zero), this
means that the traffic over this MPLS interface is
considered to be best effort.



 TOC 

88.3.  MplsBurstSize

The number of octets of MPLS data that the stream
may send back-to-back without concern for policing.
The value of zero indicates that an implementation
does not support Burst Size.



 TOC 

88.4.  MplsExtendedTunnelId

A unique identifier for an MPLS Tunnel.  This may
represent an IPv4 address of the ingress or egress
LSR for the tunnel.  This value is derived from the
Extended Tunnel Id in RSVP or the Ingress Router ID
for CR-LDP.



 TOC 

88.5.  MplsLabel

This value represents an MPLS label as defined in
[RFC3031],  [RFC3032], [RFC3034], [RFC3035] and
[RFC3471].

The label contents are specific to the label being
represented, such as:

* The label carried in an MPLS shim header
  (for LDP this is the Generic Label) is a 20-bit
  number represented by 4 octets.  Bits 0-19 contain
  a label or a reserved label value.  Bits 20-31
  MUST be zero.

  The following is quoted directly from [RFC3032].
  There are several reserved label values:

     i. A value of 0 represents the
        'IPv4 Explicit NULL Label'.  This label
        value is only legal at the bottom of the
        label stack.  It indicates that the label
        stack must be popped, and the forwarding
        of the packet must then be based on the



        IPv4 header.

    ii. A value of 1 represents the
        'Router Alert Label'.  This label value is
        legal anywhere in the label stack except at
        the bottom.  When a received packet
        contains this label value at the top of
        the label stack, it is delivered to a
        local software module for processing.
        The actual forwarding of the packet
        is determined by the label beneath it
        in the stack.  However, if the packet is
        forwarded further, the Router Alert Label
        should be pushed back onto the label stack
        before forwarding.  The use of this label
        is analogous to the use of the
        'Router Alert Option' in IP packets
        [RFC2113].  Since this label
        cannot occur at the bottom of the stack,
        it is not associated with a
        particular network layer protocol.

   iii. A value of 2 represents the
        'IPv6 Explicit NULL Label'.  This label
        value is only legal at the bottom of the
        label stack.  It indicates that the label
        stack must be popped, and the forwarding
        of the packet must then be based on the
        IPv6 header.

    iv. A value of 3 represents the
        'Implicit NULL Label'.
        This is a label that an LSR may assign and
        distribute, but which never actually
        appears in the encapsulation.  When an
        LSR would otherwise replace the label
        at the top of the stack with a new label,
        but the new label is 'Implicit NULL',
        the LSR will pop the stack instead of
        doing the replacement.  Although
        this value may never appear in the
        encapsulation, it needs to be specified in
        the Label Distribution Protocol, so a value
        is reserved.

     v. Values 4-15 are reserved.

* The frame relay label can be either 10-bits or



  23-bits depending on the DLCI field size and the
  upper 22-bits or upper 9-bits must be zero,
  respectively.

* For an ATM label the lower 16-bits represents the
  VCI, the next 12-bits represents the VPI and the
  remaining bits MUST be zero.

* The Generalized-MPLS (GMPLS) label contains a
  value greater than 2^24-1 and used in GMPLS
  as defined in [RFC3471].



 TOC 

88.6.  MplsLabelDistributionMethod

The label distribution method which is also called
the label advertisement mode [RFC3036].
Each interface on an LSR is configured to operate
in either Downstream Unsolicited or Downstream
on Demand.



 TOC 

88.7.  MplsLdpIdentifier

The LDP identifier is a six octet



quantity which is used to identify a
Label Switching Router (LSR) label space.

The first four octets identify the LSR and
must be a globally unique value, such as a
32-bit router ID assigned to the LSR, and the
last two octets identify a specific label
space within the LSR.



 TOC 

88.8.  MplsLsrIdentifier

The Label Switching Router (LSR) identifier is the
first 4 bytes of the Label Distribution Protocol
(LDP) identifier.



 TOC 

88.9.  MplsLdpLabelType

The Layer 2 label types which are defined for MPLS
LDP and/or CR-LDP are generic(1), atm(2), or
frameRelay(3).



 TOC 

88.10.  MplsLSPID

A unique identifier within an MPLS network that is
assigned to each LSP.  This is assigned at the head
end of the LSP and can be used by all LSRs
to identify this LSP.  This value is piggybacked by
the signaling protocol when this LSP is signaled
within the network.  This identifier can then be
used at each LSR to identify which labels are
being swapped to other labels for this LSP.  This
object  can also be used to disambiguate LSPs that
share the same RSVP sessions between the same
source and destination.

For LSPs established using CR-LDP, the LSPID is
composed of the ingress LSR Router ID (or any of
its own IPv4 addresses) and a locally unique
CR-LSP ID to that LSR.  The first two bytes carry



the CR-LSPID, and the remaining 4 bytes carry
the Router ID.  The LSPID is useful in network
management, in CR-LSP repair, and in using
an already established CR-LSP as a hop in
an ER-TLV.

For LSPs signaled using RSVP-TE, the LSP ID is
defined as a 16-bit (2 byte) identifier used
in the SENDER_TEMPLATE and the FILTER_SPEC
that can be changed to allow a sender to
share resources with itself.  The length of this
object should only be 2 or 6 bytes.  If the length
of this octet string is 2 bytes, then it must
identify an RSVP-TE LSPID, or it is 6 bytes,
it must contain a CR-LDP LSPID.



 TOC 

88.11.  MplsLspType

Types of Label Switch Paths (LSPs)
on a Label Switching Router (LSR) or a
Label Edge Router (LER) are:

   unknown(1)         -- if the LSP is not known
                         to be one of the following.

   terminatingLsp(2)  -- if the LSP terminates
                         on the LSR/LER, then this
                         is an egressing LSP
                         which ends on the LSR/LER,

   originatingLsp(3)  -- if the LSP originates
                         from this LSR/LER, then
                         this is an ingressing LSP
                         which is the head-end of
                         the LSP,

crossConnectingLsp(4) -- if the LSP ingresses
                         and egresses on the LSR,
                         then it is
                         cross-connecting on that



                         LSR.



 TOC 

88.12.  MplsOwner

This object indicates the local network
management subsystem that originally created
the object(s) in question.  The values of
this enumeration are defined as follows:

unknown(1) - the local network management
subsystem cannot discern which
component created the object.

other(2) - the local network management
subsystem is able to discern which component
created the object, but the component is not
listed within the following choices,
e.g., command line interface (cli).

snmp(3) - The Simple Network Management Protocol
was used to configure this object initially.

ldp(4) - The Label Distribution Protocol was
used to configure this object initially.

crldp(5) - The Constraint-Based Label Distribution
Protocol was used to configure this object
initially.

rsvpTe(6) - The Resource Reservation Protocol was
used to configure this object initially.

policyAgent(7) - A policy agent (perhaps in
combination with one of the above protocols) was
used to configure this object initially.

An object created by any of the above choices
MAY be modified or destroyed by the same or a
different choice.



 TOC 

88.13.  MplsPathIndexOrZero

A unique identifier used to identify a specific
path used by a tunnel.  A value of 0 (zero) means
that no path is in use.



 TOC 

88.14.  MplsPathIndex

A unique value to index (by Path number) an
entry in a table.



 TOC 

88.15.  MplsRetentionMode

The label retention mode which specifies whether
an LSR maintains a label binding for a FEC
learned from a neighbor that is not its next hop
for the FEC.

If the value is conservative(1) then advertised
label mappings are retained only if they will be
used to forward packets, i.e., if label came from
a valid next hop.

If the value is liberal(2) then all advertised
label mappings are retained whether they are from
a valid next hop or not.



 TOC 

88.16.  MplsTunnelAffinity

Describes the configured 32-bit Include-any,
include-all, or exclude-all constraint for
constraint-based link selection.



 TOC 

88.17.  MplsTunnelIndex

A unique index into mplsTunnelTable.
For tunnels signaled using RSVP, this value
should correspond to the RSVP Tunnel ID
used for the RSVP-TE session.



 TOC 

88.18.  MplsTunnelInstanceIndex

The tunnel entry with instance index 0
should refer to the configured tunnel
interface (if one exists).

Values greater than 0, but less than or
equal to 65535, should be used to indicate
signaled (or backup) tunnel LSP instances.
For tunnel LSPs signaled using RSVP,
this value should correspond to the
RSVP LSP ID used for the RSVP-TE
LSP.

Values greater than 65535 apply to FRR
detour instances.



 TOC 

88.19.  TeHopAddressType

A value that represents a type of address for a
Traffic Engineered (TE) Tunnel hop.

unknown(0)   An unknown address type.  This value
             MUST be used if the value of the
             corresponding TeHopAddress object is a



             zero-length string.  It may also be
             used to indicate a TeHopAddress which
             is not in one of the formats defined
             below.

ipv4(1)      An IPv4 network address as defined by
             the InetAddressIPv4 TEXTUAL-CONVENTION
             [RFC3291].

ipv6(2)      A global IPv6 address as defined by
             the InetAddressIPv6 TEXTUAL-CONVENTION
             [RFC3291].

asnumber(3)  An Autonomous System (AS) number as
             defined by the TeHopAddressAS
             TEXTUAL-CONVENTION.

unnum(4)     An unnumbered interface index as
             defined by the TeHopAddressUnnum
             TEXTUAL-CONVENTION.

lspid(5)     An LSP ID for TE Tunnels
             (RFC3212) as defined by the
             MplsLSPID TEXTUAL-CONVENTION.

Each definition of a concrete TeHopAddressType
value must be accompanied by a definition
of a TEXTUAL-CONVENTION for use with that
TeHopAddress.

To support future extensions, the TeHopAddressType
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION SHOULD NOT be sub-typed in
object type definitions.  It MAY be sub-typed in
compliance statements in order to require only a
subset of these address types for a compliant
implementation.

Implementations must ensure that TeHopAddressType
objects and any dependent objects
(e.g., TeHopAddress objects) are consistent.
An inconsistentValue error must be generated
if an attempt to change a TeHopAddressType
object would, for example, lead to an
undefined TeHopAddress value that is
not defined herein.  In particular,
TeHopAddressType/TeHopAddress pairs
must be changed together if the address
type changes (e.g., from ipv6(2) to ipv4(1)).



 TOC 

88.20.  TeHopAddress

Denotes a generic Tunnel hop address,
that is, the address of a node which
an LSP traverses, including the source
and destination nodes.  An address may be
very concrete, for example, an IPv4 host
address (i.e., with prefix length 32);
if this IPv4 address is an interface
address, then that particular interface
must be traversed.  An address may also
specify an 'abstract node', for example,
an IPv4 address with prefix length
less than 32, in which case, the LSP
can traverse any node whose address
falls in that range.  An address may
also specify an Autonomous System (AS),
in which  case the LSP can traverse any
node that falls within that AS.

A TeHopAddress value is always interpreted within
the context of an TeHopAddressType value.  Every
usage of the TeHopAddress TEXTUAL-CONVENTION
is required to specify the TeHopAddressType object
which provides the context.  It is suggested that
the TeHopAddressType object is logically registered
before the object(s) which use the TeHopAddress
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION if they appear in the
same logical row.

The value of a TeHopAddress object must always be



consistent with the value of the associated
TeHopAddressType object.  Attempts to set a
TeHopAddress object to a value which is
inconsistent with the associated TeHopAddressType
must fail with an inconsistentValue error.



 TOC 

88.21.  TeHopAddressAS

Represents a two or four octet AS number.
The AS number is represented in network byte
order (MSB first).  A two-octet AS number has
the two MSB octets set to zero.



 TOC 

88.22.  TeHopAddressUnnum

Represents an unnumbered interface:

octets   contents               encoding
 1-4     unnumbered interface   network-byte order

The corresponding TeHopAddressType value is
unnum(5).



 TOC 

89.  NAT-MIB (revision 2005-03-21 00:00)

This MIB module defines the generic managed objects for NAT. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4008; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

89.1.  NatProtocolType

A list of protocols that support the network
address translation.  Inclusion of the values is
not intended to imply that those protocols
need to be supported.  Any change in this
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION should also be reflected in
the definition of NatProtocolMap, which is a
BITS representation of this.



 TOC 

89.2.  NatProtocolMap

A bitmap of protocol identifiers that support



the network address translation.  Any change
in this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION should also be
reflected in the definition of NatProtocolType.



 TOC 

89.3.  NatAddrMapId

A unique id that is assigned to each address map
by a NAT enabled device.



 TOC 

89.4.  NatBindIdOrZero

A unique id that is assigned to each bind by
a NAT enabled device.  The bind id will be zero
in the case of a Symmetric NAT.



 TOC 

89.5.  NatBindId

A unique id that is assigned to each bind by
a NAT enabled device.



 TOC 

89.6.  NatSessionId

A unique id that is assigned to each session by
a NAT enabled device.



 TOC 

89.7.  NatBindMode

An indication of whether the bind is
an address bind or an address port bind.



 TOC 

89.8.  NatAssociationType

An indication of whether the association is
static or dynamic.



 TOC 

89.9.  NatTranslationEntity

An indication of a) the direction of a session for
which an address map entry, address bind or port
bind is applicable, and b) the entity (source or
destination) within the session that is subject to
translation.



 TOC 

90.  NETWORK-SERVICES-MIB (revision 2000-03-03 00:00)

The MIB module describing network service applications



 TOC 

90.1.  DistinguishedName

A Distinguished Name represented in accordance with
RFC 2253, presented in the UTF-8 charset defined in
RFC 2279.



 TOC 

90.2.  URLString

A Uniform Resource Locator represented in accordance
with RFCs 1738 and 2368, presented in the NVT ASCII
charset defined in RFC 854.



 TOC 

91.  NHDP-MIB (revision 2012-10-22 10:00)

This NHDP-MIB module is applicable to routers implementing the Neighborhood Discovery Protocol defined in RFC 6130. Copyright (c) 2012 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 6779; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

91.1.  NeighborIfIndex

An arbitrary, locally unique identifier associated with a
virtual interface of a discovered NHDP neighbor.
Due to the nature of NHDP, the local router
may not know if two distinct addresses belong to the
same interface of a neighbor or to two different
interfaces.  As the local router gains more
knowledge of its neighbors, its local view may change, and
this table will be updated to reflect the local router's
current understanding, associating address sets to neighbor
interfaces.  The local router identifies a virtual neighbor
interface through the receipt of address lists advertised
through an NHDP HELLO message.

All objects of type NeighborIfIndex are assigned by the agent
out of a common number space.





The value for each discovered virtual neighbor
interface may not remain constant from
one re-initialization of the entity's network management
agent to the next re-initialization.  If the
local router gains information associating two virtual
interfaces on a neighbor as a common interface,
then the agent MUST aggregate the two address sets to
a single index chosen from the set of aggregated indexes,
and it MUST update all tables in this
MIB module that are indexed by indexes
of type NeighborIfIndex.  It MAY then reuse freed
index values following the next agent restart.

The specific value is meaningful only within a given SNMP
entity.



 TOC 

91.2.  NeighborRouterIndex

An arbitrary, locally unique identifier associated with a
virtual discovered neighbor (one or two hop).  Due to the
nature of NHDP, the local router may identify
multiple virtual neighbors that, in fact, are one and
the same.  Neighbors that are two hops away with more than
one advertised address will exhibit this behavior.  As the
local router's knowledge of its neighbors' topology
increases, the local router will be able to associate
multiple virtual neighbor indexes into a single virtual
neighbor index chosen from the set of aggregated indexes;
it MUST update all tables in this MIB module indexed by these
indexes, and it MAY reuse the freed indexes following the
next agent re-initialization.

All objects of type NeighborRouterIndex are assigned by
the agent out of a common number space.

The NeighborRouterIndex defines a discovered NHDP peer
virtual neighbor of the local router.
The value for each discovered virtual neighbor index MUST
remain constant at least from one re-initialization of
the entity's network management agent to the next
re-initialization, except if an application is deleted
and re-created.

The specific value is meaningful only within a given SNMP
entity.  A NeighborRouterIndex value MUST not be reused



until the next agent restart.



 TOC 

92.  NHRP-MIB (revision 1999-08-26 00:00)

This MIB contains managed object definitions for the Next Hop Resolution Procol, NHRP, as defined in RFC 2332 [17].



 TOC 

92.1.  NhrpGenAddr

The value of an internetwork layer or NBMA address.



 TOC 

93.  NTPv4-MIB (revision 2010-05-17 00:00)

The Management Information Base for NTP time entities. Copyright (c) 2010 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info).



 TOC 

93.1.  NtpStratum

The NTP stratum, with 16 representing no stratum.



 TOC 

93.2.  NtpDateTime

NTP date/time on the device, in 128-bit
NTP date format.  If time is not syncronized, this
field shall be a zero-length string.

This trusted certificate (TC) is not to be used for objects
that are used to set the time of the node querying this
object.  NTP should be used for this -- or at least SNTP.



 TOC 

94.  OPT-IF-MIB (revision 2003-08-13 00:00)

The MIB module to describe pre-OTN and OTN interfaces. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2003). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3591; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

94.1.  OptIfAcTI

The trace identifier (TI) accepted at the receiver.



 TOC 

94.2.  OptIfBitRateK

Indicates the index 'k' that is used to
represent a supported bit rate and the different
versions of OPUk, ODUk and OTUk.
Allowed values of k are defined in ITU-T G.709.
Currently allowed values in G.709 are:
   k=1 represents an approximate bit rate of 2.5 Gbit/s,
   k=2 represents an approximate bit rate of 10 Gbit/s,
   k=3 represents an approximate bit rate of 40 Gbit/s.



 TOC 

94.3.  OptIfDEGM

Indicates the threshold level for declaring a Degraded Signal
defect (dDEG).  A dDEG shall be declared if OptIfDEGM
consecutive bad PM Seconds are detected.



 TOC 

94.4.  OptIfDEGThr

Indicates the threshold level for declaring a performance
monitoring (PM) Second to be bad.  A PM Second is declared bad if
the percentage of detected errored blocks in that second is
greater than or equal to OptIfDEGThr.



 TOC 

94.5.  OptIfDirectionality

Indicates the directionality of an entity.



 TOC 

94.6.  OptIfSinkOrSource

Indicates the directionality of an entity
that is allowed only to be a source or sink.



 TOC 

94.7.  OptIfExDAPI

The Destination Access Point Identifier (DAPI)
expected by the receiver.



 TOC 

94.8.  OptIfExSAPI

The Source Access Point Identifier (SAPI)
expected by the receiver.



 TOC 

94.9.  OptIfIntervalNumber

Uniquely identifies a 15-minute interval.  The interval
identified by 1 is the most recently completed interval, and



the interval identified by n is the interval immediately
preceding the one identified by n-1.



 TOC 

94.10.  OptIfTIMDetMode

Indicates the mode of the Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)
Detection function.



 TOC 

94.11.  OptIfTxTI

The trace identifier (TI) transmitted.



 TOC 

95.  OSPF-MIB (revision 2006-11-10 00:00)

The MIB module to describe the OSPF Version 2 Protocol. Note that some objects in this MIB module may pose a significant security risk. Refer to the Security Considerations section in RFC 4750 for more information. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4750; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

95.1.  AreaID

An OSPF Area Identifier.
Note that the Area ID, in OSPF, has the same format
as an IP address, but has the function of defining
a summarization point for link state advertisements.



 TOC 

95.2.  RouterID

A OSPF Router Identifier.
Note that the Router ID, in OSPF, has the same format
as an IP address, but identifies the router independent



of its IP address.



 TOC 

95.3.  Metric

The OSPF internal metric.
Note that the OSPF metric is defined as an unsigned value
in the range.



 TOC 

95.4.  BigMetric

The OSPF external metric.



 TOC 

95.5.  Status

An indication of the operability of an OSPF
function or feature.  For example, the status
of an interface: 'enabled' indicates that
it is willing to communicate with other OSPF routers,
and 'disabled' indicates that it is not.



 TOC 

95.6.  PositiveInteger

A positive integer.  Values in excess are precluded as
unnecessary and prone to interoperability issues.



 TOC 

95.7.  HelloRange

The range of intervals in seconds on which Hello messages
are exchanged.



 TOC 

95.8.  UpToMaxAge

The values in seconds that one might find or configure
for variables bounded by the maximum age of an LSA.



 TOC 

95.9.  DesignatedRouterPriority

The range of values defined for the priority of a system
for becoming the designated router.



 TOC 

95.10.  TOSType

Type of Service (TOS) is defined as a mapping to the IP
Type of Service Flags as defined in the IP Forwarding
Table MIB

    +-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
    |                 |                       |     |
    |   PRECEDENCE    |    TYPE OF SERVICE    |  0  |
    |                 |                       |     |
    +-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

             IP TOS                IP TOS
        Field     Policy      Field     Policy

        Contents    Code      Contents    Code
        0 0 0 0  ==>   0      0 0 0 1  ==>   2
        0 0 1 0  ==>   4      0 0 1 1  ==>   6
        0 1 0 0  ==>   8      0 1 0 1  ==>  10
        0 1 1 0  ==>  12      0 1 1 1  ==>  14
        1 0 0 0  ==>  16      1 0 0 1  ==>  18
        1 0 1 0  ==>  20      1 0 1 1  ==>  22
        1 1 0 0  ==>  24      1 1 0 1  ==>  26
        1 1 1 0  ==>  28      1 1 1 1  ==>  30

 The remaining values are left for future definition.



 TOC 

95.11.  OspfAuthenticationType

The authentication type.



 TOC 

96.  OSPFV3-MIB (revision 2009-08-13 00:00)

The MIB module for OSPF version 3. Copyright (c) 2009 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS 'AS IS' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5643; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

96.1.  Ospfv3UpToRefreshIntervalTC

The values one might be able to configure for
variables bounded by the Refresh Interval.



 TOC 

96.2.  Ospfv3DeadIntervalRangeTC

The range, in seconds, of dead interval value.



 TOC 

96.3.  Ospfv3RouterIdTC

A 32-bit, unsigned integer uniquely identifying the
router in the Autonomous System.  To ensure
uniqueness, this may default to the value of one of
the router's IPv4 host addresses if IPv4 is
configured on the router.



 TOC 

96.4.  Ospfv3LsIdTC

A unique 32-bit identifier of the piece of the
routing domain that is being described by a link
state advertisement.  In contrast to OSPFv2, the
Link State ID (LSID) has no addressing semantics.



 TOC 

96.5.  Ospfv3AreaIdTC

An OSPFv3 Area Identifier.  A value of zero
identifies the backbone area.



 TOC 

96.6.  Ospfv3IfInstIdTC

An OSPFv3 Interface Instance ID.



 TOC 

96.7.  Ospfv3LsaSequenceTC

The sequence number field is a signed 32-bit
integer.  It is used to detect old and duplicate
link state advertisements.  The space of
sequence numbers is linearly ordered.  The
larger the sequence number, the more recent the
advertisement.



 TOC 

96.8.  Ospfv3LsaAgeTC

The age of the link state advertisement in
seconds.  The high-order bit of the LS age
field is considered the DoNotAge bit for
support of on-demand circuits.



 TOC 

97.  P-BRIDGE-MIB (revision 2006-01-09 00:00)

The Bridge MIB Extension module for managing Priority and Multicast Filtering, defined by IEEE 802.1D-1998, including Restricted Group Registration defined by IEEE 802.1t-2001. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4363; See the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

97.1.  EnabledStatus

A simple status value for the object.



 TOC 

98.  PerfHist-TC-MIB (revision 2003-08-13 00:00)

This MIB Module provides Textual Conventions to be used by systems supporting 15 minute based performance history counts. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2003). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3593; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

98.1.  PerfCurrentCount

A counter associated with a
performance measurement in a current 15
minute measurement interval.  The value
of this counter starts from zero and is
increased when associated events occur,
until the end of the 15 minute interval.
At that time the value of the counter is
stored in the first 15 minute history
interval, and the CurrentCount is
restarted at zero.  In the
case where the agent has no valid data
available for the current interval the
corresponding object instance is not
available and upon a retrieval request
a corresponding error message shall be
returned to indicate that this instance
does not exist (for example, a noSuchName
error for SNMPv1 and a noSuchInstance for
SNMPv2 GET operation).



 TOC 

98.2.  PerfIntervalCount

A counter associated with a
performance measurement in a previous
15 minute measurement interval.  In the
case where the agent has no valid data
available for a particular interval the
corresponding object instance is not
available and upon a retrieval request
a corresponding error message shall be
returned to indicate that this instance
does not exist (for example, a noSuchName
error for SNMPv1 and a noSuchInstance for
SNMPv2 GET operation).
In a system supporting
a history of n intervals with
IntervalCount(1) and IntervalCount(n) the
most and least recent intervals
respectively, the following applies at
the end of a 15 minute interval:
- discard the value of IntervalCount(n)
- the value of IntervalCount(i) becomes that
  of IntervalCount(i-1) for n >= i > 1
- the value of IntervalCount(1) becomes that
  of CurrentCount
- the TotalCount, if supported, is adjusted.



 TOC 

98.3.  PerfTotalCount

A counter associated with a
performance measurements aggregating the
previous valid 15 minute measurement
intervals.  (Intervals for which no valid
data was available are not counted)



 TOC 

99.  PIM-STD-MIB (revision 2007-11-02 00:00)

The MIB module for management of PIM routers. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5060; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

99.1.  PimMode

The PIM mode in which a group is operating.

none(1)      The group is not using PIM, which may be the
             case if, for example, it is a link-local or
             unroutable group address.

ssm(2)       Source-Specific Multicast (SSM) with PIM Sparse
             Mode.

asm(3)       Any Source Multicast (ASM) with PIM Sparse
             Mode.

bidir(4)     Bidirectional PIM.

dm(5)        PIM Dense Mode.

other(6)     Any other PIM mode.



 TOC 

99.2.  PimGroupMappingOriginType

The mechanism by which a PIM group mapping was learned.

fixed(1)     Link-local or unroutable group mappings.

configRp(2)  Local static RP configuration.

configSsm(3) Local SSM Group configuration.

bsr(4)       The PIM Bootstrap Router (BSR) mechanism.

autoRP(5)    Cisco's Auto-RP mechanism.

embedded(6)  The Embedded-RP mechanism where the RP address
             is embedded in the multicast group address.

other(7)     Any other mechanism.



 TOC 

100.  PINT-MIB (revision 2001-02-01 00:00)

This MIB defines the objects necessary to monitor PINT Services



 TOC 

100.1.  PintServiceType

This TC describes the type of a PINT service.



 TOC 

100.2.  PintPerfStatPeriod

This TC describes the statistics period of time.

Note that the values of the counters indexed with a value
SinceReboot(4) can be potentially affected by a counter rollover.
It is the responsibility of the application using this object to
take into account that the counter has been zeroed each time it
reached a value of (2**32-1).



 TOC 

101.  PKTC-IETF-MTA-MIB (revision 2006-09-18 00:00)

This MIB module defines the basic management object for the Multimedia Terminal Adapter devices compliant with PacketCable and IPCablecom requirements. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4682; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

101.1.  PktcMtaDevProvEncryptAlg

 This textual convention defines various types of the
encryption algorithms used for the encryption of the MTA
configuration file.  The description of the encryption
algorithm for each enumerated value is as follows:

'none(0)'            no encryption is used,
'des64CbcMode(1)'    DES 64-bit key in CBC mode,



't3Des192CbcMode(2)' 3DES 192-bit key in CBC mode,
'aes128CbcMode(3)'   AES 128-bit key in CBC mode,
'aes256CbcMode(4)'   AES 256-bit key in CBC mode.



 TOC 

102.  PKTC-IETF-SIG-MIB (revision 2007-12-18 00:00)

This MIB module supplies the basic management objects for the PacketCable and IPCablecom Signaling protocols. This version of the MIB includes common signaling and Network Call Signaling (NCS)-related signaling objects. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2008). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5098; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

102.1.  TenthdBm

This TEXTUAL-CONVENTION represents power levels that are
normally expressed in dBm.  Units are in tenths of a dBm;
for example, -13.5 dBm will be represented as -135.



 TOC 

102.2.  PktcCodecType

 This TEXTUAL-CONVENTION defines various types of codecs
that MAY be supported.  The description for each
enumeration is listed below:

Enumeration     Description
other           a defined codec not in the enumeration
unknown         a codec not defined by the PacketCable
                Codec Specification
g729            ITU-T Recommendation G.729
reserved        for future use
g729E           ITU-T Recommendation G.729E
pcmu            Pulse Code Modulation u-law (PCMU)
g726at32        ITU-T Recommendation G.726-32 (32 kbit/s)
g728            ITU-T Recommendation G.728
pcma            Pulse Code Modulation a-law (PCMA)
g726at16        ITU-T Recommendation G.726-16 (16 kbit/s)
g726at24        ITU-T Recommendation G.726-24 (24 kbit/s)
g726at40        ITU-T Recommendation G.726-40 (40 kbit/s)
ilbc            IETF Internet low-bit rate codec
bv16            Broadcom BroadVoice16

The list of codecs is consistent with the IETF
Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) Profile registry and



the RTP Map Parameters Table in PacketCable Audio/Video
Codecs Specification [PKT-SP-CODEC].  The literal codec
name for each codec is listed below:

Codec     Literal Codec Name
g729              G729
g729E             G729E
pcmu              PCMU
g726at32          G726-32
g728              G728
pcma              PCMA
g726at16          G726-16
g726at24          G726-24
g726at40          G726-40
ilbc              iLBC
bv16              BV16

The literal codec name is the second column of the table
with codec RTP Map Parameters.  The Literal Codec Name Column
contains the codec name used in the local connection
options (LCO) of the NCS messages create connection
(CRCX)/modify connection (MDCX) and is also used to
identify the codec in the Call Management System (CMS)
Provisioning Specification.  The RTP Map Parameter column of
the Table contains the string used in the media attribute
line (a=) of the session description protocol (SDP)
parameters in NCS messages.



 TOC 

102.3.  PktcRingCadence

This object provides an encoding scheme for ring



cadences, including repeatability characteristics.  All
fields in this object MUST be encoded in network-byte
order.

The first three higher-order octets are reserved.  The
octets that follow are used to encode a 'bit-string', with
each bit corresponding to 50 milliseconds.  A bit value of
'1' indicates the presence of a ring-tone, and a bit value
of '0' indicates the absence of a ring-tone, for that
duration (50 ms) (Note: A minimum number of octets
required to encode the bit-string MUST be used).

The first two of the reserved octets MUST indicate the
length of the encoded cadence (in bits) and MUST range
between 1 and 264.  (Note: The length in bits MUST also be
consistent with the number of octets that encode the
cadence).  The MTA MUST ignore any unused bits in the last
octet, but MUST reflect the value as provided on
subsequent SNMP GETs.

The third of the reserved octets indicates 'repeatability'
and MUST be either 0x80 or 0x00 -- the former value
indicating 'non-repeatability', and the latter indicating
'repeatability'.

The MTA MUST reject attempts to set a value that violates
any of the above requirements.



 TOC 

102.4.  PktcSigType

 This object lists the various types of signaling that may
be supported:

other(1) - set when signaling other than NCS is used
ncs(2)   - Network Call Signaling is a derivation of MGCP
          (Media Gateway Control Protocol) defined for
           IPCablecom/PacketCable MTAs.



 TOC 

102.5.  DtmfCode

This TEXTUAL-CONVENTION represents the Dual-Tone
Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Character used
to indicate the start or end of the digit transition
sequence used for caller id or Visual Message Waiting
Indicator (VMWI).

Note: The DTMF code '*' is indicated using 'dtmfcodeStar',
and the DTMF code '#' is indicated using ' dtmfcodeHash'.



 TOC 

102.6.  PktcSubscriberSideSigProtocol

This TEXTUAL-CONVENTION represents the Signaling
protocol being used for purposes such as caller id
or VMWI.

A value of fsk(1) indicates Frequency Shift Keying
(FSK).
A value of dtmf(2) indicates Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF).



 TOC 

103.  PMIPV6-TC-MIB (revision 2012-05-07 00:00)

This MIB module provides textual conventions for Proxy Mobile IPv6 Management information. Copyright (c) 2012 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info).



 TOC 

103.1.  Pmip6TimeStamp64

A 64-bit unsigned integer field containing a timestamp.
The value indicates the elapsed time since January 1,
1970, 00:00 UTC, by using a fixed-point format.  In this
format, the integer number of seconds is contained in
the first 48 bits of the field, and the remaining 16
bits indicate the number of 1/65536 fractions of a
second.



 TOC 

103.2.  Pmip6MnIdentifier

The identity of a mobile node in the Proxy Mobile IPv6
domain.  This is the stable identifier of a mobile node
that the mobility entities in a Proxy Mobile IPv6 domain
can always acquire and use for predictably identifying
a mobile node.  Various forms of identifiers can be used
to identify a mobile node (MN).  Two examples are a
Network Access Identifier (NAI) and an opaque
identifier applicable to a particular application.



 TOC 

103.3.  Pmip6MnLLIdentifier

An identifier that identifies the attached interface of
a mobile node.



 TOC 

103.4.  Pmip6MnIndex

A unique integer value, greater than zero, assigned to
each mobile node that is currently attached to the
Proxy Mobile IPv6 domain by the management system.
It is recommended that the values are assigned in a
monotonically increasing order starting from 1.  It may
wrap after reaching its maximum value.  The value for
each mobile node must remain constant at least from one
re-initialization of the entity's network management
system to the next re-initialization.



 TOC 

103.5.  Pmip6MnLLIndex

A unique integer value, greater than zero, assigned to
each interface of a mobile node that is currently
attached to the Proxy Mobile IPv6 domain by the
management system.
It is recommended that the values are assigned in a
monotonically increasing order starting from 1.  It may
wrap after reaching its maximum value.  The value for
each interface of a mobile node must remain constant at
least from one re-initialization of the entity's network
management system to the next re-initialization.



 TOC 

103.6.  Pmip6MnInterfaceATT

The object specifies the access technology that
connects the mobile node to the access link on the
mobile access gateway.
The enumerated values and the corresponding access
technology are as follows:
 reserved                (0): Reserved (Not used)
 logicalNetworkInterface (1): Logical network interface
 pointToPointInterface   (2): Point-to-point interface
 ethernet                (3): Ethernet interface
 wirelessLan             (4): Wireless LAN interface
 wimax                   (5): Wimax interface
 threeGPPGERAN           (6): 3GPP GERAN
 threeGPPUTRAN           (7): 3GPP UTRAN
 threeGPPEUTRAN          (8): 3GPP E-UTRAN
 threeGPP2eHRPD          (9): 3GPP2 eHRPD
 threeGPP2HRPD          (10): 3GPP2 HRPD
 threeGPP21xRTT         (11): 3GPP2 1xRTT
 threeGPP2UMB           (12): 3GPP2 UMB



 TOC 

104.  POLICY-BASED-MANAGEMENT-MIB (revision 2005-02-07 00:00)

The MIB module for policy-based configuration of SNMP infrastructures. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4011; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

104.1.  PmUTF8String

An octet string containing information typically in
human-readable form.

To facilitate internationalization, this
information is represented by using the ISO/IEC
IS 10646-1 character set, encoded as an octet
string using the UTF-8 transformation format
described in RFC 3629.

As additional code points are added by
amendments to the 10646 standard from time
to time, implementations must be prepared to
encounter any code point from 0x00000000 to
0x10FFFF.  Byte sequences that do not
correspond to the valid UTF-8 encoding of a
code point or that are outside this range are
prohibited.

The use of control codes should be avoided.

When it is necessary to represent a newline,
the control code sequence CR LF should be used.

For code points not directly supported by user
interface hardware or software, an alternative
means of entry and display, such as hexadecimal,
may be provided.

For information encoded in 7-bit US-ASCII,
the UTF-8 encoding is identical to the
US-ASCII encoding.

UTF-8 may require multiple bytes to represent a
single character/code point; thus, the length
of this object in octets may be different from
the number of characters encoded.  Similarly,
size constraints refer to the number of encoded
octets, not the number of characters represented
by an encoding.

Note that when this TC is used for an object
used or envisioned to be used as an index, then
a SIZE restriction MUST be specified so that the
number of sub-identifiers for any object instance
does not exceed the limit of 128, as defined by



RFC 3416.

Note that the size of PmUTF8String object is
measured in octets, not characters.



 TOC 

105.  Printer-MIB (revision 2004-06-02 00:00)

The MIB module for management of printers. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). This version of this MIB module was published in RFC 3805. For full legal notices see the RFC itself.



 TOC 

105.1.  PrtMediaUnitTC

Units of measure for media dimensions.



 TOC 

105.2.  MediaUnit (deprecated)

Units of measure for media dimensions.



 TOC 

105.3.  PrtCapacityUnitTC

Units of measure for media capacity.



 TOC 

105.4.  CapacityUnit (deprecated)

Units of measure for media capacity.



 TOC 

105.5.  PrtPrintOrientationTC

A generic representation for printing orientation on a
'page'.



 TOC 

105.6.  PrtSubUnitStatusTC

Status of a printer sub-unit.

The SubUnitStatus is an integer that is the sum of 5 distinct
values, Availability, Non-Critical, Critical, On-line, and
Transitioning. These values are:

Availability                           Value

    Available and Idle                  0       0000'b
    Available and Standby               2       0010'b
    Available and Active                4       0100'b
    Available and Busy                  6       0110'b
    Unavailable and OnRequest           1       0001'b
    Unavailable because Broken          3       0011'b
    Unknown                             5       0101'b

Non-Critical
    No Non-Critical Alerts              0       0000'b
    Non-Critical Alerts                 8       1000'b

Critical

    No Critical Alerts                  0       0000'b


    Critical Alerts                    16     1 0000'b

On-Line

    State is On-Line                    0       0000'b
    State is Off-Line                  32    10 0000'b

Transitioning

    At intended state                   0       0000'b
    Transitioning to intended state    64   100 0000'b



 TOC 

105.7.  SubUnitStatus (deprecated)

Status of a printer sub-unit.

The SubUnitStatus is an integer that is the sum of 5 distinct
values, Availability, Non-Critical, Critical, On-line, and
Transitioning. These values are:

Availability                           Value
    Available and Idle                  0       0000'b
    Available and Standby               2       0010'b
    Available and Active                4       0100'b
    Available and Busy                  6       0110'b
    Unavailable and OnRequest           1       0001'b
    Unavailable because Broken          3       0011'b
    Unknown                             5       0101'b

Non-Critical
    No Non-Critical Alerts              0       0000'b
    Non-Critical Alerts                 8       1000'b

Critical

    No Critical Alerts                  0       0000'b
    Critical Alerts                    16     1 0000'b

On-Line

    State is On-Line                    0       0000'b
    State is Off-Line                  32    10 0000'b

Transitioning


    At intended state                   0       0000'b
    Transitioning to intended state    64   100 0000'b



 TOC 

105.8.  PresentOnOff

Presence and configuration of a device or feature.



 TOC 

105.9.  PrtLocalizedDescriptionStringTC

An object MUST use this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION when its
'charset' is controlled by the value of
prtGeneralCurrentLocalization.



 TOC 

105.10.  PrtConsoleDescriptionStringTC

An object MUST use this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION when its
'charset' is controlled by the value of
prtConsoleLocalization.



 TOC 

105.11.  CodedCharSet (deprecated)

The original description clause from RFC 1759 [RFC1759] was
technically inaccurate and therefore has been deleted.



 TOC 

105.12.  PrtChannelStateTC

The state of this print job delivery channel. The value
determines whether print data is allowed through this channel.



 TOC 

105.13.  PrtOutputStackingOrderTC

The current state of the stacking order for the associated
output sub-unit. 'firstToLast' means that as pages are output,
the front of the next page is placed against the back of the
previous page. 'lastToFirst' means that as pages are output,
the back of the next page is placed against the front of the
previous page.



 TOC 

105.14.  PrtOutputPageDeliveryOrientationTC

The reading surface that will be 'up' when pages are delivered
to the associated output sub-unit. Values are Face-Up and Face
Down (Note: interpretation of these values is, in general,
context-dependent based on locale; presentation of these values
to an end-user should be normalized to the expectations of the
user.



 TOC 

105.15.  PrtMarkerCounterUnitTC

The unit that will be used by the printer when reporting
counter values for this marking sub-unit.  The
time units of measure are provided for a device like a
strip recorder that does not or cannot track the physical
dimensions of the media and does not use characters,
lines or sheets.



 TOC 

105.16.  PrtMarkerSuppliesSupplyUnitTC

Unit of this marker supply container/receptacle.



 TOC 

105.17.  PrtMarkerSuppliesClassTC

Indicates whether this supply entity represents a supply
that is consumed or a receptacle that is filled.



 TOC 

105.18.  PrtMarkerColorantRoleTC

The role played by this colorant.



 TOC 

105.19.  PrtMarkerAddressabilityUnitTC

The unit of measure of distances, as applied to the marker's
resolution.



 TOC 

105.20.  PrtMediaPathMaxSpeedPrintUnitTC

The unit of measure used in specifying the speed of all
media paths in the printer.



 TOC 

105.21.  PrtInterpreterTwoWayTC

Indicates whether or not this interpreter returns information
back to the host.



 TOC 

105.22.  PrtAlertSeverityLevelTC

The level of severity of this alert table entry.  The printer
determines the severity level assigned to each entry in the
table. A critical alert is binary by nature and definition. A
warning is defined to be a non-critical alert. The original and
most common warning is unary. The binary warning was added later
and given a more distinguished name.



 TOC 

106.  PTOPO-MIB (revision 2000-09-21 00:00)

The MIB module for physical topology information.



 TOC 

106.1.  PtopoGenAddr

The value of an address.



 TOC 

106.2.  PtopoChassisIdType

This TC describes the source of a chassis identifier.

The enumeration 'chasIdEntPhysicalAlias(1)' represents a
chassis identifier based on the value of entPhysicalAlias
for a chassis component (i.e., an entPhysicalClass value of
'chassis(3)').

The enumeration 'chasIdIfAlias(2)' represents a chassis
identifier based on the value of ifAlias for an interface
on the containing chassis.

The enumeration 'chasIdPortEntPhysicalAlias(3)' represents
a chassis identifier based on the value of entPhysicalAlias
for a port or backplane component (i.e., entPhysicalClass
value of 'port(10)' or 'backplane(4)'), within the
containing chassis.

The enumeration 'chasIdMacAddress(4)' represents a chassis
identifier based on the value of a unicast source MAC
address (encoded in network byte order and IEEE 802.3
canonical bit order), of a port on the containing chassis.

The enumeration 'chasIdPtopoGenAddr(5)' represents a
chassis identifier based on a network address, associated
with a particular chassis.  The encoded address is actually
composed of two fields.  The first field is a single octet,
representing the IANA AddressFamilyNumbers value for the
specific address type, and the second field is the
PtopoGenAddr address value.



 TOC 

106.3.  PtopoChassisId

This TC describes the format of a chassis identifier
string.  Objects of this type are always used with an
associated PtopoChassisIdType object, which identifies the
format of the particular PtopoChassisId object instance.

If the associated PtopoChassisIdType object has a value of
'chasIdEntPhysicalAlias(1)', then the octet string
identifies a particular instance of the entPhysicalAlias
object for a chassis component (i.e., an entPhysicalClass
value of 'chassis(3)').

If the associated PtopoChassisIdType object has a value of
'chasIdIfAlias(2)', then the octet string identifies a
particular instance of the ifAlias object for an interface
on the containing chassis.

If the associated PtopoChassisIdType object has a value of
'chasIdPortEntPhysicalAlias(3)', then the octet string
identifies a particular instance of the entPhysicalAlias
object for a port or backplane component within the
containing chassis.

If the associated PtopoChassisIdType object has a value of
'chasIdMacAddress(4)', then this string identifies a
particular unicast source MAC address (encoded in network
byte order and IEEE 802.3 canonical bit order), of a port on
the containing chassis.

If the associated PtopoChassisIdType object has a value of
'chasIdPtopoGenAddr(5)', then this string identifies a
particular network address, encoded in network byte order,
associated with one or more ports on the containing chassis.
The first octet contains the IANA Address Family Numbers
enumeration value for the specific address type, and octets
2 through N contain the PtopoGenAddr address value in
network byte order.



 TOC 

106.4.  PtopoPortIdType

This TC describes the source of a particular type of port
identifier used in the PTOPO MIB.

The enumeration 'portIdIfAlias(1)' represents a port
identifier based on the ifAlias MIB object.



The enumeration 'portIdPortEntPhysicalAlias(2)' represents a
port identifier based on the value of entPhysicalAlias for a
port or backplane component (i.e., entPhysicalClass value of
'port(10)' or 'backplane(4)'), within the containing
chassis.

The enumeration 'portIdMacAddr(3)' represents a port
identifier based on a unicast source MAC address, which has
been detected by the agent and associated with a particular
port.

The enumeration 'portIdPtopoGenAddr(4)' represents a port
identifier based on a network address, detected by the agent
and associated with a particular port.



 TOC 

106.5.  PtopoPortId

This TC describes the format of a port identifier string.
Objects of this type are always used with an associated
PtopoPortIdType object, which identifies the format of the
particular PtopoPortId object instance.

If the associated PtopoPortIdType object has a value of
'portIdIfAlias(1)', then the octet string identifies a
particular instance of the ifAlias object.

If the associated PtopoPortIdType object has a value of
'portIdEntPhysicalAlias(2)', then the octet string
identifies a particular instance of the entPhysicalAlias
object for a port component (i.e., entPhysicalClass value of
'port(10)').

If the associated PtopoPortIdType object has a value of
'portIdMacAddr(3)', then this string identifies a particular
unicast source MAC address associated with the port.

If the associated PtopoPortIdType object has a value of
'portIdPtopoGenAddr(4)', then this string identifies a
network address associated with the port.  The first octet
contains the IANA AddressFamilyNumbers enumeration value for
the specific address type, and octets 2 through N contain


the PtopoGenAddr address value in network byte order.



 TOC 

106.6.  PtopoAddrSeenState

This TC describes the state of address detection for a
particular type of port identifier used in the PTOPO MIB.

The enumeration 'notUsed(1)' represents an entry for which
the particular MIB object is not applicable to the remote
connection endpoint,

The enumeration 'unknown(2)' represents an entry for which
the particular address collection state is not known.

The enumeration 'oneAddr(3)'  represents an entry for which
exactly one source address (of the type indicated by the
particular MIB object), has been detected.

The enumeration 'multiAddr(4)'  represents an entry for
which more than one source address (of the type indicated by
the particular MIB object), has been detected.

An agent is expected to set the initial state of the
PtopoAddrSeenState to 'notUsed(1)' or 'unknown(2)'.

Note that the PTOPO MIB does not restrict or specify the
means in which the PtopoAddrSeenState is known to an agent.
In particular, an agent may detect this information through
configuration data, or some means other than directly
monitoring all port traffic.



 TOC 

107.  PW-CEP-STD-MIB (revision 2011-05-16 00:00)

This MIB module contains managed object definitions for Circuit Emulation over Packet (CEP) as in [RFC4842]: Malis, A., Prayson, P., Cohen, R., and D. Zelig. 'Synchronous Optical Network/Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SONET/SDH) Circuit Emulation over Packet (CEP)', RFC 4842. Copyright (c) 2011 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info).



 TOC 

107.1.  PwCepSonetEbm

Equipped Bit Mask (EBM) used for fractional STS-1/Virtual
Circuit 3 (VC-3).  The EBM bits are the 28 least
significant bits out of the 32-bit value.



 TOC 

107.2.  PwCepSdhVc4Ebm

Equipped Bit Mask (EBM) used for each Tributary Unit Group
3 (TUG-3) in fractional VC-4 circuits.  The EBM bits are
the 30 least significant bits out of the 32-bit value.



 TOC 

107.3.  PwCepSonetVtgMap

The VT/VC types carried in the 7 VT groups (VTGs)/TUG-2s.
The format is 28 bits in the form of an Equipped Bit Mask
(EBM) for fractional STS-1/VC-3.  The mapping specifies the
maximal occupancies of VT/VC within each VTG/TUG-2.  For
example, all four bits are set to 1 in this object to
represent a VTG carrying VT1.5/VC11s, while only three
are set when VT2/VC12s are carried within this VTG.
The relevant bits are the 28 least significant bits out of
the 32-bit value.



 TOC 

107.4.  PwCepFracAsyncMap

The type of asynchronous mapping carried inside STS-1,
VC-3, or TUG-3 containing TU-3 circuit.



 TOC 

108.  PW-TC-STD-MIB (revision 2009-04-21 00:00)

This MIB module defines TEXTUAL-CONVENTIONS for concepts used in pseudowire edge-to-edge networks. Copyright (c) 2009 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS 'AS IS' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5542; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

108.1.  PwGroupID

An administrative identification for grouping a
set of service-specific pseudowire services.



 TOC 

108.2.  PwIDType

Pseudowire Identifier.  Used to identify the PW
(together with some other fields) in the signaling
session.



 TOC 

108.3.  PwIndexType

Pseudowire Index.  A unique value, greater than zero,
for each locally defined PW.  Used for indexing
several MIB tables associated with the particular PW.
It is recommended that values are assigned contiguously
starting from 1.  The value for each PW MUST remain
constant at least from one re-initialization
to the next re-initialization.



 TOC 

108.4.  PwIndexOrZeroType

This TEXTUAL-CONVENTION is an extension of the
PwIndexType convention.  The latter defines a greater-
than-zero value used to identify a pseudowire
in the managed system.  This extension permits the
additional value of zero.  The zero value is object-specific
and MUST therefore be defined as part of the description of
any object that uses this syntax.  Examples of the usage of
zero might include situations where pseudowire was unknown,
or where none or all pseudowires need to be referenced.



 TOC 

108.5.  PwOperStatusTC

Indicates the operational status of the PW.

- up(1):             Ready to pass packets.
- down(2):           PW signaling is not yet finished, or
                     indications available at the service
                     level indicate that the PW is not
                     passing packets.
- testing(3):        AdminStatus at the PW level is set to
                     test.





- dormant(4):        The PW is not in a condition to pass
                     packets but is in a 'pending' state,
                     waiting for some external event.
- notPresent(5):     Some component is missing to accomplish
                     the setup of the PW.  It can be
                     configuration error, incomplete
                     configuration, or a missing H/W component.
- lowerLayerDown(6): One or more of the lower-layer interfaces
                     responsible for running the underlying PSN
                     is not in OperStatus 'up' state.



 TOC 

108.6.  PwAttachmentIdentifierType

An octet string used in the generalized Forward Error
Correction (FEC) element for identifying attachment forwarder
and groups.  A NULL identifier is of zero length.



 TOC 

108.7.  PwGenIdType

Represents the Attachment Group Identifier (AGI) Type and
Attachment Individual Identifier (AII) Type in generalized FEC
signaling and configuration.



 TOC 

108.8.  PwCwStatusTC

Indicates the status of the control word (CW) negotiation
based on the local configuration and the indications received
from the peer node.

waitingForNextMsg(1) indicates that the node is waiting for
another label mapping from the peer.





sentWrongBitErrorCode(2) indicates that the local node has
notified the peer about a mismatch in the C-bit.

rxWithdrawWithWrongBitErrorCode(3) indicates that a withdraw
message has been received with the wrong C-bit error code.

illegalReceivedBit(4) indicates a C-bit configuration with
the peer that is not compatible with the PW type.

cwPresent(5) indicates that the CW is present for this PW.
If signaling is used, the C-bit is set and agreed upon between
the nodes.  For manually configured PW, the local
configuration requires the use of the CW.

cwNotPresent(6) indicates that the CW is not present for this
PW.  If signaling is used, the C-bit is reset and agreed upon
between the nodes.  For manually configured PW, the local
configuration requires that the CW not be used.

notYetKnown(7) indicates that a label mapping has not yet
been received from the peer.



 TOC 

108.9.  PwStatus

Indicates the status of the PW and the interfaces affecting
this PW.  If none of the bits are set, it indicates no faults
are reported.



 TOC 

108.10.  PwFragSize

If set to a value other than zero, it indicates the desired
fragmentation length in bytes.  If set to zero,
fragmentation is not desired for PSN bound packets.



 TOC 

108.11.  PwFragStatus

Indicates the status of the fragmentation/reassembly process
based on local configuration and peer capability.

noFrag(0) bit indicates that local configuration is for no
fragmentation.

cfgFragGreaterThanPsnMtu(1) bit indicates that the local node
is set to fragment, but the fragmentation size is greater
than the MTU available at the PSN between the nodes.
Fragmentation is not done in this case.

cfgFragButRemoteIncapable(2) bit indicates that the local
configuration conveys the desire for fragmentation but
the peer is not capable of reassembly.

remoteFragCapable(3) bit indicates that the remote node
is capable to accept fragmented PDUs.

fragEnabled(4) bit indicates that fragmentation will be used
on this PW.  Fragmentation can be used if the local node was
configured for fragmentation, the peer has the capability
to accept fragmented packets, and the CW is in use for this
PW.



 TOC 

108.12.  PwCfgIndexOrzero

Index in any of the relevant configuration tables for
supplement information regarding configuration of the
specific technology.  Value zero implies no additional
configuration information is applicable.



 TOC 

109.  PW-TDM-MIB (revision 2009-06-15 00:00)

This MIB contains managed object definitions for encapsulating TDM (T1,E1, T3, E3, NxDS0) as pseudo-wires over packet-switching networks (PSN). This MIB supplements the PW-STD-MIB as in: Zelig, D., Nadeau, T. 'Pseudowire (PW) Management Information Base'. The PW-STD-MIB contains structures and MIB associations generic to pseudowire (PW) emulation. PW-specific MIBs (such as this) contain config and stats for specific PW types. Copyright (c) 2009 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS 'AS IS' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5604; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

109.1.  PwTDMCfgIndex

Index into the relevant pwXXXCfgTable.



 TOC 

110.  Q-BRIDGE-MIB (revision 2006-01-09 00:00)

The VLAN Bridge MIB module for managing Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks, as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, including Restricted Vlan Registration defined by IEEE 802.1u-2001 and Vlan Classification defined by IEEE 802.1v-2001. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4363; See the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

110.1.  PortList

Each octet within this value specifies a set of eight
ports, with the first octet specifying ports 1 through
8, the second octet specifying ports 9 through 16, etc.
Within each octet, the most significant bit represents
the lowest numbered port, and the least significant bit
represents the highest numbered port.  Thus, each port
of the bridge is represented by a single bit within the
value of this object.  If that bit has a value of '1',
then that port is included in the set of ports; the port
is not included if its bit has a value of '0'.



 TOC 

110.2.  VlanIndex

A value used to index per-VLAN tables: values of 0 and
4095 are not permitted.  If the value is between 1 and
4094 inclusive, it represents an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN-ID with
global scope within a given bridged domain (see VlanId
textual convention).  If the value is greater than 4095,



then it represents a VLAN with scope local to the
particular agent, i.e., one without a global VLAN-ID
assigned to it.  Such VLANs are outside the scope of
IEEE 802.1Q, but it is convenient to be able to manage them
in the same way using this MIB.



 TOC 

110.3.  VlanId

The VLAN-ID that uniquely identifies a VLAN.  This
is the 12-bit VLAN-ID used in the VLAN Tag header.
The range is defined by the REFERENCEd specification.



 TOC 

110.4.  VlanIdOrAny

The VLAN-ID that uniquely identifies a specific VLAN,
or any VLAN.  The special value of 4095 is used to
indicate a wildcard, i.e., any VLAN.  This can be used
in any situation where an object or table entry must
refer either to a specific VLAN or to any VLAN.

Note that a MIB object that is defined using this
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION should clarify the meaning of
'any VLAN' (i.e., the special value 4095).



 TOC 

110.5.  VlanIdOrNone

The VLAN-ID that uniquely identifies a specific VLAN,
or no VLAN.  The special value of zero is used to
indicate that no VLAN-ID is present or used.  This can
be used in any situation where an object or a table entry
must refer either to a specific VLAN, or to no VLAN.

Note that a MIB object that is defined using this
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION should clarify the meaning of
'no VLAN' (i.e., the special value 0).



 TOC 

110.6.  VlanIdOrAnyOrNone

The VLAN-ID that uniquely identifies a specific VLAN,
any VLAN, or no VLAN.  The special values 0 and 4095
have the same meaning as described in the VlanIdOrAny
and VlanIdOrNone TEXTUAL-CONVENTIONs.

Note that a MIB object that is defined using this
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION should clarify the meaning of
'any VLAN' and 'no VLAN' (i.e., the special values
0 and 4095).



 TOC 

111.  RBRIDGE-MIB (revision 2013-01-07 00:00)

The RBridge MIB module for managing switches that support the TRILL protocol.



 TOC 

111.1.  RbridgeAddress

The Media Access Control (MAC) address used by an RBridge
port.  This may match the RBridge IS-IS SystemID.



 TOC 

111.2.  RbridgeNickname

The 16-bit identifier used in TRILL as an
abbreviation for the RBridge's 48-bit IS-IS System ID.
The value 0 means a nickname is not specified, the values
0xFFC0 through 0xFFFE are reserved for future allocation,
and the value 0xFFFF is permanently reserved.



 TOC 

112.  RIPv2-MIB (revision 1994-07-27 22:53)

The MIB module to describe the RIP2 Version 2 Protocol



 TOC 

112.1.  RouteTag

the RouteTag type represents the contents of the Route Domain
field in the packet header or route entry



 TOC 

113.  RMON2-MIB (revision 2006-05-02 00:00)

The MIB module for managing remote monitoring device implementations. This MIB module extends the architecture introduced in the original RMON MIB as specified in RFC 2819. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4502; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

113.1.  ZeroBasedCounter32

This TC describes an object that counts events with the
following semantics: objects of this type will be set to
zero(0) on creation and will thereafter count appropriate
events, wrapping back to zero(0) when the value 2^32 is
reached.

Provided that an application discovers the new object within
the minimum time to wrap, it can use the initial value as a
delta since it last polled the table of which this object is
part.  It is important for a management station to be aware of
this minimum time and the actual time between polls, and to
discard data if the actual time is too long or there is no
defined minimum time.

Typically, this TC is used in tables where the INDEX space is
constantly changing and/or the TimeFilter mechanism is in use.



 TOC 

113.2.  LastCreateTime

This TC describes an object that stores the value of the
sysUpTime object at the last time its entry was created.

This can be used for polling applications to determine that an
entry has been deleted and re-created between polls, causing
an otherwise undetectable discontinuity in the data.

If sysUpTime is reset to zero as a result of a re-
initialization of the network management (sub)system, then
the values of all LastCreateTime objects are also reset.
However, after approximately 497 days without a re-
initialization, the sysUpTime object will reach 2^^32-1 and
then increment to zero; in this case, existing values
of TimeStamp objects do not change.  This can lead to
ambiguities in the value of TimeStamp objects.



 TOC 

113.3.  TimeFilter

To be used for the index to a table.  Allows an application
to download only those rows changed since a particular time.



Note that this is not a history mechanism.  Only current values
of underlying objects are returned; saved instance values
associated with particular values of sysUpTime are not.

An entry is considered changed if the value of any object in the
entry changes, if the row is created, or if any object in the
entry is created or deleted.  Note that deleted entries cannot
be detected or downloaded.

A time-filtered conceptual table is created by inserting a
single object of SYNTAX TimeFilter as the first INDEX component
in a copy of an existing basic conceptual table (i.e., any
SEQUENCE without a TimeFilter INDEX component).  Thus, for
each conceptual entry 'I' in the basic table, there exists N
conceptual entries in the time-filtered version, indexed N.I,
where 'N' is equal to the value of sysUpTime.

When an application retrieves conceptual instances from a
time-filtered table, and an INDEX value is provided for the
TimeFilter INDEX component 'N', the agent will only consider
returning basic conceptual entries (e.g., 'fooColumn.N.I') if
any column within the basic conceptual entry has changed since
sysUpTime 'N'.  If not, the basic conceptual entry will
be ignored for the particular retrieval operation.

When sysUpTime is equal to zero, this table shall be empty.

One conceptual entry exists for each past value of sysUpTime,
except that the whole table is purged should sysUpTime wrap.

As an entry in a time-filtered table is updated (i.e., one of
the columns in the basic conceptual table is changed), new
conceptual entries are also created in the time-filtered version
(which still shares the now updated object values with all other
instances).  The number of unique time-filtered instances that
are created is determined by the value of sysUpTime at which the
basic entry was last updated.  One unique instance will exist
for each value of sysUpTime at the last update time for the row.
However, a new TimeFilter index instance is created for each new
sysUpTime value.  The TimeFilter index values not associated
with entry updates are called duplicate time-filtered instances.

After some deployment experience, it has been determined that
a time-filtered table is more efficient if the agent
stops a MIB walk operation by skipping over rows with a
TimeFilter index value higher than the value in the received
GetNext/GetBulk request.  That is, instead of incrementing a
TimeFilter index value, the agent will continue to the next



object or table.  As a consequence, GetNext or GetBulk
operations will provide only one pass through a time-filtered
table.

It is suggested that an agent implement a time-filtered table
in this manner to improve performance and avoid a MIB walk
getting stuck in time-filtered tables.  It is, however, still
acceptable for an agent to implement a time-filtered table in
the traditional manner (i.e., every conceptual time-filtered
instance is returned in GetNext and GetBulk PDU responses), and
management applications must be able to deal with such
traditional implementations.

See the appendix for further discussion of this textual
convention.

The following example is provided to demonstrate TimeFilter
behavior:

Consider the following basic conceptual table, basicFooTable.
(Note that the basic version of a time-filtered table may not
actually be defined.)

    basicFooTable:

    basicFooTable ...
    INDEX { fooIndex }

    BasicFooEntry {
       fooIndex     Integer32,
       fooCounts    Counter32
    }

For this example, the basicFooTable contains two static
conceptual entries (fooIndex equals '1' and '2'), created at
time zero.  It also contains one dynamic conceptual entry
(fooIndex equals '3'), which is created at time '3' and deleted
at time '7'.

The time-filtered version of the basicFooTable could be defined
as follows:

    FooTable:

    fooTable ...
    INDEX { fooTimeMark, fooIndex }

    FooEntry {



       fooTimeMark  TimeFilter,
       fooIndex     Integer32,
       fooCounts    Counter32
    }


Note that entries exist in the time-filtered conceptual table
only if they actually exist in the underlying (basic) table.

For this example, the fooTable will have three underlying
basic entries (fooIndex == 1, 2, and 3), with the following
activity (for sysUpTime equal 0 to 9):

   - fooEntry.N.1 is created at time '0' and most recently
     updated at time '6' to the value '5'.
   - fooEntry.N.2 is created at time '0' and most recently
     updated at time '8' to the value '9'.
   - fooEntry.N.3 is created at time '3', updated at time '5'
     to the value '17', and deleted at time '7'.

The following tables show the values that would be returned for
MIB walk operations with various TimeFilter values, done at
different times.  An application issues a retrieval request at
time 'T', with a TimeFilter value, 'N' (typically set to a lower
value, such as the value of sysUpTime at the last polling cycle).

The following values would be returned in a MIB walk of
fooCounts.N if T equals '0' and N equals '0':

     fooCounts.N.I    Value
     ==========================
     fooCounts.0.1    0
     fooCounts.0.2    0

 Note that nothing is returned for fooCounts.0.3, since that
 entry does not exist at sysUpTime equals '0'.

The following values would be returned in a full (traditional) MIB
walk of fooCounts.N if T equals '3' and N equals '0':

     fooCounts.N.I    Value
     =======================
     fooCounts.0.1    0
     fooCounts.0.2    0
     fooCounts.0.3    0
     fooCounts.1.3    0
     fooCounts.2.3    0
     fooCounts.3.3    0



 Note that there are no instances for T equals 1 or 2 for the
 first two values of N, as these entries did not change
 since they were created at time '0'.

 Note that the current value for 'fooCounts.N.3' is returned
 here, even for values of N less than '3' (when the entry was
 created).  The agent only considers the current existence of an
 entry in the TimeFilter algorithm, not the time when the entry
 was created.

 Note that the instances 'fooCounts.0.3', 'fooCounts.1.3',
 and 'fooCounts.2.3' are duplicates and can be suppressed by the
 agent in a MIB walk.

The following values would be returned in a full (traditional)
MIB walk of fooCounts.N if T equals '6' and N equals '3':

     fooCounts.N.I    Value
     =======================
     fooCounts.3.1    5
     fooCounts.3.3    17
     fooCounts.4.1    5
     fooCounts.4.3    17
     fooCounts.5.1    5
     fooCounts.5.3    17
     fooCounts.6.1    5

  Note that no instances for entry 'fooCounts.N.2' are returned,
  since it has not changed since time '3'.

  Note that all instances except 'fooCounts.5.3' and
  'fooCounts.6.1' are duplicates and can be suppressed by the
  agent in a MIB walk.

The following values would be returned in a full (traditional)
MIB walk of fooCounts.N if T equals '9' and N equals '6':

     fooCounts.N.I    Value
     =======================
     fooCounts.6.1    5
     fooCounts.6.2    9
     fooCounts.7.2    9
     fooCounts.8.2    9

  Note that no instances for entry 'fooCounts.N.3' are returned,
  since it was deleted at time '7'.

  Note that instances 'fooCounts.6.2' and 'fooCounts.7.2'



  are duplicates and can be suppressed by the agent in a MIB
  walk.



 TOC 

113.4.  DataSource

Identifies the source of the data that the associated
function is configured to analyze.  This source can be any
interface on this device.

In order to identify a particular interface, this
object shall identify the instance of the ifIndex
object, defined in [RFC2863], for the desired interface.

For example, if an entry were to receive data from
interface #1, this object would be set to ifIndex.1.



 TOC 

113.5.  ControlString

This data type is used to communicate with a modem or a



serial data switch.  A ControlString contains embedded
commands to control how the device will interact with the
remote device through the serial interface.  Commands are
represented as two-character sequences beginning with
the '^' character.

The following commands are recognized by the device (note
that command characters are case sensitive):

   ^s  Send string that follows, which is terminated by the
       next command or the end of string.
   ^c  Delay for the number of seconds that follows.  Toss
       out any data received rather than store it in a
       buffer for parsing.
   ^t  Set timeout to the value represented by the decimal
       digits that follow.  The default timeout is 20
       seconds.  Note that this timeout may be overridden
       by a smaller serialTimeout configured for the
       associated serial interface (see serialConfigTable).
   ^w  Wait for the reply string that follows, which is
       terminated by the next command or the end of string.
       Partial and case-insensitive matching is applied, i.e.,
       if the reply string (any case combination) is found
       anywhere in the received string, then the a match is
       found.  If the current timeout elapses without a match,
       then the remaining control string is ignored.
   ^!  The ^ character.
   ^d  Delay the number of seconds specified by the decimal
       digits that follow.
   ^b  Send break for the number of milliseconds specified by
       the decimal digits that follow.  If no digits follow,
       break will be enforced for 250 milliseconds by default.

The following ASCII control characters may be inserted into
the '^s' send string or the '^w' reply string:

   ^@    0x00
   ^A    0x01
    ..
   ^M    0x0D
    ..
   ^Z    0x1A
   ^[    0x1B
   ^    0x1C
   ^]    0x1D
   ^^    0x1E
   ^_    0x1F




Binary data may also be inserted into the data stream.  The
control sequence for each byte of binary data is ^0x##, where
## is the hexadecimal representation of the data byte.  Two
ASCII characters (0-9, a-f, A-F) must follow the '^0x'
control prefix.  For example, '^0x0D^0x0A' is interpreted as a
carriage return followed by a line feed.



 TOC 

114.  RMON-MIB (revision 2000-05-11 00:00)

Remote network monitoring devices, often called monitors or probes, are instruments that exist for the purpose of managing a network. This MIB defines objects for managing remote network monitoring devices.



 TOC 

114.1.  OwnerString

This data type is used to model an administratively
assigned name of the owner of a resource. Implementations
must accept values composed of well-formed NVT ASCII
sequences. In addition, implementations should accept
values composed of well-formed UTF-8 sequences.

It is suggested that this name contain one or more of
the following: IP address, management station name,
network manager's name, location, or phone number.
In some cases the agent itself will be the owner of
an entry.  In these cases, this string shall be set
to a string starting with 'monitor'.

SNMP access control is articulated entirely in terms
of the contents of MIB views; access to a particular
SNMP object instance depends only upon its presence
or absence in a particular MIB view and never upon
its value or the value of related object instances.
Thus, objects of this type afford resolution of
resource contention only among cooperating
managers; they realize no access control function
with respect to uncooperative parties.



 TOC 

114.2.  EntryStatus

The status of a table entry.

Setting this object to the value invalid(4) has the
effect of invalidating the corresponding entry.
That is, it effectively disassociates the mapping
identified with said entry.
It is an implementation-specific matter as to whether
the agent removes an invalidated entry from the table.
Accordingly, management stations must be prepared to
receive tabular information from agents that corresponds
to entries currently not in use.  Proper
interpretation of such entries requires examination
of the relevant EntryStatus object.

An existing instance of this object cannot be set to
createRequest(2).  This object may only be set to
createRequest(2) when this instance is created.  When
this object is created, the agent may wish to create
supplemental object instances with default values
to complete a conceptual row in this table.  Because the
creation of these default objects is entirely at the option
of the agent, the manager must not assume that any will be
created, but may make use of any that are created.
Immediately after completing the create operation, the agent
must set this object to underCreation(3).

When in the underCreation(3) state, an entry is allowed to
exist in a possibly incomplete, possibly inconsistent state,
usually to allow it to be modified in multiple PDUs.  When in
this state, an entry is not fully active.
Entries shall exist in the underCreation(3) state until
the management station is finished configuring the entry
and sets this object to valid(1) or aborts, setting this
object to invalid(4).  If the agent determines that an
entry has been in the underCreation(3) state for an
abnormally long time, it may decide that the management
station has crashed.  If the agent makes this decision,
it may set this object to invalid(4) to reclaim the
entry.  A prudent agent will understand that the
management station may need to wait for human input
and will allow for that possibility in its
determination of this abnormally long period.

An entry in the valid(1) state is fully configured and
consistent and fully represents the configuration or
operation such a row is intended to represent.  For
example, it could be a statistical function that is
configured and active, or a filter that is available
in the list of filters processed by the packet capture
process.

A manager is restricted to changing the state of an entry in
the following ways:

     To:       valid  createRequest  underCreation  invalid
From:
valid             OK             NO             OK       OK
createRequest    N/A            N/A            N/A      N/A
underCreation     OK             NO             OK       OK
invalid           NO             NO             NO       OK
nonExistent       NO             OK             NO       OK

In the table above, it is not applicable to move the state
from the createRequest state to any other state because the
manager will never find the variable in that state.  The
nonExistent state is not a value of the enumeration, rather
it means that the entryStatus variable does not exist at all.
An agent may allow an entryStatus variable to change state in
additional ways, so long as the semantics of the states are
followed.  This allowance is made to ease the implementation of
the agent and is made despite the fact that managers should
never exercise these additional state transitions.



 TOC 

115.  ROHC-MIB (revision 2004-06-03 00:00)

This MIB module defines a set of basic objects for monitoring and configuring robust header compression. The module covers information about running instances of ROHC (compressors or decompressors) at IP interfaces. Information about compressor contexts and decompressor contexts has different structure for different profiles. Therefore it is not provided by this MIB module, but by individual modules for different profiles. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). The initial version of this MIB module was published in RFC 3816. For full legal notices see the RFC itself or see: http://www.ietf.org/copyrights/ianamib.html



 TOC 

115.1.  RohcChannelIdentifier

A number identifying a channel.
The value of 0 must not be used as identifier
of an existing channel.



 TOC 

115.2.  RohcChannelIdentifierOrZero

A number identifying a channel.
The value of 0 is indicates that
no channel is identified.



 TOC 

115.3.  RohcCompressionRatio

A number indicating a compression ratio over



a set of bytes.  The value is defined as
1000 * bytes(compressed) / bytes(original)
rounded to the next integer value.

Note that compressed sets of bytes can be larger
than the corresponding uncompressed ones.
Therefore, the number can be greater than 1000.



 TOC 

116.  RPKI-ROUTER-MIB (revision 2013-05-01 00:00)

This MIB module contains management objects to support monitoring of the Resource Public Key Infrastructure (RPKI) protocol on routers. Copyright (c) 2013 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 6945; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

116.1.  RpkiRtrConnectionType

The connection type used between a router (as a
client) and a cache server.




The following types have been defined in RFC 6810:
  ssh(1)    - Section 7.1; see also RFC 4252.
  tls(2)    - Section 7.2; see also RFC 5246.
  tcpMD5(3) - Section 7.3; see also RFC 2385.
  tcpAO(4)  - Section 7.4; see also RFC 5925.
  tcp(5)    - Section 7.
  ipsec(6)  - Section 7; see also RFC 4301.
  other(7)  - none of the above.



 TOC 

117.  RSERPOOL-MIB (revision 2009-04-07 00:00)

The MIB module for managing an RSerPool implementation. Copyright (c) 2009 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS 'AS IS' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5525; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

117.1.  RSerPoolENRPServerIdentifierTC

The ID of an ENRP server



 TOC 

117.2.  RSerPoolOperationScopeTC

The ID of an operation scope



 TOC 

117.3.  RSerPoolPoolHandleTC

The pool handle



 TOC 

117.4.  RserpoolPoolElementIdentifierTC

The pool element ID



 TOC 

117.5.  RSerPoolPolicyIdentifierTC

The ID of the pool policy



 TOC 

117.6.  RSerPoolPolicyLoadTC

The load status of a pool element



 TOC 

117.7.  RSerPoolPolicyWeightTC

The weight of a pool element



 TOC 

117.8.  RSerPoolTransportUseTypeTC

The transport use of a pool element



 TOC 

117.9.  RSerPoolOpaqueAddressTC

Opaque address



 TOC 

118.  RSVP-MIB (revision 1995-11-03 05:00)

The MIB module to describe the RSVP Protocol



 TOC 

118.1.  RsvpEncapsulation

This indicates the encapsulation that an  RSVP
Neighbor is perceived to be using.



 TOC 

118.2.  RefreshInterval

The number of milliseconds that  are  expected
to elapse between refreshes of path or reserva-
tion state.  Unrefreshed  Path  or  reservation
state is removed after a small multiple of this
period.



 TOC 

119.  SCSI-MIB (revision 2006-03-30 00:00)

The SCSI MIB Module. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4455; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

119.1.  ScsiLUN

This textual convention represents a SCSI Logical Unit
Number (LUN).  The format of a LUN is documented in Tables
A.2 and A.3 of SAM-2 [SAM2].



 TOC 

119.2.  ScsiIndexValue

An arbitrary integer value, greater than zero, for use
as a unique index value.



 TOC 

119.3.  ScsiPortIndexValueOrZero

This textual convention is an extension of the ScsiIndexValue
convention.  The latter defines a greater than zero value used
to identify an index.  This extension permits the additional
value of zero and is applicable only to indices of SCSI port.
Usage of the zero is object-specific and must therefore be
defined as part of the description of any object that uses
this syntax.  Examples of the usage of zero might include
situations where the index was unknown, or when none or all
indices need to be referenced.



 TOC 

119.4.  ScsiIndexValueOrZero

This textual convention is an extension of the ScsiIndexValue
convention.  The latter defines a greater than zero value used
to identify an index.  This extension permits the additional
value of zero.  Usage of the zero is object-specific and must
therefore be defined as part of the description of any object
that uses this syntax.  Examples of the usage of zero might
include situations where index was unknown, or when none or
all indices need to be referenced.



 TOC 

119.5.  ScsiIdentifier

This textual convention represents a generic SCSI port
identifier.
The format depends on the transport used and is documented
in Tables A.2 and A.3 of SAM-2 [SAM2].



 TOC 

119.6.  ScsiName

This textual convention represents the name of a SCSI
initiator device, a SCSI target device, a SCSI initiator port
or a SCSI target port.
The format depends on the transport used and is documented
in Tables A.4 and A.5 of SAM-2 [SAM2].
Every object defined using this syntax must define whether it
is
a) always used for a port,
b) always used for a device, or
c) the circumstances under which it is used for a port or
device.



 TOC 

119.7.  ScsiLuNameOrZero

This textual convention represents either the name of a SCSI
logical unit or a zero-length string.  Objects defined with
this syntax must specify the meaning of the zero-length
string.
The format of the name of a LU is defined as:
- a zero-length octet string or
- a string of eight bytes.



 TOC 

119.8.  ScsiDeviceOrPort

This type specifies whether a particular configuration is
applicable to a port or to a device.



 TOC 

119.9.  ScsiIdCodeSet

This textual convention specifies the code set for the
identifier contained in an Identification Descriptor returned
in a logical unit's Device Identification Page, and is
formatted as defined in T10 SPC-2 (see REFERENCE) Table 172 -
Code Set



 TOC 

119.10.  ScsiIdAssociation

This textual convention specifies what the identifier is
associated with (e.g., with the addressed physical/logical
device or with a particular port) for the identifier
contained in an Identification Descriptor returned in a
logical unit's Device Identification Page, and is
formatted as defined in T10 SPC-2 (see REFERENCE)
Table 173 - Association.



 TOC 

119.11.  ScsiIdType

This textual convention specifies the type for the identifier
contained in an Identification Descriptor returned in a



logical unit's Device Identification Page, and is formatted
as defined in T10 SPC-2 (see REFERENCE) table 174 - Identifier
Type.



 TOC 

119.12.  ScsiIdValue

This textual convention represents an identifier.  The objects
of type ScsiIdCodeSet, ScsiIdAssociation, ScsiIdType define
together the format.
The format is the same as contained in an Identification
Descriptor returned in a logical unit's Device Identification
Page, and is formatted as defined in T10 SPC-2
(see REFERENCE).



 TOC 

119.13.  ScsiHrSWInstalledIndexOrZero

The index value for a software module's row in the Host
Resources MIBs hrSWInstalledTable.  A zero value indicates
that no row in the hrSWInstalledTable is applicable.



 TOC 

120.  SIP-MIB (revision 1994-03-31 18:18)

The MIB module to describe SMDS interfaces objects.



 TOC 

120.1.  SMDSAddress

The 60-bit SMDS address,
preceded by 4 bits with the following values:
1100 when representing an individual address
1110 when representing a group address.



 TOC 

120.2.  IfIndex

The value of this object identifies the
interface for which this entry contains
management information.  The value of this
object for a particular interface has the same
value as the ifIndex object, defined in RFC
1213, for the same interface.



 TOC 

121.  SIP-TC-MIB (revision 2007-04-20 00:00)

Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) MIB TEXTUAL-CONVENTION module used by other SIP-related MIB Modules. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4780; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

121.1.  SipTCTransportProtocol

This convention is a bit map.  Each bit represents a transport
protocol.  If a bit has value 1, then that selected transport
protocol is in some way dependent on the context of the object
using this convention.  If a bit has value 0, then that
transport protocol is not selected.  Combinations of bits can
be set when multiple transport protocols are selected.

bit 0: a protocol other than those defined here
bit 1: User Datagram Protocol
bit 2: Transmission Control Protocol
bit 3: Stream Control Transmission Protocol
bit 4: Transport Layer Security Protocol over TCP
bit 5: Transport Layer Security Protocol over SCTP



 TOC 

121.2.  SipTCEntityRole

This convention defines the role of a SIP entity.  Examples of
SIP entities are proxies, user agents, redirect servers,
registrars, or combinations of the above.

User Agent (UA): A logical entity that can act as both a user
agent client and user agent server.




User Agent Client (UAC): A logical entity that creates a new
request, and then uses the client transaction state machinery
to send it.  The role of UAC lasts only for the duration of
that transaction.  In other words, if a piece of software
initiates a request, it acts as a UAC for the duration of that
transaction.  If it receives a request later, it assumes the
role of a user agent server for the processing of that
transaction.

User Agent Server (UAS): A logical entity that generates a
response to a SIP request.  The response accepts, rejects,
or redirects the request.  This role lasts only for the
duration of that transaction.  In other words, if a piece of
software responds to a request, it acts as a UAS for the
duration of that transaction.  If it generates a request
later, it assumes the role of a user agent client for the
processing of that transaction.

Proxy, Proxy Server: An intermediary entity that acts as both
a server and a client for the purpose of making requests on
behalf of other clients.  A proxy server primarily plays the
role of routing, which means its job is to ensure that a
request is sent to another entity 'closer' to the targeted
user.  Proxies are also useful for enforcing policy.  A proxy
interprets and, if necessary, rewrites specific parts of a
request message before forwarding it.

Redirect Server: A redirect server is a user agent server that
generates 3xx responses to requests it receives, directing the
client to contact an alternate set of URIs.

Registrar: A registrar is a server that accepts REGISTER
requests and places the information it receives in those
requests into the location service for the domain it handles.



 TOC 

121.3.  SipTCOptionTagHeaders

This convention defines the header fields that use the option



tags per Section 19.2 of RFC 3261.  These tags are used in
Require (Section 20.32), Proxy-Require (Section 20.29),
Supported (Section 20.37), and Unsupported (Section 20.40)
header fields.



 TOC 

121.4.  SipTCMethodName

This TEXTUAL-CONVENTION is a string that uniquely identifies a
SIP method.  The scope of uniqueness is the context of all
defined SIP methods.

Experimental support of extension methods is acceptable and
expected.  Extension methods are those defined in
officially sanctioned by IANA.

To support experimental extension methods, any object using
this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION as syntax MAY return/accept a method
identifier value other than those sanctioned by IANA.  That
system MUST ensure no collisions with officially assigned
method names.



 TOC 

122.  SLAPM-MIB (revision 2000-01-24 00:00)

The Service Level Agreement Performance Monitoring MIB (SLAPM-MIB) provides data collection and monitoring capabilities for Service Level Agreements (SLAs) policy definitions.



 TOC 

122.1.  SlapmNameType (deprecated)

The textual convention for naming entities
within this MIB.  The actual contents of an object
defined using this textual convention should consist
of the distinguished name portion of an name.
This is usually the right-most
portion of the name.  This convention is necessary,
since names within this MIB can be used as index
items and an instance identifier is limited to 128
subidentifiers.

This textual convention has been deprecated.  All of the
tables defined within this MIB that use this textual
convention have been deprecated as well since the method
of using a portion of the name (either of a policy
definition or of a traffic profile) has been replaced
by using an Unsigned32 index.  The new slapmPolicyNameTable
would then map the Unsigned32 index to a real name.



 TOC 

122.2.  SlapmStatus

The textual convention for defining the various
slapmPRMonTable (or old slapmPolicyMonitorTable)
and the slapmSubcomponentTable states for actual policy
rule traffic monitoring.



 TOC 

122.3.  SlapmPolicyRuleName

To facilitate internationalization, this TC
represents information taken from the ISO/IEC IS
10646-1 character set, encoded as an octet string
using the UTF-8 character encoding scheme described
in RFC 2044.   For strings in 7-bit US-ASCII,
there is no impact since the UTF-8 representation
is identical to the US-ASCII encoding.



 TOC 

123.  SMON-MIB (revision 1998-12-16 00:00)

The MIB module for managing remote monitoring device implementations for Switched Networks



 TOC 

123.1.  SmonDataSource

Identifies the source of the data that the associated function
is configured to analyze. This Textual Convention
extends the DataSource Textual Convention defined by RMON 2
to the following data source types:

- ifIndex.<I>
DataSources of this traditional form are called 'port-based',
but only if ifType.<I> is not equal to 'propVirtual(53)'.

- smonVlanDataSource.<V>
A dataSource of this form refers to a 'Packet-based VLAN'
and is called a 'VLAN-based' dataSource. <V> is the VLAN
ID as defined by the IEEE 802.1Q standard [19]. The
value is between 1 and 4094 inclusive, and it represents
an 802.1Q VLAN-ID with global scope within a given
bridged domain, as defined by [19].

- entPhysicalEntry.<N>
A dataSource of this form refers to a physical entity within
the agent (e.g. entPhysicalClass = backplane(4)) and is called
an 'entity-based' dataSource.



 TOC 

124.  SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB (revision 2002-10-14 00:00)

The SNMP Management Architecture MIB Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2002). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3411; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

124.1.  SnmpEngineID

An SNMP engine's administratively-unique identifier.
Objects of this type are for identification, not for
addressing, even though it is possible that an
address may have been used in the generation of
a specific value.



The value for this object may not be all zeros or
all 'ff'H or the empty (zero length) string.

The initial value for this object may be configured
via an operator console entry or via an algorithmic
function.  In the latter case, the following
example algorithm is recommended.

In cases where there are multiple engines on the
same system, the use of this algorithm is NOT
appropriate, as it would result in all of those
engines ending up with the same ID value.

1) The very first bit is used to indicate how the
   rest of the data is composed.

   0 - as defined by enterprise using former methods
       that existed before SNMPv3. See item 2 below.

   1 - as defined by this architecture, see item 3
       below.

   Note that this allows existing uses of the
   engineID (also known as AgentID [RFC1910]) to
   co-exist with any new uses.

2) The snmpEngineID has a length of 12 octets.

   The first four octets are set to the binary
   equivalent of the agent's SNMP management
   private enterprise number as assigned by the
   Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA).
   For example, if Acme Networks has been assigned
   { enterprises 696 }, the first four octets would
   be assigned '000002b8'H.

   The remaining eight octets are determined via
   one or more enterprise-specific methods. Such
   methods must be designed so as to maximize the
   possibility that the value of this object will
   be unique in the agent's administrative domain.
   For example, it may be the IP address of the SNMP
   entity, or the MAC address of one of the
   interfaces, with each address suitably padded
   with random octets.  If multiple methods are
   defined, then it is recommended that the first
   octet indicate the method being used and the
   remaining octets be a function of the method.



3) The length of the octet string varies.

   The first four octets are set to the binary
   equivalent of the agent's SNMP management
   private enterprise number as assigned by the
   Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA).
   For example, if Acme Networks has been assigned
   { enterprises 696 }, the first four octets would
   be assigned '000002b8'H.

   The very first bit is set to 1. For example, the
   above value for Acme Networks now changes to be
   '800002b8'H.

   The fifth octet indicates how the rest (6th and
   following octets) are formatted. The values for
   the fifth octet are:

     0     - reserved, unused.

     1     - IPv4 address (4 octets)
             lowest non-special IP address

     2     - IPv6 address (16 octets)
             lowest non-special IP address

     3     - MAC address (6 octets)
             lowest IEEE MAC address, canonical
             order

     4     - Text, administratively assigned
             Maximum remaining length 27

     5     - Octets, administratively assigned
             Maximum remaining length 27

     6-127 - reserved, unused

   128-255 - as defined by the enterprise
             Maximum remaining length 27



 TOC 

124.2.  SnmpSecurityModel

An identifier that uniquely identifies a
Security Model of the Security Subsystem within
this SNMP Management Architecture.

The values for securityModel are allocated as
follows:

- The zero value does not identify any particular
  security model.

- Values between 1 and 255, inclusive, are reserved
  for standards-track Security Models and are
  managed by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
  (IANA).
- Values greater than 255 are allocated to
  enterprise-specific Security Models.  An
  enterprise-specific securityModel value is defined
  to be:

  enterpriseID * 256 + security model within
  enterprise

  For example, the fourth Security Model defined by
  the enterprise whose enterpriseID is 1 would be
  259.

This scheme for allocation of securityModel
values allows for a maximum of 255 standards-
based Security Models, and for a maximum of
256 Security Models per enterprise.

It is believed that the assignment of new
securityModel values will be rare in practice
because the larger the number of simultaneously
utilized Security Models, the larger the
chance that interoperability will suffer.
Consequently, it is believed that such a range
will be sufficient.  In the unlikely event that
the standards committee finds this number to be
insufficient over time, an enterprise number
can be allocated to obtain an additional 256
possible values.

Note that the most significant bit must be zero;
hence, there are 23 bits allocated for various
organizations to design and define non-standard



securityModels.  This limits the ability to
define new proprietary implementations of Security
Models to the first 8,388,608 enterprises.

It is worthwhile to note that, in its encoded
form, the securityModel value will normally
require only a single byte since, in practice,
the leftmost bits will be zero for most messages
and sign extension is suppressed by the encoding
rules.

As of this writing, there are several values
of securityModel defined for use with SNMP or
reserved for use with supporting MIB objects.
They are as follows:

    0  reserved for 'any'
    1  reserved for SNMPv1
    2  reserved for SNMPv2c
    3  User-Based Security Model (USM)



 TOC 

124.3.  SnmpMessageProcessingModel

An identifier that uniquely identifies a Message
Processing Model of the Message Processing
Subsystem within this SNMP Management Architecture.

The values for messageProcessingModel are
allocated as follows:

- Values between 0 and 255, inclusive, are
  reserved for standards-track Message Processing
  Models and are managed by the Internet Assigned
  Numbers Authority (IANA).

- Values greater than 255 are allocated to
  enterprise-specific Message Processing Models.
  An enterprise messageProcessingModel value is
  defined to be:

  enterpriseID * 256 +
       messageProcessingModel within enterprise

  For example, the fourth Message Processing Model
  defined by the enterprise whose enterpriseID



  is 1 would be 259.

This scheme for allocating messageProcessingModel
values allows for a maximum of 255 standards-
based Message Processing Models, and for a
maximum of 256 Message Processing Models per
enterprise.

It is believed that the assignment of new
messageProcessingModel values will be rare
in practice because the larger the number of
simultaneously utilized Message Processing Models,
the larger the chance that interoperability
will suffer. It is believed that such a range
will be sufficient.  In the unlikely event that
the standards committee finds this number to be
insufficient over time, an enterprise number
can be allocated to obtain an additional 256
possible values.

Note that the most significant bit must be zero;
hence, there are 23 bits allocated for various
organizations to design and define non-standard
messageProcessingModels.  This limits the ability
to define new proprietary implementations of
Message Processing Models to the first 8,388,608
enterprises.

It is worthwhile to note that, in its encoded
form, the messageProcessingModel value will
normally require only a single byte since, in
practice, the leftmost bits will be zero for
most messages and sign extension is suppressed
by the encoding rules.

As of this writing, there are several values of
messageProcessingModel defined for use with SNMP.
They are as follows:

    0  reserved for SNMPv1
    1  reserved for SNMPv2c
    2  reserved for SNMPv2u and SNMPv2*
    3  reserved for SNMPv3



 TOC 

124.4.  SnmpSecurityLevel

A Level of Security at which SNMP messages can be
sent or with which operations are being processed;
in particular, one of:

  noAuthNoPriv - without authentication and
                 without privacy,
  authNoPriv   - with authentication but
                 without privacy,
  authPriv     - with authentication and
                 with privacy.

These three values are ordered such that
noAuthNoPriv is less than authNoPriv and
authNoPriv is less than authPriv.



 TOC 

124.5.  SnmpAdminString

An octet string containing administrative
information, preferably in human-readable form.

To facilitate internationalization, this
information is represented using the ISO/IEC
IS 10646-1 character set, encoded as an octet
string using the UTF-8 transformation format
described in [RFC2279].

Since additional code points are added by
amendments to the 10646 standard from time
to time, implementations must be prepared to
encounter any code point from 0x00000000 to
0x7fffffff.  Byte sequences that do not
correspond to the valid UTF-8 encoding of a
code point or are outside this range are
prohibited.

The use of control codes should be avoided.

When it is necessary to represent a newline,
the control code sequence CR LF should be used.




The use of leading or trailing white space should
be avoided.

For code points not directly supported by user
interface hardware or software, an alternative
means of entry and display, such as hexadecimal,
may be provided.

For information encoded in 7-bit US-ASCII,
the UTF-8 encoding is identical to the
US-ASCII encoding.

UTF-8 may require multiple bytes to represent a
single character / code point; thus the length
of this object in octets may be different from
the number of characters encoded.  Similarly,
size constraints refer to the number of encoded
octets, not the number of characters represented
by an encoding.

Note that when this TC is used for an object that
is used or envisioned to be used as an index, then
a SIZE restriction MUST be specified so that the
number of sub-identifiers for any object instance
does not exceed the limit of 128, as defined by
[RFC3416].

Note that the size of an SnmpAdminString object is
measured in octets, not characters.



 TOC 

125.  SNMP-REPEATER-MIB (revision 1996-09-14 00:00)

Management information for 802.3 repeaters. The following references are used throughout this MIB module: [IEEE 802.3 Std] refers to IEEE 802.3/ISO 8802-3 Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications (1993). [IEEE 802.3 Mgt] refers to IEEE 802.3u-1995, '10 Mb/s & 100 Mb/s Management, Section 30,' Supplement to ANSI/IEEE 802.3. The following terms are used throughout this MIB module. For complete formal definitions, the IEEE 802.3 standards should be consulted wherever possible: System - A managed entity compliant with this MIB, and incorporating at least one managed 802.3 repeater. Chassis - An enclosure for one managed repeater, part of a managed repeater, or several managed repeaters. It typically contains an integral power supply and a variable number of available module slots. Repeater-unit - The portion of the repeater set that is inboard of the physical media interfaces. The physical media interfaces (MAUs, AUIs) may be physically separated from the repeater-unit, or they may be integrated into the same physical package. Trivial repeater-unit - An isolated port that can gather statistics. Group - A recommended, but optional, entity defined by the IEEE 802.3 management standard, in order to support a modular numbering scheme. The classical example allows an implementor to represent field-replaceable units as groups of ports, with the port numbering matching the modular hardware implementation. System interconnect segment - An internal segment allowing interconnection of ports belonging to different physical entities into the same logical manageable repeater. Examples of implementation might be backplane busses in modular hubs, or chaining cables in stacks of hubs. Stack - A scalable system that may include managed repeaters, in which modularity is achieved by interconnecting a number of different chassis. Module - A building block in a modular chassis. It typically maps into one 'slot'; however, the range of configurations may be very large, with several modules entering one slot, or one module covering several slots.



 TOC 

125.1.  OptMacAddr

Either a 6 octet address in the `canonical'
order defined by IEEE 802.1a, i.e., as if it
were transmitted least significant bit first
if a value is available or a zero length string.



 TOC 

126.  SNMP-SSH-TM-MIB (revision 2009-06-09 00:00)

The Secure Shell Transport Model MIB. Copyright (c) 2009 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS 'AS IS' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5592; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

126.1.  SnmpSSHAddress

Represents either a hostname or IP address, along with a port
number and an optional user name.

The beginning of the address specification may contain a
user name followed by an '@' (US-ASCII character 0x40).  This
portion of the address will indicate the user name that should
be used when authenticating to an SSH server.  The user name
must be encoded in UTF-8 (per [RFC4252]).  If missing, the
SNMP securityName should be used.  After the optional user
name field and '@' character comes the hostname or IP
address.

The hostname is always in US-ASCII (as per RFC1033);
internationalized hostnames are encoded in US-ASCII as
specified in RFC 3490.  The hostname is followed by a colon
':' (US-ASCII character 0x3A) and a decimal port number in
US-ASCII.  The name SHOULD be fully qualified whenever
possible.

An IPv4 address must be in dotted decimal format followed
by a colon ':' (US-ASCII character 0x3A) and a decimal port
number in US-ASCII.

An IPv6 address must be in colon-separated format, surrounded
by square brackets ('[', US-ASCII character 0x5B, and ']',
US-ASCII character 0x5D), followed by a colon ':' (US-ASCII
character 0x3A) and a decimal port number in US-ASCII.

Values of this Textual Convention might not be directly usable
as transport-layer addressing information and may require
runtime resolution.  As such, applications that write them
must be prepared for handling errors if such values are
not supported or cannot be resolved (if resolution occurs
at the time of the management operation).

The DESCRIPTION clause of TransportAddress objects that may
have snmpSSHAddress values must fully describe how (and
when) such names are to be resolved to IP addresses and vice
versa.

This Textual Convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in
object definitions since it restricts addresses to a
specific format.  However, if it is used, it MAY be used
either on its own or in conjunction with
TransportAddressType or TransportDomain as a pair.





When this Textual Convention is used as a syntax of an
index object, there may be issues with the limit of 128
sub-identifiers, which is specified in SMIv2 (STD 58).  It
is RECOMMENDED that all MIB documents using this Textual
Convention make explicit any limitations on index
component lengths that management software must observe.
This may be done either by including SIZE constraints on
the index components or by specifying applicable
constraints in the conceptual row DESCRIPTION clause or
in the surrounding documentation.



 TOC 

127.  SNMP-TARGET-MIB (revision 2002-10-14 00:00)

This MIB module defines MIB objects which provide mechanisms to remotely configure the parameters used by an SNMP entity for the generation of SNMP messages. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2002). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3413; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

127.1.  SnmpTagValue

An octet string containing a tag value.
Tag values are preferably in human-readable form.

To facilitate internationalization, this information
is represented using the ISO/IEC IS 10646-1 character
set, encoded as an octet string using the UTF-8
character encoding scheme described in RFC 2279.

Since additional code points are added by amendments
to the 10646 standard from time to time,
implementations must be prepared to encounter any code
point from 0x00000000 to 0x7fffffff.

The use of control codes should be avoided, and certain



control codes are not allowed as described below.

For code points not directly supported by user
interface hardware or software, an alternative means
of entry and display, such as hexadecimal, may be
provided.

For information encoded in 7-bit US-ASCII, the UTF-8
representation is identical to the US-ASCII encoding.

Note that when this TC is used for an object that
is used or envisioned to be used as an index, then a
SIZE restriction must be specified so that the number
of sub-identifiers for any object instance does not
exceed the limit of 128, as defined by [RFC1905].

An object of this type contains a single tag value
which is used to select a set of entries in a table.

A tag value is an arbitrary string of octets, but
may not contain a delimiter character.  Delimiter
characters are defined to be one of the following:

    -  An ASCII space character (0x20).

    -  An ASCII TAB character (0x09).

    -  An ASCII carriage return (CR) character (0x0D).

    -  An ASCII line feed (LF) character (0x0A).

Delimiter characters are used to separate tag values
in a tag list.  An object of this type may only
contain a single tag value, and so delimiter
characters are not allowed in a value of this type.

Note that a tag value of 0 length means that no tag is
defined.  In other words, a tag value of 0 length would
never match anything in a tag list, and would never
select any table entries.

Some examples of valid tag values are:

    - 'acme'

    - 'router'

    - 'host'



The use of a tag value to select table entries is
application and MIB specific.



 TOC 

127.2.  SnmpTagList

An octet string containing a list of tag values.
Tag values are preferably in human-readable form.

To facilitate internationalization, this information
is represented using the ISO/IEC IS 10646-1 character
set, encoded as an octet string using the UTF-8
character encoding scheme described in RFC 2279.

Since additional code points are added by amendments
to the 10646 standard from time to time,
implementations must be prepared to encounter any code
point from 0x00000000 to 0x7fffffff.

The use of control codes should be avoided, except as
described below.

For code points not directly supported by user
interface hardware or software, an alternative means
of entry and display, such as hexadecimal, may be
provided.

For information encoded in 7-bit US-ASCII, the UTF-8
representation is identical to the US-ASCII encoding.

An object of this type contains a list of tag values
which are used to select a set of entries in a table.

A tag value is an arbitrary string of octets, but
may not contain a delimiter character.  Delimiter
characters are defined to be one of the following:

    -  An ASCII space character (0x20).

    -  An ASCII TAB character (0x09).

    -  An ASCII carriage return (CR) character (0x0D).

    -  An ASCII line feed (LF) character (0x0A).

Delimiter characters are used to separate tag values



in a tag list.  Only a single delimiter character may
occur between two tag values.  A tag value may not
have a zero length.  These constraints imply certain
restrictions on the contents of this object:

    - There cannot be a leading or trailing delimiter
      character.

    - There cannot be multiple adjacent delimiter
      characters.

Some examples of valid tag lists are:

    - ''                        -- an empty list

    - 'acme'                    -- list of one tag

    - 'host router bridge'      -- list of several tags

Note that although a tag value may not have a length of
zero, an empty string is still valid.  This indicates
an empty list (i.e. there are no tag values in the list).

The use of the tag list to select table entries is
application and MIB specific.  Typically, an application
will provide one or more tag values, and any entry
which contains some combination of these tag values
will be selected.



 TOC 

128.  SNMP-TLS-TM-MIB (revision 2010-05-07 00:00)

The TLS Transport Model MIB Copyright (c) 2010 IETF Trust and the persons identified as the document authors. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info).



 TOC 

128.1.  SnmpTLSAddress

Represents an IPv4 address, an IPv6 address, or a
US-ASCII-encoded hostname and port number.

An IPv4 address must be in dotted decimal format followed by a
colon ':' (US-ASCII character 0x3A) and a decimal port number
in US-ASCII.

An IPv6 address must be a colon-separated format (as described
in RFC 5952), surrounded by square brackets ('[', US-ASCII
character 0x5B, and ']', US-ASCII character 0x5D), followed by
a colon ':' (US-ASCII character 0x3A) and a decimal port number
in US-ASCII.

A hostname is always in US-ASCII (as per [RFC1033]);
internationalized hostnames are encoded in US-ASCII as domain
names after transformation via the ToASCII operation specified
in [RFC3490].  The ToASCII operation MUST be performed with the
UseSTD3ASCIIRules flag set.  The hostname is followed by a
colon ':' (US-ASCII character 0x3A) and a decimal port number
in US-ASCII.  The name SHOULD be fully qualified whenever
possible.

Values of this textual convention may not be directly usable
as transport-layer addressing information, and may require
run-time resolution.  As such, applications that write them
must be prepared for handling errors if such values are not
supported, or cannot be resolved (if resolution occurs at the
time of the management operation).

The DESCRIPTION clause of TransportAddress objects that may
have SnmpTLSAddress values must fully describe how (and
when) such names are to be resolved to IP addresses and vice
versa.

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions since it restricts addresses to a specific
format.  However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its
own or in conjunction with TransportAddressType or
TransportDomain as a pair.

When this textual convention is used as a syntax of an index
object, there may be issues with the limit of 128
sub-identifiers specified in SMIv2 (STD 58).  It is RECOMMENDED
that all MIB documents using this textual convention make



explicit any limitations on index component lengths that
management software must observe.  This may be done either by
including SIZE constraints on the index components or by
specifying applicable constraints in the conceptual row
DESCRIPTION clause or in the surrounding documentation.



 TOC 

128.2.  SnmpTLSFingerprint

A fingerprint value that can be used to uniquely reference
other data of potentially arbitrary length.

An SnmpTLSFingerprint value is composed of a 1-octet hashing
algorithm identifier followed by the fingerprint value.  The
octet value encoded is taken from the IANA TLS HashAlgorithm
Registry (RFC 5246).  The remaining octets are filled using the
results of the hashing algorithm.

This TEXTUAL-CONVENTION allows for a zero-length (blank)
SnmpTLSFingerprint value for use in tables where the
fingerprint value may be optional.  MIB definitions or
implementations may refuse to accept a zero-length value as
appropriate.



 TOC 

129.  SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB (revision 2002-10-16 00:00)

The management information definitions for the SNMP User-based Security Model. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2002). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3414; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

129.1.  KeyChange

Every definition of an object with this syntax must identify
a protocol P, a secret key K, and a hash algorithm H
that produces output of L octets.

The object's value is a manager-generated, partially-random
value which, when modified, causes the value of the secret
key K, to be modified via a one-way function.

The value of an instance of this object is the concatenation
of two components: first a 'random' component and then a
'delta' component.

The lengths of the random and delta components
are given by the corresponding value of the protocol P;
if P requires K to be a fixed length, the length of both the
random and delta components is that fixed length; if P
allows the length of K to be variable up to a particular
maximum length, the length of the random component is that
maximum length and the length of the delta component is any
length less than or equal to that maximum length.
For example, usmHMACMD5AuthProtocol requires K to be a fixed
length of 16 octets and L - of 16 octets.
usmHMACSHAAuthProtocol requires K to be a fixed length of
20 octets and L - of 20 octets. Other protocols may define
other sizes, as deemed appropriate.



When a requester wants to change the old key K to a new
key keyNew on a remote entity, the 'random' component is
obtained from either a true random generator, or from a
pseudorandom generator, and the 'delta' component is
computed as follows:

 - a temporary variable is initialized to the existing value
   of K;
 - if the length of the keyNew is greater than L octets,
   then:
    - the random component is appended to the value of the
      temporary variable, and the result is input to the
      the hash algorithm H to produce a digest value, and
      the temporary variable is set to this digest value;
    - the value of the temporary variable is XOR-ed with
      the first (next) L-octets (16 octets in case of MD5)
      of the keyNew to produce the first (next) L-octets
      (16 octets in case of MD5) of the 'delta' component.
    - the above two steps are repeated until the unused
      portion of the keyNew component is L octets or less,
 - the random component is appended to the value of the
   temporary variable, and the result is input to the
   hash algorithm H to produce a digest value;
 - this digest value, truncated if necessary to be the same
   length as the unused portion of the keyNew, is XOR-ed
   with the unused portion of the keyNew to produce the
   (final portion of the) 'delta' component.

 For example, using MD5 as the hash algorithm H:

    iterations = (lenOfDelta - 1)/16; /* integer division */
    temp = keyOld;
    for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) {
        temp = MD5 (temp || random);
        delta[i*16 .. (i*16)+15] =
               temp XOR keyNew[i*16 .. (i*16)+15];
    }
    temp = MD5 (temp || random);
    delta[i*16 .. lenOfDelta-1] =
           temp XOR keyNew[i*16 .. lenOfDelta-1];

The 'random' and 'delta' components are then concatenated as
described above, and the resulting octet string is sent to
the recipient as the new value of an instance of this object.

At the receiver side, when an instance of this object is set
to a new value, then a new value of K is computed as follows:




 - a temporary variable is initialized to the existing value
   of K;
 - if the length of the delta component is greater than L
   octets, then:
    - the random component is appended to the value of the
      temporary variable, and the result is input to the
      hash algorithm H to produce a digest value, and the
      temporary variable is set to this digest value;
    - the value of the temporary variable is XOR-ed with
      the first (next) L-octets (16 octets in case of MD5)
      of the delta component to produce the first (next)
      L-octets (16 octets in case of MD5) of the new value
      of K.
    - the above two steps are repeated until the unused
      portion of the delta component is L octets or less,
 - the random component is appended to the value of the
   temporary variable, and the result is input to the
   hash algorithm H to produce a digest value;
 - this digest value, truncated if necessary to be the same
   length as the unused portion of the delta component, is
   XOR-ed with the unused portion of the delta component to
   produce the (final portion of the) new value of K.

 For example, using MD5 as the hash algorithm H:

    iterations = (lenOfDelta - 1)/16; /* integer division */
    temp = keyOld;
    for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) {
        temp = MD5 (temp || random);
        keyNew[i*16 .. (i*16)+15] =
               temp XOR delta[i*16 .. (i*16)+15];
    }
    temp = MD5 (temp || random);
    keyNew[i*16 .. lenOfDelta-1] =
           temp XOR delta[i*16 .. lenOfDelta-1];

The value of an object with this syntax, whenever it is
retrieved by the management protocol, is always the zero
length string.

Note that the keyOld and keyNew are the localized keys.

Note that it is probably wise that when an SNMP entity sends
a SetRequest to change a key, that it keeps a copy of the old
key until it has confirmed that the key change actually
succeeded.



 TOC 

130.  SNMP-USM-DH-OBJECTS-MIB (revision 2000-03-06 00:00)

The management information definitions for providing forward secrecy for key changes for the usmUserTable, and for providing a method for 'kickstarting' access to the agent via a Diffie-Helman key agreement.



 TOC 

130.1.  DHKeyChange

Upon initialization, or upon creation of a row containing an
object of this type, and after any successful SET of this value, a
GET of this value returns 'y' where y = g^xa MOD p, and where g is
the base from usmDHParameters, p is the prime from
usmDHParameters, and xa is a new random integer selected by the
agent in the interval 2^(l-1) <= xa < 2^l < p-1.  'l' is the
optional privateValueLength from usmDHParameters in bits.  If 'l'
is omitted, then xa (and xr below) is selected in the interval 0
<= xa < p-1.  y is expressed as an OCTET STRING 'PV' of length 'k'
which satisfies

          k
    y =  SUM   2^(8(k-i)) PV'i
         i=1

    where PV1,...,PVk are the octets of PV from first to last, and
    where PV1 <> 0.

A successful SET consists of the value 'y' expressed as an OCTET
STRING as above concatenated with the value 'z'(expressed as an
OCTET STRING in the same manner as y) where z = g^xr MOD p, where
g, p and l are as above, and where xr is a new random integer
selected by the manager in the interval 2^(l-1) <= xr < 2^l <
p-1. A SET to an object of this type will fail with the error
wrongValue if the current 'y' does not match the 'y' portion of
the value of the varbind for the object. (E.g. GET yout, SET
concat(yin, z), yout <> yin).

Note that the private values xa and xr are never transmitted from
manager to device or vice versa, only the values y and z.
Obviously, these values must be retained until a successful SET on
the associated object.

The shared secret 'sk' is calculated at the agent as sk = z^xa MOD
p, and at the manager as sk = y^xr MOD p.

Each object definition of this type MUST describe how to map from
the shared secret 'sk' to the operational key value used by the
protocols and operations related to the object.  In general, if n
bits of key are required, the author suggests using the n
right-most bits of the shared secret as the operational key value.



 TOC 

131.  SNMPv2-TC



 TOC 

131.1.  DisplayString

Represents textual information taken from the NVT ASCII
character set, as defined in pages 4, 10-11 of RFC 854.

To summarize RFC 854, the NVT ASCII repertoire specifies:

  - the use of character codes 0-127 (decimal)

  - the graphics characters (32-126) are interpreted as
    US ASCII

  - NUL, LF, CR, BEL, BS, HT, VT and FF have the special
    meanings specified in RFC 854

  - the other 25 codes have no standard interpretation

  - the sequence 'CR LF' means newline

  - the sequence 'CR NUL' means carriage-return

  - an 'LF' not preceded by a 'CR' means moving to the
    same column on the next line.

  - the sequence 'CR x' for any x other than LF or NUL is
    illegal.  (Note that this also means that a string may
    end with either 'CR LF' or 'CR NUL', but not with CR.)

Any object defined using this syntax may not exceed 255
characters in length.



 TOC 

131.2.  PhysAddress

Represents media- or physical-level addresses.



 TOC 

131.3.  MacAddress

Represents an 802 MAC address represented in the
`canonical' order defined by IEEE 802.1a, i.e., as if it
were transmitted least significant bit first, even though
802.5 (in contrast to other 802.x protocols) requires MAC
addresses to be transmitted most significant bit first.



 TOC 

131.4.  TruthValue

Represents a boolean value.



 TOC 

131.5.  TestAndIncr

Represents integer-valued information used for atomic
operations.  When the management protocol is used to specify
that an object instance having this syntax is to be
modified, the new value supplied via the management protocol
must precisely match the value presently held by the
instance.  If not, the management protocol set operation
fails with an error of `inconsistentValue'.  Otherwise, if
the current value is the maximum value of 2^31-1 (2147483647
decimal), then the value held by the instance is wrapped to
zero; otherwise, the value held by the instance is
incremented by one.  (Note that regardless of whether the
management protocol set operation succeeds, the variable-
binding in the request and response PDUs are identical.)

The value of the ACCESS clause for objects having this
syntax is either `read-write' or `read-create'.  When an
instance of a columnar object having this syntax is created,
any value may be supplied via the management protocol.

When the network management portion of the system is re-
initialized, the value of every object instance having this
syntax must either be incremented from its value prior to
the re-initialization, or (if the value prior to the re-
initialization is unknown) be set to a pseudo-randomly
generated value.



 TOC 

131.6.  AutonomousType

Represents an independently extensible type identification
value.  It may, for example, indicate a particular sub-tree
with further MIB definitions, or define a particular type of
protocol or hardware.



 TOC 

131.7.  InstancePointer (obsolete)

A pointer to either a specific instance of a MIB object or
a conceptual row of a MIB table in the managed device.  In
the latter case, by convention, it is the name of the
particular instance of the first accessible columnar object
in the conceptual row.

The two uses of this textual convention are replaced by
VariablePointer and RowPointer, respectively.



 TOC 

131.8.  VariablePointer

A pointer to a specific object instance.  For example,
sysContact.0 or ifInOctets.3.



 TOC 

131.9.  RowPointer

Represents a pointer to a conceptual row.  The value is the
name of the instance of the first accessible columnar object
in the conceptual row.

For example, ifIndex.3 would point to the 3rd row in the
ifTable (note that if ifIndex were not-accessible, then
ifDescr.3 would be used instead).



 TOC 

131.10.  RowStatus

The RowStatus textual convention is used to manage the
creation and deletion of conceptual rows, and is used as the
value of the SYNTAX clause for the status column of a
conceptual row (as described in Section 7.7.1 of [2].)
The status column has six defined values:

     - `active', which indicates that the conceptual row is
     available for use by the managed device;

     - `notInService', which indicates that the conceptual
     row exists in the agent, but is unavailable for use by
     the managed device (see NOTE below); 'notInService' has
     no implication regarding the internal consistency of
     the row, availability of resources, or consistency with
     the current state of the managed device;

     - `notReady', which indicates that the conceptual row
     exists in the agent, but is missing information
     necessary in order to be available for use by the
     managed device (i.e., one or more required columns in
     the conceptual row have not been instanciated);

     - `createAndGo', which is supplied by a management
     station wishing to create a new instance of a
     conceptual row and to have its status automatically set
     to active, making it available for use by the managed
     device;

     - `createAndWait', which is supplied by a management
     station wishing to create a new instance of a
     conceptual row (but not make it available for use by
     the managed device); and,

     - `destroy', which is supplied by a management station
     wishing to delete all of the instances associated with
     an existing conceptual row.

Whereas five of the six values (all except `notReady') may
be specified in a management protocol set operation, only
three values will be returned in response to a management
protocol retrieval operation:  `notReady', `notInService' or
`active'.  That is, when queried, an existing conceptual row
has only three states:  it is either available for use by
the managed device (the status column has value `active');
it is not available for use by the managed device, though
the agent has sufficient information to attempt to make it
so (the status column has value `notInService'); or, it is
not available for use by the managed device, and an attempt
to make it so would fail because the agent has insufficient
information (the state column has value `notReady').

                         NOTE WELL

     This textual convention may be used for a MIB table,
     irrespective of whether the values of that table's
     conceptual rows are able to be modified while it is
     active, or whether its conceptual rows must be taken
     out of service in order to be modified.  That is, it is
     the responsibility of the DESCRIPTION clause of the
     status column to specify whether the status column must
     not be `active' in order for the value of some other
     column of the same conceptual row to be modified.  If
     such a specification is made, affected columns may be
     changed by an SNMP set PDU if the RowStatus would not
     be equal to `active' either immediately before or after
     processing the PDU.  In other words, if the PDU also
     contained a varbind that would change the RowStatus
     value, the column in question may be changed if the
     RowStatus was not equal to `active' as the PDU was
     received, or if the varbind sets the status to a value
     other than 'active'.


Also note that whenever any elements of a row exist, the
RowStatus column must also exist.

To summarize the effect of having a conceptual row with a
status column having a SYNTAX clause value of RowStatus,
consider the following state diagram:


                             STATE
  +--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------
  |      A       |     B     |      C      |      D
  |              |status col.|status column|
  |status column |    is     |      is     |status column
ACTION    |does not exist|  notReady | notInService|  is active
--------------+--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------
set status    |noError    ->D|inconsist- |inconsistent-|inconsistent-
column to     |       or     |   entValue|        Value|        Value
createAndGo   |inconsistent- |           |             |
  |         Value|           |             |
--------------+--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------
set status    |noError  see 1|inconsist- |inconsistent-|inconsistent-
column to     |       or     |   entValue|        Value|        Value
createAndWait |wrongValue    |           |             |
--------------+--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------
set status    |inconsistent- |inconsist- |noError      |noError
column to     |         Value|   entValue|             |
active        |              |           |             |
  |              |     or    |             |
  |              |           |             |
  |              |see 2   ->D|see 8     ->D|          ->D
--------------+--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------
set status    |inconsistent- |inconsist- |noError      |noError   ->C
column to     |         Value|   entValue|             |
notInService  |              |           |             |
  |              |     or    |             |      or
  |              |           |             |
  |              |see 3   ->C|          ->C|see 6
--------------+--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------
set status    |noError       |noError    |noError      |noError   ->A
column to     |              |           |             |      or
destroy       |           ->A|        ->A|          ->A|see 7
--------------+--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------
set any other |see 4         |noError    |noError      |see 5
column to some|              |           |             |
value         |              |      see 1|          ->C|          ->D
--------------+--------------+-----------+-------------+-------------

(1) goto B or C, depending on information available to the
agent.

(2) if other variable bindings included in the same PDU,
provide values for all columns which are missing but
required, and all columns have acceptable values, then
return noError and goto D.

(3) if other variable bindings included in the same PDU,
provide legal values for all columns which are missing but
required, then return noError and goto C.

(4) at the discretion of the agent, the return value may be
either:

     inconsistentName:  because the agent does not choose to
     create such an instance when the corresponding
     RowStatus instance does not exist, or

     inconsistentValue:  if the supplied value is
     inconsistent with the state of some other MIB object's
     value, or

     noError: because the agent chooses to create the
     instance.

If noError is returned, then the instance of the status
column must also be created, and the new state is B or C,
depending on the information available to the agent.  If
inconsistentName or inconsistentValue is returned, the row
remains in state A.

(5) depending on the MIB definition for the column/table,
either noError or inconsistentValue may be returned.

(6) the return value can indicate one of the following
errors:

     wrongValue: because the agent does not support
     notInService (e.g., an agent which does not support
     createAndWait), or

     inconsistentValue: because the agent is unable to take
     the row out of service at this time, perhaps because it
     is in use and cannot be de-activated.

(7) the return value can indicate the following error:

     inconsistentValue: because the agent is unable to
     remove the row at this time, perhaps because it is in
     use and cannot be de-activated.

(8) the transition to D can fail, e.g., if the values of the
conceptual row are inconsistent, then the error code would
be inconsistentValue.

NOTE: Other processing of (this and other varbinds of) the
set request may result in a response other than noError
being returned, e.g., wrongValue, noCreation, etc.


                  Conceptual Row Creation

There are four potential interactions when creating a
conceptual row:  selecting an instance-identifier which is
not in use; creating the conceptual row; initializing any
objects for which the agent does not supply a default; and,
making the conceptual row available for use by the managed
device.

Interaction 1: Selecting an Instance-Identifier

The algorithm used to select an instance-identifier varies
for each conceptual row.  In some cases, the instance-
identifier is semantically significant, e.g., the
destination address of a route, and a management station
selects the instance-identifier according to the semantics.

In other cases, the instance-identifier is used solely to
distinguish conceptual rows, and a management station
without specific knowledge of the conceptual row might
examine the instances present in order to determine an
unused instance-identifier.  (This approach may be used, but
it is often highly sub-optimal; however, it is also a
questionable practice for a naive management station to
attempt conceptual row creation.)

Alternately, the MIB module which defines the conceptual row
might provide one or more objects which provide assistance
in determining an unused instance-identifier.  For example,
if the conceptual row is indexed by an integer-value, then
an object having an integer-valued SYNTAX clause might be
defined for such a purpose, allowing a management station to
issue a management protocol retrieval operation.  In order
to avoid unnecessary collisions between competing management
stations, `adjacent' retrievals of this object should be
different.

Finally, the management station could select a pseudo-random
number to use as the index.  In the event that this index
was already in use and an inconsistentValue was returned in
response to the management protocol set operation, the
management station should simply select a new pseudo-random
number and retry the operation.

A MIB designer should choose between the two latter
algorithms based on the size of the table (and therefore the
efficiency of each algorithm).  For tables in which a large
number of entries are expected, it is recommended that a MIB
object be defined that returns an acceptable index for
creation.  For tables with small numbers of entries, it is
recommended that the latter pseudo-random index mechanism be
used.

Interaction 2: Creating the Conceptual Row

Once an unused instance-identifier has been selected, the
management station determines if it wishes to create and
activate the conceptual row in one transaction or in a
negotiated set of interactions.

Interaction 2a: Creating and Activating the Conceptual Row

The management station must first determine the column
requirements, i.e., it must determine those columns for
which it must or must not provide values.  Depending on the
complexity of the table and the management station's
knowledge of the agent's capabilities, this determination
can be made locally by the management station.  Alternately,
the management station issues a management protocol get
operation to examine all columns in the conceptual row that
it wishes to create.  In response, for each column, there
are three possible outcomes:

     - a value is returned, indicating that some other
     management station has already created this conceptual
     row.  We return to interaction 1.

     - the exception `noSuchInstance' is returned,
     indicating that the agent implements the object-type
     associated with this column, and that this column in at
     least one conceptual row would be accessible in the MIB
     view used by the retrieval were it to exist. For those
     columns to which the agent provides read-create access,
     the `noSuchInstance' exception tells the management
     station that it should supply a value for this column
     when the conceptual row is to be created.

     - the exception `noSuchObject' is returned, indicating
     that the agent does not implement the object-type
     associated with this column or that there is no
     conceptual row for which this column would be
     accessible in the MIB view used by the retrieval.  As
     such, the management station can not issue any
     management protocol set operations to create an
     instance of this column.

Once the column requirements have been determined, a
management protocol set operation is accordingly issued.
This operation also sets the new instance of the status
column to `createAndGo'.

When the agent processes the set operation, it verifies that
it has sufficient information to make the conceptual row
available for use by the managed device.  The information
available to the agent is provided by two sources:  the
management protocol set operation which creates the
conceptual row, and, implementation-specific defaults
supplied by the agent (note that an agent must provide
implementation-specific defaults for at least those objects
which it implements as read-only).  If there is sufficient
information available, then the conceptual row is created, a
`noError' response is returned, the status column is set to
`active', and no further interactions are necessary (i.e.,
interactions 3 and 4 are skipped).  If there is insufficient
information, then the conceptual row is not created, and the
set operation fails with an error of `inconsistentValue'.
On this error, the management station can issue a management
protocol retrieval operation to determine if this was
because it failed to specify a value for a required column,
or, because the selected instance of the status column
already existed.  In the latter case, we return to
interaction 1.  In the former case, the management station
can re-issue the set operation with the additional
information, or begin interaction 2 again using
`createAndWait' in order to negotiate creation of the
conceptual row.

                         NOTE WELL

     Regardless of the method used to determine the column
     requirements, it is possible that the management
     station might deem a column necessary when, in fact,
     the agent will not allow that particular columnar
     instance to be created or written.  In this case, the
     management protocol set operation will fail with an
     error such as `noCreation' or `notWritable'.  In this
     case, the management station decides whether it needs
     to be able to set a value for that particular columnar
     instance.  If not, the management station re-issues the
     management protocol set operation, but without setting
     a value for that particular columnar instance;
     otherwise, the management station aborts the row
     creation algorithm.

Interaction 2b: Negotiating the Creation of the Conceptual
Row

The management station issues a management protocol set
operation which sets the desired instance of the status
column to `createAndWait'.  If the agent is unwilling to
process a request of this sort, the set operation fails with
an error of `wrongValue'.  (As a consequence, such an agent
must be prepared to accept a single management protocol set
operation, i.e., interaction 2a above, containing all of the
columns indicated by its column requirements.)  Otherwise,
the conceptual row is created, a `noError' response is
returned, and the status column is immediately set to either
`notInService' or `notReady', depending on whether it has
sufficient information to (attempt to) make the conceptual
row available for use by the managed device.  If there is
sufficient information available, then the status column is
set to `notInService'; otherwise, if there is insufficient
information, then the status column is set to `notReady'.
Regardless, we proceed to interaction 3.

Interaction 3: Initializing non-defaulted Objects

The management station must now determine the column
requirements.  It issues a management protocol get operation
to examine all columns in the created conceptual row.  In
the response, for each column, there are three possible
outcomes:

     - a value is returned, indicating that the agent
     implements the object-type associated with this column
     and had sufficient information to provide a value.  For
     those columns to which the agent provides read-create
     access (and for which the agent allows their values to
     be changed after their creation), a value return tells
     the management station that it may issue additional
     management protocol set operations, if it desires, in
     order to change the value associated with this column.

     - the exception `noSuchInstance' is returned,
     indicating that the agent implements the object-type
     associated with this column, and that this column in at
     least one conceptual row would be accessible in the MIB
     view used by the retrieval were it to exist. However,
     the agent does not have sufficient information to
     provide a value, and until a value is provided, the
     conceptual row may not be made available for use by the
     managed device.  For those columns to which the agent
     provides read-create access, the `noSuchInstance'
     exception tells the management station that it must
     issue additional management protocol set operations, in
     order to provide a value associated with this column.

     - the exception `noSuchObject' is returned, indicating
     that the agent does not implement the object-type
     associated with this column or that there is no
     conceptual row for which this column would be
     accessible in the MIB view used by the retrieval.  As
     such, the management station can not issue any
     management protocol set operations to create an
     instance of this column.

If the value associated with the status column is
`notReady', then the management station must first deal with
all `noSuchInstance' columns, if any.  Having done so, the
value of the status column becomes `notInService', and we
proceed to interaction 4.

Interaction 4: Making the Conceptual Row Available

Once the management station is satisfied with the values
associated with the columns of the conceptual row, it issues
a management protocol set operation to set the status column
to `active'.  If the agent has sufficient information to
make the conceptual row available for use by the managed
device, the management protocol set operation succeeds (a
`noError' response is returned).  Otherwise, the management
protocol set operation fails with an error of
`inconsistentValue'.

                         NOTE WELL

     A conceptual row having a status column with value
     `notInService' or `notReady' is unavailable to the
     managed device.  As such, it is possible for the
     managed device to create its own instances during the
     time between the management protocol set operation
     which sets the status column to `createAndWait' and the
     management protocol set operation which sets the status
     column to `active'.  In this case, when the management
     protocol set operation is issued to set the status
     column to `active', the values held in the agent
     supersede those used by the managed device.

If the management station is prevented from setting the
status column to `active' (e.g., due to management station
or network failure) the conceptual row will be left in the
`notInService' or `notReady' state, consuming resources
indefinitely.  The agent must detect conceptual rows that
have been in either state for an abnormally long period of
time and remove them.  It is the responsibility of the
DESCRIPTION clause of the status column to indicate what an
abnormally long period of time would be.  This period of
time should be long enough to allow for human response time
(including `think time') between the creation of the
conceptual row and the setting of the status to `active'.
In the absence of such information in the DESCRIPTION
clause, it is suggested that this period be approximately 5
minutes in length.  This removal action applies not only to
newly-created rows, but also to previously active rows which
are set to, and left in, the notInService state for a
prolonged period exceeding that which is considered normal
for such a conceptual row.

                 Conceptual Row Suspension

When a conceptual row is `active', the management station
may issue a management protocol set operation which sets the
instance of the status column to `notInService'.  If the
agent is unwilling to do so, the set operation fails with an
error of `wrongValue' or `inconsistentValue'.  Otherwise,
the conceptual row is taken out of service, and a `noError'
response is returned.  It is the responsibility of the
DESCRIPTION clause of the status column to indicate under
what circumstances the status column should be taken out of
service (e.g., in order for the value of some other column
of the same conceptual row to be modified).


                  Conceptual Row Deletion

For deletion of conceptual rows, a management protocol set
operation is issued which sets the instance of the status
column to `destroy'.  This request may be made regardless of
the current value of the status column (e.g., it is possible
to delete conceptual rows which are either `notReady',
`notInService' or `active'.)  If the operation succeeds,
then all instances associated with the conceptual row are
immediately removed.



 TOC 

131.11.  TimeStamp

The value of the sysUpTime object at which a specific
occurrence happened.  The specific occurrence must be
defined in the description of any object defined using this
type.

If sysUpTime is reset to zero as a result of a re-
initialization of the network management (sub)system, then
the values of all TimeStamp objects are also reset.
However, after approximately 497 days without a re-
initialization, the sysUpTime object will reach 2^^32-1 and
then increment around to zero; in this case, existing values
of TimeStamp objects do not change.  This can lead to
ambiguities in the value of TimeStamp objects.



 TOC 

131.12.  TimeInterval

A period of time, measured in units of 0.01 seconds.



 TOC 

131.13.  DateAndTime

A date-time specification.

field  octets  contents                  range
-----  ------  --------                  -----
  1      1-2   year*                     0..65536
  2       3    month                     1..12
  3       4    day                       1..31
  4       5    hour                      0..23
  5       6    minutes                   0..59
  6       7    seconds                   0..60
               (use 60 for leap-second)
  7       8    deci-seconds              0..9
  8       9    direction from UTC        '+' / '-'
  9      10    hours from UTC*           0..13
 10      11    minutes from UTC          0..59

* Notes:
- the value of year is in network-byte order
- daylight saving time in New Zealand is +13

For example, Tuesday May 26, 1992 at 1:30:15 PM EDT would be
displayed as:

                 1992-5-26,13:30:15.0,-4:0

Note that if only local time is known, then timezone
information (fields 8-10) is not present.



 TOC 

131.14.  StorageType

Describes the memory realization of a conceptual row.  A
row which is volatile(2) is lost upon reboot.  A row which
is either nonVolatile(3), permanent(4) or readOnly(5), is
backed up by stable storage.  A row which is permanent(4)
can be changed but not deleted.  A row which is readOnly(5)
cannot be changed nor deleted.

If the value of an object with this syntax is either
permanent(4) or readOnly(5), it cannot be written.
Conversely, if the value is either other(1), volatile(2) or
nonVolatile(3), it cannot be modified to be permanent(4) or
readOnly(5).  (All illegal modifications result in a
'wrongValue' error.)

Every usage of this textual convention is required to
specify the columnar objects which a permanent(4) row must
at a minimum allow to be writable.



 TOC 

131.15.  TDomain

Denotes a kind of transport service.

Some possible values, such as snmpUDPDomain, are defined in
the SNMPv2-TM MIB module.  Other possible values are defined
in other MIB modules.



 TOC 

131.16.  TAddress

Denotes a transport service address.

A TAddress value is always interpreted within the context of a
TDomain value.  Thus, each definition of a TDomain value must
be accompanied by a definition of a textual convention for use
with that TDomain.  Some possible textual conventions, such as
SnmpUDPAddress for snmpUDPDomain, are defined in the SNMPv2-TM
MIB module.  Other possible textual conventions are defined in
other MIB modules.



 TOC 

132.  SNMPv2-TM (revision 2002-10-16 00:00)

The MIB module for SNMP transport mappings. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2002). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3417; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

132.1.  SnmpUDPAddress

Represents a UDP over IPv4 address:

octets   contents        encoding
 1-4     IP-address      network-byte order
 5-6     UDP-port        network-byte order



 TOC 

132.2.  SnmpOSIAddress

Represents an OSI transport-address:

octets   contents           encoding
   1     length of NSAP     'n' as an unsigned-integer
                               (either 0 or from 3 to 20)
2..(n+1) NSAP                concrete binary representation
(n+2)..m TSEL                string of (up to 64) octets



 TOC 

132.3.  SnmpNBPAddress

Represents an NBP name:

octets        contents          encoding
   1          length of object  'n' as an unsigned integer
 2..(n+1)     object            string of (up to 32) octets
  n+2         length of type    'p' as an unsigned integer
(n+3)..(n+2+p)   type              string of (up to 32) octets
 n+3+p        length of zone    'q' as an unsigned integer
(n+4+p)..(n+3+p+q) zone              string of (up to 32) octets

   For comparison purposes, strings are
   case-insensitive. All strings may contain any octet
   other than 255 (hex ff).



 TOC 

132.4.  SnmpIPXAddress

Represents an IPX address:

octets   contents            encoding
 1-4     network-number      network-byte order
 5-10    physical-address    network-byte order
11-12    socket-number       network-byte order



 TOC 

133.  SNMPv2-USEC-MIB (revision 1996-01-12 00:00)

The MIB module for SNMPv2 entities implementing the user- based security model.



 TOC 

133.1.  AgentID

An agent's administratively-unique identifier.

The value for this object may not be all zeros or all 'ff'H.

The initial value for this object may be configured via an
operator console entry or via an algorithmic function.  In


the later case, the following guidelines are recommended:

  1) The first four octets are set to the binary equivalent
     of the agent's SNMP network management private
     enterprise number as assigned by the Internet Assigned
     Numbers Authority (IANA).  For example, if Acme
     Networks has been assigned { enterprises 696 }, the
     first four octets would be assigned '000002b8'H.

  2) The remaining eight octets are the cookie whose
     contents are determined via one or more enterprise-
     specific methods.  Such methods must be designed so as
     to maximize the possibility that the value of this
     object will be unique in the agent's administrative
     domain.  For example, the cookie may be the IP address
     of the agent, or the MAC address of one of the
     interfaces, with each address suitably padded with
     random octets.  If multiple methods are defined, then
     it is recommended that the cookie be further divided
     into one octet that indicates the method being used and
     seven octets which are a function of the method.



 TOC 

134.  SSPM-MIB (revision 2005-07-28 00:00)

This SSPM MIB module is applicable to probes implementing Synthetic Source for Performance Monitoring functions. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4149; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

134.1.  SspmMicroSeconds

A unit of time with resolution of MicroSeconds.



 TOC 

134.2.  SspmClockSource

An indication of the source of the clock as defined by the
NTP specification RFC1305 [RFC1305] definition of stratum:

Stratum (sys.stratum, peer.stratum, pkt.stratum): This is
an integer indicating the stratum of the local clock,
with values defined as follows:

0      unspecified

1      primary reference (e.g., calibrated atomic clock,
       radio clock)

2-255  secondary reference (via NTP).



 TOC 

134.3.  SspmClockMaxSkew

An indication of the accuracy of the clock as defined by
RFC1305.  This variable indicates the maximum offset
error due to skew of the local clock over the
time interval 86400 seconds, in seconds.



 TOC 

135.  SYSAPPL-MIB (revision 1997-10-20 00:00)

The MIB module defines management objects that model applications as collections of executables and files installed and executing on a host system. The MIB presents a system-level view of applications; i.e., objects in this MIB are limited to those attributes that can typically be obtained from the system itself without adding special instrumentation to the applications.



 TOC 

135.1.  RunState

This TC describes the current execution state of
a running application or process.  The possible
values are:
  running(1),
  runnable(2),  - waiting for a resource (CPU, etc.)
  waiting(3),   - waiting for an event
  exiting(4),
  other(5)      - other invalid state



 TOC 

135.2.  LongUtf8String

To facilitate internationalization, this TC
represents information taken from the ISO/IEC IS
10646-1 character set, encoded as an octet string
using the UTF-8 character encoding scheme described
in RFC 2044 [10].  For strings in 7-bit US-ASCII,
there is no impact since the UTF-8 representation
is identical to the US-ASCII encoding.



 TOC 

135.3.  Utf8String

To facilitate internationalization, this TC
represents information taken from the ISO/IEC IS
10646-1 character set, encoded as an octet string
using the UTF-8 character encoding scheme described
in RFC 2044 [10].  For strings in 7-bit US-ASCII,
there is no impact since the UTF-8 representation
is identical to the US-ASCII encoding.



 TOC 

136.  T11-FC-FABRIC-ADDR-MGR-MIB (revision 2006-03-02 00:00)

The MIB module for the Fabric Address management functionality defined by the Fibre Channel standards. For the purposes of this MIB, Fabric Address Manager refers to the functionality of acquiring DomainID(s) as specified in FC-SW-3, and managing Fibre Channel Identifiers as specified in FC-FS. An instance of 'Fabric Address Manager' software functionality executes in the Principal Switch, and in each other switch. After an agent reboot, the values of read-write objects defined in this MIB module are implementation-dependent. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4439; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

136.1.  T11FamDomainPriority

Priority of a switch.

The Principal Switch selection is influenced by the
priority of the switches.

Some values of importance are:

1   : The highest priority in Principal Switch
      selection, which is used by the administrator
      to establish which switch becomes the Principal
      Switch.
255 : Indicates that the switch is not capable of
      acting as a Principal Switch.



 TOC 

136.2.  T11FamDomainInterfaceRole

The 'designated' state/role of the Inter-Switch Link (ISL)
to which an interface connects, or (if not connected)
the state of the interface:

nonPrincipal (1)       - non-Principal ISL
principalUpstream (2)  - Upstream Principal ISL
principalDownsteam (3) - Downstream Principal ISL
isolated (4)           - interface is isolated
down (5)               - interface is down
unknown (6)            - state/role is unknown



 TOC 

136.3.  T11FamState

The state of the Fabric Address Manager, as described in
Table 86 and Figure 15 of FC-SW-3.

- 'other' represents a switch that is in a state not
  represented by any of the below enumerations.

- 'starting' represents a switch engaged in the process
  represented by the first row in Table 86.

- 'unconfigured' represents a switch that requires
  operator input before it can begin the process
  represented by the first row in Table 86.

- 'principalSwitchSelection' represents a switch engaged
  in the process represented by the second row in
  Table 86, but not in states F0 or F1 of Figure 15.

- 'domainIdDistribution' represents a switch engaged in
  the process represented by the third row in Table 86.

- 'buildFabricPhase' represents a switch that is in
  state F0 of Figure 15.

- 'reconfigureFabricPhase' represents a switch that is
  in state F1 of Figure 15.

- 'stable' represents a switch that has successfully
  completed the process represented by the third row in
  Table 86 and has at least one E_Port.

- 'stableWithNoEports' represents a switch that has
  successfully completed the process represented by the
  third row in Table 86 but has no E_Ports.

- 'noDomains' represents a switch that has completed
  the process represented by the third row in Table 86
  but failed to obtain a Domain_ID.

- 'disabled' represents any situation in which the
  corresponding instance of t11FamEnable has the value
  'false'.

- 'unknown' represents a switch that is confused about
  what state it is in.



 TOC 

137.  T11-FC-FABRIC-CONFIG-SERVER-MIB (revision 2007-06-27 00:00)

The MIB module for the management of a Fabric Configuration Server (FCS) in a Fibre Channel (FC) network. An FCS is defined by the FC-GS-5 standard. This MIB provides the capabilities to trigger a discovery of the configuration of one or more Fabrics, to retrieve the results of such a discovery, as well as to control and monitor the operation of an FCS. The discovered configuration contains information about: - Interconnect Elements (IEs), i.e., switches, hubs, bridges, etc., - Ports on IEs, and - Platforms that consist of one or more FC nodes. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4935; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

137.1.  T11FcListIndex

An index that identifies a list of elements.
All elements that belong to the same list have the
same index value.  This syntax is used for objects
which identify a list in the INDEX clause of a table
of elements of that type of list.



 TOC 

137.2.  T11FcListIndexPointerOrZero

Objects with this syntax point to a list of elements
contained in a table, by holding the same value as the
object with syntax T11FcListIndex defined in the table's
INDEX clause, or, zero to indicate an empty list.
Note that such a table could have one row per list, or
it could have one row per element of a list.

The definition of an object with this syntax must
identify the table(s) into which it points.



 TOC 

137.3.  T11FcIeType

The type of Interconnect Element (IE):

unknown(1)  - an unknown IE.
other(2)    - some other type of IE.
switch(3)   - the IE is a switch.
hub(4)      - the IE is a hub.
bridge(5)   - the IE is a bridge.



 TOC 

137.4.  T11FcPortState

The state of a port:

unknown(1)  - unknown state.
other(2)    - some other state.
online(3)   - port is in online state.
offline(4)  - port is in offline state.
testing(5)  - port is in testing state.
fault(6)    - port is faulty.



 TOC 

137.5.  T11FcPortTxType

The technology of the port transceiver:

unknown(1)         - unknown (includes the 'null' type)
other(2)           - some other technology
shortwave850nm(3)  - Short wave laser - SN (850 nm)
longwave1550nm(4)  - Long wave laser - LL (1550 nm)
longwave1310nm(5)  - Long wave laser cost
                     reduced - LC (1310 nm)
electrical(6)      - Electrical - EL.
tenGbaseSr850(7)   - 10GBASE-SR 850nm laser
tenGbaseLr1310(8)  - 10GBASE-LR 1310nm laser
tenGbaseEr1550(9)  - 10GBASE-ER 1550nm laser
tenGbaseLx1300(10) - 10GBASE-LX4 WWDM 1300nm laser
tenGbaseSw850(11)  - 10GBASE-SW 850nm laser
tenGbaseLw1310(12) - 10GBASE-LW 1310nm laser
tenGbaseEw1550(13) - 10GBASE-EW 1550nm laser



 TOC 

137.6.  T11FcsRejectReasonExplanation

The reject reason code explanation:

noAdditionalExplanation(1)
     - no additional explanation.
invNameIdForIEOrPort(2)
     - the format of IE or port name is invalid.
ieListNotAvailable(3)
     - IE list is not available.
ieTypeNotAvailable(4)
     - IE type is not available.
domainIdNotAvailable(5)
     - Domain ID is not available.
mgmtIdNotAvailable(6)
     - mgmt ID is not available.
fabNameNotAvailable(7)
     - Fabric_Name is not available.
ielogNameNotAvailable(8)
     - IE logical name is not available.
mgmtAddrListNotAvailable(9)
     - mgmt address list is not available.
ieInfoListNotAvailable(10)
     - IE info list is not available.
portListNotAvailable(11)
     - port list is not available.
portTypeNotAvailable(12)
     - port type is not available.
phyPortNumNotAvailable(13)
     - physical port number is not available.
attPortNameListNotAvailable(14)
     - attached port name list is not available.
portStateNotAvailable(15)
     - port state is not available.
unableToRegIELogName(16)
     - not able to register IE logical name.
platformNameNoExist(17)
     - platform name does not exist.
platformNameAlreadyExists(18)
     - platform name already exists.
platformNodeNameNoExists(19)
     - platform node name does not exist.
platformNodeNameAlreadyExists(20)
     - platform node name already exists.
resourceUnavailable(21)
     - resource unavailable.
noEntriesInLunMap(22)



     - zero entries in OS LUN Map.
invalidDeviceNameLength(23)
     - invalid OS device name length.
multipleAttributes(24)
     - multiple attributes of same type in
       platform attribute block.
invalidAttribBlockLength(25)
     - invalid platform attribute block length.
attributesMissing(26)
     - required platform attributes not present.



 TOC 

138.  T11-FC-FSPF-MIB (revision 2006-08-14 00:00)

The MIB module for managing the Fabric Shortest Path First (FSPF) protocol. FSPF is specified in FC-SW-4. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4626; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

138.1.  T11FspfLsrType

Type of the Link State Record.

FC-SW-4 defines two types of LSRs and allows for the
possibility for more will be defined in the future:

    01      - Switch Link Record
    02      - Obsolete
    240 - 255 - Vendor Specific
    others  - Reserved.



 TOC 

138.2.  T11FspfLinkType

Type of an the FSPF Link.  Presently defined values:

1           - Point-to-Point
240-255     - Vendor Specific
all others  - Reserved.



 TOC 

138.3.  T11FspfInterfaceState

The state of the FSPF Neighbor Finite State Machine
for the neighbor (switch) on a particular interface.
Possible values are :

     down(1)         - Down
     init(2)         - Init
     dbExchange(3)   - Database Exchange
     dbAckwait(4)    - Database AckWait
     dbWait(5)       - Database Wait
     full(6)         - Full (Connected)



 TOC 

138.4.  T11FspfLastCreationTime

This TC describes an object that stores the last time
it, and the row containing it, was created.

This can be used by management applications to determine
that a row has been deleted and re-created between reads,
causing an otherwise undetectable discontinuity in the
data.



 TOC 

139.  T11-FC-NAME-SERVER-MIB (revision 2006-03-02 00:00)

The MIB module for the management of the functionality, which realizes the FC-GS-4 requirements for Name Server (NS). Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4438; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

139.1.  T11NsGs4RejectReasonCode

The FC-GS-4 reject reason code for a request.

none(1)
    - no error.
invalidCmdCode(2)
    - request contained an invalid command code.
invalidVerLevel(3)
    - request contained an invalid version number.
logicalError(4)
    - there was a logical error.
invalidIUSize(5)
    - the CT_IU (Information Unit) size was invalid.
logicalBusy(6)
    - the module is busy.
protocolError(7)
    - there was a protocol error.
unableToPerformCmdReq(8)
    - the command specified in the req could not be
      executed.  The details of exactly what failed
      will be in the corresponding reason code
      explanation.
cmdNotSupported(9)
    - the command is not supported.
serverNotAvailable(10)
    - the identified server was not available.
couldNotEstabSession(11)
    - a server session could not be established.
vendorError(12)
    - a vendor-specific error.



 TOC 

139.2.  T11NsRejReasonCodeExpl

The reject reason code explanation:

noAdditionalExplanation(1)
    - no additional explanation.
portIdentifierNotRegistered(2)
    - Port Identifier not registered.
portNameNotRegistered(3)
    - Port Name not registered.
nodeNameNotRegistered(4)
    - Node Name not registered.
classOfServiceNotRegistered(5)
    - Class of Service not registered.
nodeIpAddressNotRegistered(6)
    - 'IP Address (Node)' value not registered.
ipaNotRegistered(7)
    - Initial Process Associator (IPA) not registered.
fc4TypeNotRegistered(8)
    - FC-4 TYPEs not registered.
symbolicPortNameNotRegistered(9)
    - Symbolic Port Name not registered.
symbolicNodeNameNotRegistered(10)
    - Symbolic Node Name not registered.
portTypeNotRegistered(11)
    - 'Port Type' not registered.
portIpAddressNotRegistered(12)
    - 'IP Address (Port)' value not registered.
fabricPortNameNotRegistered(13)
    - Fabric Port Name not registered.
hardAddressNotRegistered(14)
    - 'Hard Address' not registered.



fc4DescriptorNotRegistered(15)
    - FC-4 Descriptor not registered.
fc4FeaturesNotRegistered(16)
    - FC-4 Features not registered.
accessDenied(17)
    - Access denied.
unacceptablePortIdentifier(18)
    - Unacceptable Port Identifier.
databaseEmpty(19)
    - Database is empty.
noObjectRegInSpecifiedScope(20)
    - no object has been registered in the specified
      scope.
domainIdNotPresent(21)
    - Domain ID not present.
portIdNotPresent(22)
    - Port number not present.
noDeviceAttached(23)
    - No device attached.
authorizationException(24)
    - Authorization Exception.
authenticationException(25)
    - Authentication Exception.
databaseFull(26)
    - Database full.



 TOC 

140.  T11-FC-ZONE-SERVER-MIB (revision 2007-06-27 00:00)

The MIB module for the management of Fibre Channel Zoning Servers, both for Basic Zoning Management and for Enhanced Zoning Management, as defined in the FC-GS-5 specification. FC-GS-5 defines (in-band) management operations for manipulating the Zone Set Database, some for use in Basic mode (e.g., 'Add Zone Set (AZS)', etc.), and some for use in Enhanced mode (e.g., Create Zone Set (CZS)', etc.). When Enhanced Zoning Management is in use, FC-GS-5 requires that these in-band management operations be rejected unless they are issued within the context of a GS-5 server session. The use of a server session ensures serialized access to the Zoning Database since the Fabric lock for the Zone Server must be obtained as a part of establishing the server session to the Zone Server. Thus, if and when this MIB is used for Enhanced Zoning Management, SNMP SetRequests that request the modification of zoning definitions must be serialized with respect to the GS-5 requests to modify the Zoning Database. This is achieved by requiring that an SNMP management application must first obtain the Fabric lock for the Zone Server before attempting to modify any zoning definitions. The companion T11-FC-FABRIC-LOCK-MIB module is defined as a means of obtaining the Fabric lock for the Zone Server (or any other server). In Enhanced Zoning Management, a Zone Server keeps track of changes requested in the zoning definitions, but does not update its Zone Set Database unless there is (and until there is) a 'commit' operation. To model this behavior, this MIB module assumes that a Zone Server (in Enhanced mode) takes a snapshot of its Zone Set Database as and when the Fabric lock (for the Zone Server application) is obtained; this snapshot is used to create what is herein called the 'copy' database. It is this 'copy' database that is then updated by SNMP SetRequests (while the Fabric is locked). If and when a 'commit' operation is requested (while the Fabric is still locked), the 'copy' database is then used to overwrite the previously committed contents of the Zone Set Database, and the new Zone Set Database is distributed to all other switches in the Fabric. When the lock is released, any changes made that were not 'committed' are discarded. When this MIB is used for Basic Zoning Management, the same set of MIB objects as used for Enhanced mode are used to make changes to the Database of a Zone Server on a particular switch, but the changes take immediate effect at that switch without an explicit commit. The distribution of those changes to Zone Servers on other switches in the Fabric is subsequently requested through the use of a separate set of MIB objects. The management information specified in this MIB module includes the Zoning Database for each of one or more Fibre Channel Fabrics. A Zoning Database is a combination of the Fabric's Zone Set Database and its Active Zone Set. The Active Zone Set is the Zone Set currently enforced by the Fabric; a Zone Set Database is a database of the Zone Sets available to be activated within a Fabric. All the MIB objects representing a Zone Set Database are modifiable at any time (irrespective of the value of any RowStatus object), whereas all objects representing the Active Zone Set are always read-only (except to deactivate it and/or activate a different one). Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4936; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

140.1.  T11ZsZoneMemberType

Represents the addressing mechanism by
which a member is identified:

     01 - N_Port_Name
     02 - Domain_ID and physical port
     03 - N_Port_ID
     04 - Node_Name
     05 - Alias Name
     06 - F_Port_Name
     E0-FF (hex) - Vendor Specific.



 TOC 

140.2.  T11ZsRejectReasonExplanation

The reason code explanation when rejecting a
Zone Server request:

   'other'
       - e.g., a reason code assigned too recently
         to be included in this version of this MIB
   'noAdditionalExplanation'
       - there is no additional explanation
   'zonesNotSupported'
       - Zones are not supported
   'zoneSetNameUnknown'
       - Zone Set name is not known
   'noZoneSetActive'
       - no Zone Set is currently active
   'zoneNameUnknown'
       - Zone name is unknown
   'zoneStateUnknown'
       - state of the Zone is not known
   'incorrectPayloadLen'
       - payload length is not correct
   'tooLargeZoneSet'
       - Zone Set is larger than permitted size
   'deactivateZoneSetFailed'
       - deactivation of Zone Set failed
   'reqNotSupported'
       - request is not supported
   'capabilityNotSupported'
       - capability is not supported
   'zoneMemberIDTypeNotSupp'
       - Zone Member Identifier Type is not supported
   'invalidZoneSetDefinition'
       - Zone Set definition is invalid
   'enhancedZoningCmdsNotSupported'
       - Enhanced Zoning commands are not supported
   'zoneSetExists'
       - Zone Set already exists
   'zoneExists'
       - Zone already exists
   'aliasExists'
       - Zone Alias already exists


   'zoneSetUnknown'
       - Zone Set unknown
   'zoneUnknown'
       - Zone unknown
   'aliasUnknown'
       - Zone Alias unknown
   'zoneAliasTypeUnknown'
       - unknown Zone attribute type
   'unableEnhancedMode'
       - Fabric unable to work in Enhanced Mode
   'basicZoningCmdsNotSupported'
       - Basic Zoning commands are not supported
   'zoneAttribObjectExists'
       - Zone attribute object already exists
   'zoneAttribObjectUnknown'
       - Zone attribute object unknown
   'requestInProcess'
       - request in process
   'cmitInProcess'
       - CMIT in process
   'hardEnforcementFailed'
       - hard enforcement failed
   'unresolvedReferences'
       - unresolved references in the Zone Set Database
   'consistencyChecksFailed'
       - consistency checks failed.



 TOC 

140.3.  T11ZoningName

This datatype is a refinement of an SnmpAdminString,
and is used to represent a name stored in a Fibre
Channel Zoning Data Structure.

The value begins with an ASCII letter (upper or lower
case) followed by zero or more characters from the set:
lower case letters, upper case letters, numbers, and
the symbols ($-^_).

The value does not include fill bytes.



 TOC 

141.  T11-TC-MIB (revision 2006-03-02 00:00)

This module defines textual conventions used in T11 MIBs. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4439; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

141.1.  T11FabricIndex

A Fabric Index that is used as a unique
index value to identify a particular Fabric within
one (or more) physical infrastructures.

In an environment that is conformant to FC-SW-3, where



there is always exactly one Fabric in a single physical
infrastructure, the value of this Fabric Index will
always be 1.

However, the current standard, FC-SW-4, defines
how multiple Fabrics, each with its own management
instrumentation, could operate within one (or more)
physical infrastructures.  When such multiple Fabrics
are in use, this index value is used to uniquely
identify a particular Fabric within a physical
infrastructure.

Note that the value of this textual convention has a
range of (0..4095) so as to be consistent with FC-SW-4,
which says that a 'VF_ID Bitmap' is 512 bytes long, with
the high-order bit representing VF_ID zero, and the
low-order bit representing 4095.



 TOC 

142.  TCP-ESTATS-MIB (revision 2007-05-18 00:00)

Documentation of TCP Extended Performance Instrumentation variables from the Web100 project. [Web100] All of the objects in this MIB MUST have the same persistence properties as the underlying TCP implementation. On a reboot, all zero-based counters MUST be cleared, all dynamically created table rows MUST be deleted, and all read-write objects MUST be restored to their default values. It is assumed that all TCP implementation have some initialization code (if nothing else to set IP addresses) that has the opportunity to adjust tcpEStatsConnTableLatency and other read-write scalars controlling the creation of the various tables, before establishing the first TCP connection. Implementations MAY also choose to make these control scalars persist across reboots. Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2007). This version of this MIB module is a part of RFC 4898; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

142.1.  TcpEStatsNegotiated

Indicates if some optional TCP feature was negotiated.

Enabled(1) indicates that the feature was successfully
negotiated on, which generally requires both hosts to agree
to use the feature.

selfDisabled(2) indicates that the local host refused the
feature because it is not implemented, configured off, or
refused for some other reason, such as the lack of
resources.

peerDisabled(3) indicates that the local host was willing
to negotiate the feature, but the remote host did not
do so.



 TOC 

143.  TED-MIB (revision 2012-12-21 00:00)

This MIB module contains managed object definitions for TED in support of MPLS/GMPLS TE Database. Copyright (c) 2013 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info).



 TOC 

143.1.  TedAreaIdTC

The area identifier of the IGP.  If OSPF is used to advertise
LSA, this represents an ospfArea.  If IS-IS is used, this
represents an area address.



 TOC 

143.2.  TedRouterIdTC

The router identifier.  If OSPF is used to advertise LSA, this
represents a Router ID.  If IS-IS is used, this represents a
System ID.



 TOC 

143.3.  TedLinkIndexTC

The link identifier.  If OSPF is used, this represents an
ospfLsdbID.  If IS-IS is used, this represents an isisLSPID.
If a locally configured link is used, this object represents an
arbitrary value, which is locally defined in a router.



 TOC 

144.  TE-LINK-STD-MIB (revision 2005-10-11 00:00)

Copyright (C) 2005 The Internet Society. This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4220; see the RFC itself for full legal notices. This MIB module contains managed object definitions for MPLS traffic engineering links as defined in 'Link Bundling in MPLS Traffic Engineering (TE)'.



 TOC 

144.1.  TeLinkBandwidth

This type is used to represent link bandwidth in bps.  This
value is represented using a 4 octet IEEE floating point
format [IEEE].  The floating point representation is not
used to represent fractional value but rather to allow
specification of large numbers that cannot be expressed
with 32-bit integers.



 TOC 

144.2.  TeLinkPriority

This type is used to represent a priority.  Each connection
is assigned a priority.  This priority is used when
accounting for bandwidth on TE links or component
links, for resource allocation and for rerouting purposes.
Value 0 is the highest priority.  Value 7 is the lowest
priority.



 TOC 

144.3.  TeLinkProtection

Link protection.



 TOC 

144.4.  TeLinkSwitchingCapability

Switching capability as specified in the 'OSPF Extensions in
Support of Generalized Multi-Protocol Label Switching
(GMPLS)' document.  The values specified in this document
are not contiguous.



 TOC 

144.5.  TeLinkEncodingType

Link encoding type as specified in 'Generalized
Multi-Protocol Label Switching (GMPLS) Signaling
Functional Description' document.  The values
specified in this document are not contiguous.



 TOC 

144.6.  TeLinkSonetSdhIndication

This convention is used to indicate whether the interface
supports Standard or Arbitrary SONET/SDH.  To simplify the
mapping process, the values used in this textual convention
match the values specified in the interface switching
capability specific information field, i.e., 0 for Standard
SONET/SDH and 1 for Arbitrary SONET/SDH.



 TOC 

145.  TIME-AGGREGATE-MIB (revision 2006-04-27 00:00)

The MIB for servicing Time-Based aggregate objects. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2006). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4498; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

145.1.  TAggrMOErrorStatus

This data type is used to model the error status of the
sampled MO instance.  The error status for a sampled MO
instance is given in terms of two elements:
  o The moIndex, which indicates the sample number of the MO
    instance (starting at 1) in the value of the time-
    aggregated MO instance.
  o The moError, which indicates the error that was
    encountered in sampling that MO instance.
The syntax in ASN.1 Notation will be
ErrorStatus :: = SEQUENCE {
   moIndex  Integer32,
   moError  SnmpPduErrorStatus
}
TAggrMOErrorStatus ::= SEQUENCE OF {
   ErrorStatus
}
Note1: The command responder will supply values for all
       the samples of the MO instance.  If an error is
       encountered for a sample, then the corresponding
       value will have an ASN.1 value NULL, and an error
       will be flagged in the corresponding
       TAggrMOErrorStatus object.
       Only MOs for which errors have been encountered will
       the corresponding moIndex and moError values be set.
Note2: The error code for the component MO instances will be
       in accordance with the SnmpPduErrorStatus TC defined
       in the DISMAN-SCHEDULE-MIB[RFC3231].



 TOC 

145.2.  TimeAggrMOValue

This data type is used to model the time-aggregated MOs.  It


will be a sequence of values.  The syntax in ASN.1 Notation
will be
MOSampleValue :: = SEQUENCE {
     value ObjectSyntax
}
TimeAggrMOValue ::= SEQUENCE OF {
     MOSampleValue
}
where the first MOSampleValue, if any, will always be the
timestamp of the first sample in the aggregated object.  The
subsequent values are the values of the MO instance sampled
at the specified intervals for the specified number of times.
Note: The command generator will need to know the
      constituent MO instance and the sampling interval to
      correctly interpret TimeAggrMOValue.



 TOC 

145.3.  CompressedTimeAggrMOValue

This data type is used to model the compressed
TAgMOs.



 TOC 

146.  TN3270E-MIB (revision 1998-07-27 00:00)

This module defines a portion of the management information base (MIB) for managing TN3270E servers.



 TOC 

146.1.  SnaResourceName

The textual convention for defining an SNA resource
name. A fully qualified SNA resource name, consisting
of a 1 to 8 character network identifier (NetId), a
period ('.'), and a 1 to 8 character resource name
(ResName).

The NetId and ResName are constructed from the
uppercase letters 'A' - 'Z' and the numerics '0' - '9',
all encoded in ASCII, with the restriction that the
first character of each must be a letter.  Blanks are
not allowed.

Earlier versions of SNA permitted three additional
characters in NetIds and ResNames:  '#', '@', and '$'.
While this use of these characters has been retired,
a Management Station should still accept them for
backward compatibility.

Note: This Textual Convention is not subject to
internationalization, and does not use the character
encodings used by the Utf8String Textual Convention.



 TOC 

146.2.  Tn3270eTraceData

An octet string representing trace data from the
Telnet half of a TN3270E session, from the SNA half,
or from both.  The octet string contains a sequence
of trace elements, with the trace elements in the
string ordered from earliest to latest.

Each trace element has the following form:

        +---+---+----+----------------------+
        !length !type!data                  !
        +---+---+----+----------------------+
  where:

  length = two-octet length of the data portion of the
           trace element, not including the length and
           type octets

  type   = one-octet code point characterizing the data;
           defined values are:

           X'01' telnet PDU from the server to the client
           X'02' telnet PDU from the client to the server
           X'03' SNA data from the server to the SNA host
           X'04' SNA data from the SNA host to the server

  data   = initial part of a PDU.

It is implementation-dependent where the 'initial part of
a PDU' starts.  For SNA data, however, the starting point
SHOULD be the first byte of the TH.  For IP data the
starting point SHOULD be the first byte of the IP header.

It is left to implementations to determine how much of
each PDU to return in a trace element.

The zero-length string indicates that no trace
data is available.



 TOC 

147.  TOKENRING-STATION-SR-MIB (revision 1994-12-16 10:00)

The MIB module for managing source routes in end-stations on IEEE 802.5 Token Ring networks.



 TOC 

147.1.  SourceRoute

Represents a Source Route, containing an
embedded sequence of bridge and ring ID's,
as used by 802.5 Source Routing.



 TOC 

148.  TRANSPORT-ADDRESS-MIB (revision 2002-11-01 00:00)

This MIB module provides commonly used transport address definitions. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2002). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3419; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

148.1.  TransportDomain

A value that represents a transport domain.

Some possible values, such as transportDomainUdpIpv4, are
defined in this module.  Other possible values can be
defined in other MIB modules.



 TOC 

148.2.  TransportAddressType

A value that represents a transport domain. This is the
enumerated version of the transport domain registrations
in this MIB module. The enumerated values have the
following meaning:

unknown(0)     unknown transport address type
udpIpv4(1)     transportDomainUdpIpv4
udpIpv6(2)     transportDomainUdpIpv6
udpIpv4z(3)    transportDomainUdpIpv4z
udpIpv6z(4)    transportDomainUdpIpv6z
tcpIpv4(5)     transportDomainTcpIpv4
tcpIpv6(6)     transportDomainTcpIpv6
tcpIpv4z(7)    transportDomainTcpIpv4z



tcpIpv6z(8)    transportDomainTcpIpv6z
sctpIpv4(9)    transportDomainSctpIpv4
sctpIpv6(10)   transportDomainSctpIpv6
sctpIpv4z(11)  transportDomainSctpIpv4z
sctpIpv6z(12)  transportDomainSctpIpv6z
local(13)      transportDomainLocal
udpDns(14)     transportDomainUdpDns
tcpDns(15)     transportDomainTcpDns
sctpDns(16)    transportDomainSctpDns

This textual convention can be used to represent transport
domains in situations where a syntax of TransportDomain is
unwieldy (for example, when used as an index).

The usage of this textual convention implies that additional
transport domains can only be supported by updating this MIB
module. This extensibility restriction does not apply for the
TransportDomain textual convention which allows MIB authors
to define additional transport domains independently in
other MIB modules.



 TOC 

148.3.  TransportAddress

Denotes a generic transport address.

A TransportAddress value is always interpreted within the
context of a TransportAddressType or TransportDomain value.
Every usage of the TransportAddress textual convention MUST



specify the TransportAddressType or TransportDomain object
which provides the context. Furthermore, MIB authors SHOULD
define a separate TransportAddressType or TransportDomain
object for each TransportAddress object. It is suggested that
the TransportAddressType or TransportDomain is logically
registered before the object(s) which use the
TransportAddress textual convention if they appear in the
same logical row.

The value of a TransportAddress object must always be
consistent with the value of the associated
TransportAddressType or TransportDomain object. Attempts
to set a TransportAddress object to a value which is
inconsistent with the associated TransportAddressType or
TransportDomain must fail with an inconsistentValue error.

When this textual convention is used as a syntax of an
index object, there may be issues with the limit of 128
sub-identifiers specified in SMIv2, STD 58. In this case,
the OBJECT-TYPE declaration MUST include a 'SIZE' clause
to limit the number of potential instance sub-identifiers.



 TOC 

148.4.  TransportAddressIPv4

Represents a transport address consisting of an IPv4
address and a port number (as used for example by UDP,
TCP and SCTP):

 octets       contents         encoding
  1-4         IPv4 address     network-byte order
  5-6         port number      network-byte order

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions since it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or
in conjunction with TransportAddressType or TransportDomain
as a pair.



 TOC 

148.5.  TransportAddressIPv6

Represents a transport address consisting of an IPv6
address and a port number (as used for example by UDP,



TCP and SCTP):

 octets       contents         encoding
  1-16        IPv6 address     network-byte order
 17-18        port number      network-byte order

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions since it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or
in conjunction with TransportAddressType or TransportDomain
as a pair.



 TOC 

148.6.  TransportAddressIPv4z

Represents a transport address consisting of an IPv4
address, a zone index and a port number (as used for
example by UDP, TCP and SCTP):

 octets       contents         encoding
  1-4         IPv4 address     network-byte order
  5-8         zone index       network-byte order
  9-10        port number      network-byte order

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions since it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or
in conjunction with TransportAddressType or TransportDomain
as a pair.



 TOC 

148.7.  TransportAddressIPv6z

Represents a transport address consisting of an IPv6
address, a zone index and a port number (as used for
example by UDP, TCP and SCTP):

 octets       contents         encoding
  1-16        IPv6 address     network-byte order
 17-20        zone index       network-byte order
 21-22        port number      network-byte order

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions since it restricts addresses to a specific format.



However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or
in conjunction with TransportAddressType or TransportDomain
as a pair.



 TOC 

148.8.  TransportAddressLocal

Represents a POSIX Local IPC transport address:

octets       contents                   encoding
 all         POSIX Local IPC address    string

The Posix Local IPC transport domain subsumes UNIX domain
sockets.

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions since it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or
in conjunction with TransportAddressType or TransportDomain
as a pair.

When this textual convention is used as a syntax of an
index object, there may be issues with the limit of 128
sub-identifiers specified in SMIv2, STD 58. In this case,
the OBJECT-TYPE declaration MUST include a 'SIZE' clause
to limit the number of potential instance sub-identifiers.



 TOC 

148.9.  TransportAddressDns

Represents a DNS domain name followed by a colon ':'
(ASCII character 0x3A) and a port number in ASCII.
The name SHOULD be fully qualified whenever possible.

Values of this textual convention are not directly useable as
transport-layer addressing information, and require runtime
resolution. As such, applications that write them must be
prepared for handling errors if such values are not
supported, or cannot be resolved (if resolution occurs at the
time of the management operation).

The DESCRIPTION clause of TransportAddress objects that may



have TransportAddressDns values must fully describe how (and
when) such names are to be resolved to IP addresses and vice
versa.

This textual convention SHOULD NOT be used directly in object
definitions since it restricts addresses to a specific format.
However, if it is used, it MAY be used either on its own or
in conjunction with TransportAddressType or TransportDomain
as a pair.

When this textual convention is used as a syntax of an
index object, there may be issues with the limit of 128
sub-identifiers specified in SMIv2, STD 58. In this case,
the OBJECT-TYPE declaration MUST include a 'SIZE' clause
to limit the number of potential instance sub-identifiers.



 TOC 

149.  TRIP-TC-MIB (revision 2004-09-02 00:00)

Initial version of TRIP (Telephony Routing Over IP) MIB Textual Conventions module used by other TRIP-related MIB Modules. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3872, see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

149.1.  TripItad

The values for identifying the IP Telephony
Administrative Domain (ITAD).



 TOC 

149.2.  TripId

The TRIP Identifier uniquely identifies a LS within its
ITAD. It is a 4 octet unsigned integer that may, but not
necessarily, represent the IPv4 address of a Location
Server.  Where bytes 1-4 of the Unsigned32 represent
1-4 bytes of the IPv4 address in network-byte order. For
an IPv6 network, TripId will not represent the IPv6
address.



 TOC 

149.3.  TripAddressFamily

A type of address for a TRIP route. Address families
defined within this MIB module are:

Code              Address Family
1                 Decimal Routing Numbers
2                 PentaDecimal Routing Numbers
3                 E.164 Numbers
255               An other type of address family



 TOC 

149.4.  TripAppProtocol

The application protocol used for communication with TRIP
Location Servers. Protocols defined in this MIB Module
are:

Code              Protocol
1                 SIP
2                 H.323-H.225.0-Q.931
3                 H.323-H.225.0-RAS
4                 H.323-H.225.0-Annex-G
255               An other type of application protocol



 TOC 

149.5.  TripCommunityId

The range of legal values for a TRIP Community
Identifier.



 TOC 

149.6.  TripProtocolVersion

The version number of the TRIP protocol.



 TOC 

149.7.  TripSendReceiveMode

The operational mode of the TRIP application. Possible
values are:
   1 - Send Receive mode
   2 - Send only mode
   3 - Receive Only mode



 TOC 

150.  UPS-MIB (revision 1994-02-23 00:00)

The MIB module to describe Uninterruptible Power Supplies.



 TOC 

150.1.  PositiveInteger

This data type is a non-zero and non-negative value.



 TOC 

150.2.  NonNegativeInteger

This data type is a non-negative value.



 TOC 

151.  URI-TC-MIB (revision 2007-09-10 00:00)

This MIB module defines textual conventions for representing URIs, as defined by RFC 3986 STD 66.



 TOC 

151.1.  Uri

A Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) as defined by STD 66.

Objects using this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION MUST be in US-ASCII
encoding, and MUST be normalized as described by RFC 3986
Sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2.1, and 6.2.2.2.  All unnecessary
percent-encoding is removed, and all case-insensitive
characters are set to lowercase except for hexadecimal
digits, which are normalized to uppercase as described in
Section 6.2.2.1.

The purpose of this normalization is to help provide unique
URIs.  Note that this normalization is not sufficient to
provide uniqueness.  Two URIs that are textually distinct
after this normalization may still be equivalent.

Objects using this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION MAY restrict the
schemes that they permit.  For example, 'data:' and 'urn:'
schemes might not be appropriate.

A zero-length URI is not a valid URI.  This can be used to
express 'URI absent' where required, for example when used
as an index field.

Where this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION is used for an index field,
it MUST be subtyped to restrict its length.  There is an
absolute limit of 128 subids for an OID, and it is not
efficient to have OIDs whose length approaches this
limit.



 TOC 

151.2.  Uri255

A Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) as defined by STD 66.

Objects using this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION MUST be in US-ASCII
encoding, and MUST be normalized as described by RFC 3986
Sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2.1, and 6.2.2.2.  All unnecessary
percent-encoding is removed, and all case-insensitive



characters are set to lowercase except for hexadecimal
digits, which are normalized to uppercase as described in
Section 6.2.2.1.

The purpose of this normalization is to help provide unique
URIs.  Note that this normalization is not sufficient to
provide uniqueness.  Two URIs that are textually distinct
after this normalization may still be equivalent.

Objects using this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION MAY restrict the
schemes that they permit.  For example, 'data:' and 'urn:'
schemes might not be appropriate.

A zero-length URI is not a valid URI.  This can be used to
express 'URI absent' where required, for example when used
as an index field.

STD 66 URIs are of unlimited length.  Objects using this
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION impose a length limit on the URIs that
they can represent.  Where no length restriction is
required, objects SHOULD use the 'Uri' TEXTUAL-CONVENTION
instead.  Objects used as indices SHOULD subtype the 'Uri'
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION.



 TOC 

151.3.  Uri1024

A Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) as defined by STD 66.

Objects using this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION MUST be in US-ASCII
encoding, and MUST be normalized as described by RFC 3986
Sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2.1, and 6.2.2.2.  All unnecessary
percent-encoding is removed, and all case-insensitive
characters are set to lowercase except for hexadecimal
digits, which are normalized to uppercase as described in
Section 6.2.2.1.

The purpose of this normalization is to help provide unique
URIs.  Note that this normalization is not sufficient to
provide uniqueness.  Two URIs that are textually distinct
after this normalization may still be equivalent.

Objects using this TEXTUAL-CONVENTION MAY restrict the
schemes that they permit.  For example, 'data:' and 'urn:'
schemes might not be appropriate.



A zero-length URI is not a valid URI.  This can be used to
express 'URI absent' where required, for example when used
as an index field.

STD 66 URIs are of unlimited length.  Objects using this
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION impose a length limit on the URIs that
they can represent.  Where no length restriction is
required, objects SHOULD use the 'Uri' TEXTUAL-CONVENTION
instead.  Objects used as indices SHOULD subtype the 'Uri'
TEXTUAL-CONVENTION.



 TOC 

152.  UUID-TC-MIB (revision 2013-04-05 00:00)

This MIB module defines TEXTUAL-CONVENTIONs representing Universally Unique IDentifiers (UUIDs). Copyright (c) 2013 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info).



 TOC 

152.1.  UUID

Universally Unique Identifier information.  The syntax must
conform to RFC 4122, Section 4.1.



 TOC 

152.2.  UUIDorZero

Universally Unique Identifier information.  The syntax must
conform to RFC 4122, Section 4.1.

The semantics of the value zero-length OCTET STRING are
object-specific and must therefore be defined as part of
the description of any object that uses this syntax.



 TOC 

153.  VDSL2-LINE-TC-MIB (revision 2009-09-30 00:00)

This MIB Module provides Textual Conventions to be used by the VDSL2-LINE-MIB module for the purpose of managing VDSL2, ADSL, ADSL2, and ADSL2+ lines. Copyright (c) 2009 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS 'AS IS' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 5650; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

153.1.  Xdsl2Unit

Identifies a transceiver as being either xTU-C or xTU-R.
A VDSL2/ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+ line consists of two
transceivers: an xTU-C and an xTU-R.
In the case of ADSL/ADSL2 and ADSL2+, those two transceivers are
also called atuc and atur.
In the case of VDSL2, those two transceivers are also called
vtuc and vtur.



Specified as an INTEGER, the two values are:
 xtuc(1)  -- central office transceiver
 xtur(2)  -- remote site transceiver



 TOC 

153.2.  Xdsl2Direction

Identifies the direction of a band in a VDSL2/ADSL/ADSL2/
ADSL2+ link.
The upstream direction is a transmission from the remote end
(xTU-R) towards the central office end (xTU-C).  The downstream
direction is a transmission from the xTU-C towards the xTU-R.
Specified as an INTEGER, the values are defined as
follows:



 TOC 

153.3.  Xdsl2Band

Identifies a band in a VDSL2/ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ link.
For a band in the upstream direction, transmission is from the
remote end (xTU-R) towards the central office end (xTU-C).
For a band in the downstream direction, transmission is from
the xTU-C towards the xTU-R.
For ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+, which use a single band in the
upstream direction and a single band
in the downstream direction,
the only relevant values are upstream(1) and downstream(2).
For VDSL2, which uses multiple bands in each transmission
direction, a band in the upstream direction is indicated by any
of us0(3), us1(5), us2(7), us3(9), or us4(11), and a band in
the downstream direction is indicated by any of ds1(4),
ds2(6), ds3(8), or ds4(10).
For VDSL2, the values upstream(1) and downstream(2) may be used
when there is a need to refer to the whole upstream or
downstream traffic (e.g., report the average signal-to-noise
ratio on any transmission direction).
Specified as an INTEGER, the values are defined as
follows:



 TOC 

153.4.  Xdsl2TransmissionModeType

A set of xDSL line transmission modes, with one bit
per mode.  The notes (F) and (L) denote Full-Rate and
Lite/splitterless, respectively:
   Bit 00 : Regional Std. (ANSI T1.413) (F)
   Bit 01 : Regional Std. (ETSI DTS/TM06006) (F)
   Bit 02 : G.992.1 POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 03 : G.992.1 POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 04 : G.992.1 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 05 : G.992.1 ISDN overlapped (F)
   Bit 06 : G.992.1 TCM-ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 07 : G.992.1 TCM-ISDN overlapped (F)
   Bit 08 : G.992.2 POTS non-overlapped (L)
   Bit 09 : G.992.2 POTS overlapped (L)
   Bit 10 : G.992.2 with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped (L)
   Bit 11 : G.992.2 with TCM-ISDN overlapped (L)
   Bit 12 : G.992.1 TCM-ISDN symmetric (F) --- not in G.997.1
   Bit 13-17: Reserved
   Bit 18 : G.992.3 POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 19 : G.992.3 POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 20 : G.992.3 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 21 : G.992.3 ISDN overlapped (F)
   Bit 22-23: Reserved
   Bit 24 : G.992.4 POTS non-overlapped (L)
   Bit 25 : G.992.4 POTS overlapped (L)
   Bit 26-27: Reserved
   Bit 28 : G.992.3 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 29 : G.992.3 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (F)



   Bit 30 : G.992.3 Annex J All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 31 : G.992.3 Annex J All-Digital overlapped (F)
   Bit 32 : G.992.4 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (L)
   Bit 33 : G.992.4 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (L)
   Bit 34 : G.992.3 Annex L POTS non-overlapped, mode 1,
                            wide U/S (F)
   Bit 35 : G.992.3 Annex L POTS non-overlapped, mode 2,
                            narrow U/S(F)
   Bit 36 : G.992.3 Annex L POTS overlapped, mode 3,
                            wide U/S (F)
   Bit 37 : G.992.3 Annex L POTS overlapped, mode 4,
                            narrow U/S (F)
   Bit 38 : G.992.3 Annex M POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 39 : G.992.3 Annex M POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 40 : G.992.5 POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 41 : G.992.5 POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 42 : G.992.5 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 43 : G.992.5 ISDN overlapped (F)
   Bit 44-45: Reserved
   Bit 46 : G.992.5 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 47 : G.992.5 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (F)
   Bit 48 : G.992.5 Annex J All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 49 : G.992.5 Annex J All-Digital overlapped (F)
   Bit 50 : G.992.5 Annex M POTS non-overlapped (F)
   Bit 51 : G.992.5 Annex M POTS overlapped (F)
   Bit 52-55: Reserved
   Bit 56 : G.993.2 Annex A
   Bit 57 : G.993.2 Annex B
   Bit 58 : G.993.2 Annex C
   Bit 59-63: Reserved



 TOC 

153.5.  Xdsl2RaMode

Specifies the rate adaptation behavior for the line.
The three possible behaviors are:
 manual (1)   - No Rate-Adaptation.  The initialization
                process attempts to synchronize to a
                specified rate.
 raInit (2)   - Rate-Adaptation during initialization process
                only, which attempts to synchronize to a rate
                between minimum and maximum specified values.
 dynamicRa (3)- Dynamic Rate-Adaptation during initialization
                process as well as during Showtime.



 TOC 

153.6.  Xdsl2InitResult

Specifies the result of full initialization attempt; the
six possible result values are:
 noFail (0)            - Successful initialization
 configError (1)       - Configuration failure
 configNotFeasible (2) - Configuration details not supported
 commFail (3)          - Communication failure
 noPeerAtu (4)         - Peer ATU not detected
 otherCause (5)        - Other initialization failure reason



 TOC 

153.7.  Xdsl2OperationModes

The VDSL2 management model specified includes an xDSL Mode
object that identifies an instance of xDSL Mode-Specific
PSD Configuration object in the xDSL Line Profile.  The



following classes of xDSL operating mode are defined.
The notes (F) and (L) denote Full-Rate and Lite/splitterless,
respectively:
+-------+--------------------------------------------------+
| Value |         xDSL operation mode description          |
+-------+--------------------------------------------------+
    1   - The default/generic PSD configuration.  Default
          configuration will be used when no other matching
          mode-specific configuration can be found.
    2   - Regional Std. (ANSI T1.413) (F)
    3   - Regional Std. (ETSI DTS/TM06006) (F)
    4   - G.992.1 POTS non-overlapped (F)
    5   - G.992.1 POTS overlapped (F)
    6   - G.992.1 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
    7   - G.992.1 ISDN overlapped (F)
    8   - G.992.1 TCM-ISDN non-overlapped (F)
    9   - G.992.1 TCM-ISDN overlapped (F)
   10   - G.992.2 POTS non-overlapped (L)
   11   - G.992.2 POTS overlapped (L)
   12   - G.992.2 with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped (L)
   13   - G.992.2 with TCM-ISDN overlapped (L)
   14   - G.992.1 TCM-ISDN symmetric (F) --- not in G.997.1
 15-19  - Unused. Reserved for future ITU-T specification.
   20   - G.992.3 POTS non-overlapped (F)
   21   - G.992.3 POTS overlapped (F)
   22   - G.992.3 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   23   - G.992.3 ISDN overlapped (F)
 24-25  - Unused. Reserved for future ITU-T specification.
   26   - G.992.4 POTS non-overlapped (L)
   27   - G.992.4 POTS overlapped (L)
 28-29  - Unused. Reserved for future ITU-T specification.
   30   - G.992.3 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   31   - G.992.3 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (F)
   32   - G.992.3 Annex J All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   33   - G.992.3 Annex J All-Digital overlapped (F)
   34   - G.992.4 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (L)
   35   - G.992.4 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (L)
   36   - G.992.3 Annex L POTS non-overlapped, mode 1,
          wide U/S (F)
   37   - G.992.3 Annex L POTS non-overlapped, mode 2,
          narrow U/S(F)
   38   - G.992.3 Annex L POTS overlapped, mode 3,
          wide U/S (F)
   39   - G.992.3 Annex L POTS overlapped, mode 4,
          narrow U/S (F)
   40   - G.992.3 Annex M POTS non-overlapped (F)
   41   - G.992.3 Annex M POTS overlapped (F)
   42   - G.992.5 POTS non-overlapped (F)



   43   - G.992.5 POTS overlapped (F)
   44   - G.992.5 ISDN non-overlapped (F)
   45   - G.992.5 ISDN overlapped (F)
 46-47  - Unused. Reserved for future ITU-T specification.
   48   - G.992.5 Annex I All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   49   - G.992.5 Annex I All-Digital overlapped (F)
   50   - G.992.5 Annex J All-Digital non-overlapped (F)
   51   - G.992.5 Annex J All-Digital overlapped (F)
   52   - G.992.5 Annex M POTS non-overlapped (F)
   53   - G.992.5 Annex M POTS overlapped (F)
 54-57  - Unused. Reserved for future ITU-T specification.
   58   - G.993.2 Annex A
   59   - G.993.2 Annex B
   60   - G.993.2 Annex C



 TOC 

153.8.  Xdsl2PowerMngState

Objects with this syntax uniquely identify each power
management state defined for the VDSL2/ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+
link.
In VDSL2, only L0 and L3 states are defined.
The possible values are:
  l0(1)              - L0: Full power.  Synchronized and
                           full transmission (i.e., Showtime).
  l1(2)              - L1: Low power with reduced net data rate
                           (for G.992.2 only).
  l2(3)              - L2: Low power with reduced net data rate
                           (for G.992.3, G.992.4 and G.992.5).
  l3(4)              - L3: Idle power management state / No
  power.



 TOC 

153.9.  Xdsl2ConfPmsForce

Objects with this syntax are configuration parameters
that specify the desired power management state transition
for the VDSL2/ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+ link.
In VDSL2, only L0 and L3 states are defined:
  l3toL0 (0)         - Perform a transition from L3 to L0
                       (Full power management state).



  l0toL2 (2)         - Perform a transition from L0 to L2
                       (Low power management state).
  l0orL2toL3 (3)     - Perform a transition into L3 (Idle
                       power management state).



 TOC 

153.10.  Xdsl2LinePmMode

Objects with this syntax are configuration parameters
that reference the power modes/states into which the xTU-C or
xTU-R may autonomously transit.

It is a BITS structure that allows control of the following
transit options:
 allowTransitionsToIdle (0)    - xTU may autonomously transit
                                 to idle (L3) state.
 allowTransitionsToLowPower (1)- xTU may autonomously transit
                                 to low-power (L1/L2)
                                 state.



 TOC 

153.11.  Xdsl2LineLdsf

Objects with this syntax are configuration parameters
that control the Loop Diagnostic mode for a VDSL2/ADSL/ADSL2
or ADSL2+ link.  The possible values are:
  inhibit (0)  - Inhibit Loop Diagnostic mode
  force   (1)  - Force/Initiate Loop Diagnostic mode



 TOC 

153.12.  Xdsl2LdsfResult

Possible failure reasons associated with performing
Dual Ended Loop Test (DELT) on a DSL line.
Possible values are:
 none        (1) - The default value in case LDSF was never
                   requested for the associated line.
 success     (2) - The recent command completed
                   successfully.
 inProgress  (3) - The Loop Diagnostics process is in
                   progress.
 unsupported (4) - The NE or the line card doesn't support
                   LDSF.
 cannotRun   (5) - The NE cannot initiate the command, due
                   to a nonspecific reason.
 aborted     (6) - The Loop Diagnostics process aborted.
 failed      (7) - The Loop Diagnostics process failed.
 illegalMode (8) - The NE cannot initiate the command, due
                   to the specific mode of the relevant
                   line.
 adminUp     (9) - The NE cannot initiate the command, as
                   the relevant line is administratively
                   'Up'.
 tableFull   (10)- The NE cannot initiate the command, due
                   to reaching the maximum number of rows
                   in the results table.
 noResources (11)- The NE cannot initiate the command, due
                   to lack of internal memory resources.



 TOC 

153.13.  Xdsl2LineBpsc

Objects with this syntax are configuration parameters
that control the bits per subcarrier measurement for a
VDSL2/ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+ link.  The possible values are:
  idle    (1)  - Idle state
  measure (2)  - Measure the bits per subcarrier



 TOC 

153.14.  Xdsl2BpscResult

Possible failure reasons associated with performing
a bits per subcarrier measurement on a DSL line.
Possible values are:

 none        (1) - The default value, in case a measurement
                   was never requested for the associated
                   line.
 success     (2) - The recent measurement request completed
                   successfully.
 inProgress  (3) - The bits per subcarrier measurement is
                   in progress.
 unsupported (4) - The bits per subcarrier request
                   mechanism is not supported.
 failed      (5) - The measurement request has failed and no
                   results are available.
 noResources (6) - The NE cannot initiate the command, due
                   to lack of internal memory resources.



 TOC 

153.15.  Xdsl2LineReset

This type is used to request a line reset to occur.
idle        (1) - This state indicates that there is
                  currently no request for a line reset.
reset       (2) - This state indicates that a line reset
                  request has been issued.



 TOC 

153.16.  Xdsl2LineProfiles

Objects with this syntax reference the list of
ITU-T G.993.2 implementation profiles supported by an
xTU, enabled on the VDSL2 line or active on that line.



 TOC 

153.17.  Xdsl2LineClassMask

VDSL2 PSD Mask Class.
The limit Power Spectral Density masks are grouped in
the following PSD mask classes:

Class 998     Annex A: D-32, D-48, D-64, D-128.
Class 997-M1c Annex B: 997-M1c-A-7.
Class 997-M1x Annex B: 997-M1x-M-8, 997-M1x-M.
Class 997-M2x Annex B: 997-M2x-M-8, 997-M2x-A, 997-M2x-M,
                       997E17-M2x-NUS0, 997E30-M2x-NUS0.
Class 998-M1x Annex B: 998-M1x-A, 998-M1x-B, 998-M1x-NUS0.
Class 998-M2x Annex B: 998-M2x-A, 998-M2x-M, 998-M2x-B,
                       998-M2x-NUS0, 998E17-M2x-NUS0,
                       998E17-M2x-NUS0-M, 998E30-M2x-NUS0,
                       998E30-M2x-NUS0-M.
Class 998ADE-M2x Annex B: Annex B: 998-M2x-A, 998-M2x-M,
                       998-M2x-B, 998-M2x-NUS0,
                       998ADE17-M2x-A, 998ADE17-M2x-B,
                       998ADE17-M2x-NUS0-M,
                       998ADE30-M2x-NUS0-A,
                       998ADE30-M2x-NUS0-M.
Class 998-B   Annex C: POTS-138b, POTS-276b per C.2.1.1
                       in G.993.2, TCM-ISDN per C.2.1.2
                       in G.993.2.
Class 998-CO  Annex C: POTS-138co, POTS-276co per C.2.1.1
                       in G.993.2.
Class HPE-M1  Annex B: HPE17-M1-NUS0, HPE30-M1-NUS0.



 TOC 

153.18.  Xdsl2LineLimitMask

The G.993.2 limit PSD mask for each class of profile.
The profiles are grouped in following profile classes:
- Class 8: Profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d.
- Class 12: Profiles 12a, 12b.
- Class 17: Profile 17a.
- Class 30: Profile 30a.



 TOC 

153.19.  Xdsl2LineUs0Disable

Indicates if US0 is disabled for each limit PSD mask.
The profiles are grouped in following profile classes:
- Class 8: Profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d.



- Class 12: Profiles 12a, 12b.
- Class 17: Profile 17a.
- Class 30: Profile 30a.



 TOC 

153.20.  Xdsl2LineUs0Mask

The US0 PSD masks to be allowed by the near-end xTU on
the line.  This parameter is only defined for G.993.2 Annex A.
It is represented as a bitmap (0 if not allowed and 1 if
allowed) with the following definitions.



 TOC 

153.21.  Xdsl2SymbolProtection

This type specifies the minimum impulse noise protection
for the bearer channel if it is transported over DMT symbols
with a subcarrier spacing of 4.3125 kHz.
The possible values are:
'noProtection' (i.e., INP not required), 'halfSymbol' (i.e., INP
length is 1/2 symbol), and 1-16 symbols in steps of 1
symbol.



 TOC 

153.22.  Xdsl2SymbolProtection8

This type specifies the minimum impulse noise protection
for the bearer channel if it is transported over DMT symbols
with a subcarrier spacing of 8.625 kHz.
The possible values are:
'noProtection' (i.e., INP not required) and 1-16 symbols in
steps of 1 symbol.



 TOC 

153.23.  Xdsl2MaxBer

Objects with this syntax are configuration parameters
that reference the maximum Bit Error Rate (BER).
The possible values are:
  eminus3 (1)  - Maximum BER=E^-3
  eminus5 (2)  - Maximum BER=E^-5
  eminus7 (3)  - Maximum BER=E^-7



 TOC 

153.24.  Xdsl2ChInitPolicy

This syntax serves for channel configuration parameters
that reference the channel initialization policy.
The possible values are:
  policy0 (1) - Policy 0 according to the applicable standard.
  policy1 (2) - Policy 1 according to the applicable
                standard.



 TOC 

153.25.  Xdsl2ScMaskDs

Each one of the 4096 bits in this OCTET STRING array
represents the corresponding subcarrier in the downstream
direction.
A bit value of one indicates that a subcarrier is masked.



 TOC 

153.26.  Xdsl2ScMaskUs

Each one of the 4096 bits in this OCTET STRING array
represents the corresponding subcarrier in the upstream
direction.  A bit value of one indicates that a subcarrier
is masked.



 TOC 

153.27.  Xdsl2CarMask

This type defines an array of bands.  Each band is
represented by 4 octets and there is a maximum of 32 bands
allowed.
Each band consists of a 16-bit start subcarrier index followed by
a 16-bit stop subcarrier index.
The subcarrier index is an unsigned number in the range 0 to
NSC-1.



 TOC 

153.28.  Xdsl2RfiBands

This type defines a subset of downstream PSD mask
breakpoints used to notch radio frequency interference (RFI)
bands.
Each RFI band is represented by 4 octets: a 16-bit start
subcarrier index followed by a 16-bit stop subcarrier
index.
There is a maximum of 16 RFI bands allowed.
The subcarrier index is an unsigned number in the range 0 to
NSC-1.



 TOC 

153.29.  Xdsl2PsdMaskDs

This is a structure that represents up to 32 PSD mask
breakpoints.
Each breakpoint occupies 3 octets: The first
two octets hold the index of the subcarrier associated with the
breakpoint.  The third octet holds the PSD reduction at the
breakpoint from 0 (0 dBm/Hz) to 255 (-127.5 dBm/Hz) using units
of 0.5 dBm/Hz.
The subcarrier index is an unsigned number in the range 0 to
NSCds-1.



 TOC 

153.30.  Xdsl2PsdMaskUs

This is a structure that represents up to 16 PSD mask
breakpoints.
Each breakpoint occupies 3 octets: The first two octets hold the
index of the subcarrier associated with the breakpoint.  The
third octet holds the PSD reduction at the breakpoint from 0
(0 dBm/Hz) to 255 (-127.5 dBm/Hz) using units of
0.5 dBm/Hz.
The subcarrier index is an unsigned number in the range 0 to
NSCus-1.



 TOC 

153.31.  Xdsl2Tssi

This is a structure that represents up to 32 transmit
spectrum shaping (TSSi) breakpoints.
Each breakpoint is a pair of values occupying 3 octets with the



following structure:
First 2 octets - Index of the subcarrier used in the context of
                 the breakpoint.
Third octet    - The shaping parameter at the breakpoint.
The shaping parameter value is in the range 0 to 126 (units of
-0.5 dB).  The special value 127 indicates that the subcarrier is
not transmitted.
The subcarrier index is an unsigned number in the range 0 to
NSC-1.



 TOC 

153.32.  Xdsl2LastTransmittedState

This parameter represents the last successful transmitted
initialization state in the last full initialization performed
on the line.  States are per the specific xDSL technology and
are numbered from 0 (if G.994.1 is used) or 1 (if G.994.1 is
not used) up to Showtime.



 TOC 

153.33.  Xdsl2LineStatus

Objects with this syntax are status parameters
that reflect the failure status for a given endpoint of a
VDSL2/ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+ link.

This BITS structure can report the following failures:

 noDefect (0)      - This bit position positively reports



                     that no defect or failure exist.
 lossOfFraming (1) - Loss of frame synchronization.
 lossOfSignal (2)  - Loss of signal.
 lossOfPower (3)   - Loss of power.  Usually this failure may
                     be reported for CPE units only.
 initFailure (4)   - Recent initialization process failed.
                     Never active on xTU-R.



 TOC 

153.34.  Xdsl2ChInpReport

This type is used to indicate the method used to compute the
Actual Impulse Noise Protection (ACTINP).  If set to
'inpComputedUsingFormula', the ACTINP is computed
according to the INP_no_erasure formula (9.6/G.993.2).
If set to 'inpEstimatedByXtur', the ACTINP is the value
estimated by the xTU receiver.
 inpComputedUsingFormula (1) - ACTINP computed using
                               INP_no_erasure formula.
 inpEstimatedByXtur (2)      - ACTINP estimated by
                               the xTU receiver.



 TOC 

153.35.  Xdsl2ChAtmStatus

Objects with this syntax are status parameters that
reflect the failure status for the Transmission Convergence (TC)
layer of a given ATM interface (data path over a VDSL2/ADSL/
ADSL2 or ADSL2+ link).

This BITS structure can report the following failures:
 noDefect (0)             - This bit position positively
                            reports that no defect or failure
                            exists.
 noCellDelineation (1)    - The link was successfully
                            initialized, but cell delineation
                            was never acquired on the



                            associated ATM data path.
 lossOfCellDelineation (2)- Loss of cell delineation on the
                            associated ATM data path.



 TOC 

153.36.  Xdsl2ChPtmStatus

Objects with this syntax are status parameters that
reflect the failure status for a given PTM interface (packet
data path over a VDSL2/ADSL/ADSL2 or ADSL2+ link).

This BITS structure can report the following failures:
    noDefect (0)    - This bit position positively
                      reports that no defect or failure exists.
    outOfSync (1)   - Out of synchronization.



 TOC 

153.37.  Xdsl2UpboKLF

Defines the upstream power backoff force mode (UPBOKLF).
The three possible mode values are:
   auto(1)         - The VDSL Transceiver Unit (VTUs) will
                     autonomously determine the
                     electrical length.
   override(2)     - Forces the VTU-R to use the electrical
                     length, kl0, of the CO-MIB (UPBOKL) to
                     compute the UPBO.
   disableUpbo(3)  - Disables UPBO such that UPBO is not
                     utilized.



 TOC 

153.38.  Xdsl2BandUs

Each value identifies a specific band in the upstream



transmission direction (excluding the US0 band.).
The possible values that identify a band are as follows:
   us1(5)          - Upstream band number 1 (US1).
   us2(7)          - Upstream band number 2 (US2).
   us3(9)          - Upstream band number 3 (US3).
   us4(11)         - Upstream band number 4 (US4).



 TOC 

153.39.  Xdsl2LinePsdMaskSelectUs

This type is used to define which upstream PSD mask is
enabled.  This type is used only for Annexes J and M of ITU-T
Recommendations G.992.3 and G.992.5.

adlu32Eu32 (1),   - ADLU-32 / EU-32
adlu36Eu36 (2),   - ADLU-36 / EU-36
adlu40Eu40 (3),   - ADLU-40 / EU-40
adlu44Eu44 (4),   - ADLU-44 / EU-44
adlu48Eu48 (5),   - ADLU-48 / EU-48
adlu52Eu52 (6),   - ADLU-52 / EU-52
adlu56Eu56 (7),   - ADLU-56 / EU-56
adlu60Eu60 (8),   - ADLU-60 / EU-60
adlu64Eu64 (9)    - ADLU-64 / EU-64



 TOC 

153.40.  Xdsl2LineCeFlag

This type is used to enable the use of the optional
cyclic extension values.  If the bit is set to '1', the optional
cyclic extension values may be used.  Otherwise, the cyclic
extension shall be forced to the mandatory length (5N/32).



enableCyclicExtension (0) - Enable use of optional
                            Cyclic Extension values.



 TOC 

153.41.  Xdsl2LineSnrMode

This type is used to enable the transmitter-referred
virtual noise.  The value of 1, indicates that virtual
noise is disabled.  The value of 2, indicates that virtual
noise is enabled.

virtualNoiseDisabled (1) - virtual noise is disabled.
virtualNoiseEnabled (2)  - virtual noise is enabled.



 TOC 

153.42.  Xdsl2LineTxRefVnDs

This is a structure that represents up to 32 PSD mask
breakpoints.
Each breakpoint occupies 3 octets: The first two octets hold the
index of the subcarrier associated with the breakpoint.  The
third octet holds the PSD reduction at the breakpoint from 0
(-140 dBm/Hz) to 200 (-40 dBm/Hz) using units of 0.5 dBm/Hz.
A special value of 255 indicates a noise level of 0 W/Hz.
The subcarrier index is an unsigned number in the range 0 to
NSCds-1.



 TOC 

153.43.  Xdsl2LineTxRefVnUs

This is a structure that represents up to 16 PSD mask
breakpoints.
Each breakpoint occupies 3 octets: The first two octets hold the
index of the subcarrier associated with the breakpoint.  The
third octet holds the PSD reduction at the breakpoint from 0
(-140 dBm/Hz) to 200 (-40 dBm/Hz) using units of 0.5 dBm/Hz.
A special value of 255 indicates a noise level of 0 W/Hz.
The subcarrier index is an unsigned number in the range 0 to
NSCus-1.



 TOC 

153.44.  Xdsl2BitsAlloc

This type specifies an array of nibbles, where each nibble
indicates the bits allocation for a subcarrier.
Each nibble has a value in the range 0 to 15 to indicate
the bits allocation.



 TOC 

153.45.  Xdsl2MrefPsdDs

Objects with this syntax are MEDLEY Reference PSD status
parameters in the downstream direction.  This is expressed as
the set of
breakpoints exchanged at initialization.
The OCTET STRING contains up to 48 pairs of values in the
following structure:
Octets 0-1 -- Index of the first subcarrier used in the
            context of a first breakpoint.
Octets 2-3 -- The PSD level for the subcarrier indicated
            in octets 0-1.
Octets 4-7 -- Same, for a second breakpoint
Octets 8-11 -- Same, for a third breakpoint
And so on until
Octets 188-191 -- Same, for a 48th breakpoint.
The subcarrier index is an unsigned number in the range 0
to NSCds-1.
The PSD level is an integer value in the 0 to 4095 range.  It is
represented in units of 0.1 dB offset from -140 dBm/Hz.



 TOC 

153.46.  Xdsl2MrefPsdUs

Objects with this syntax are MEDLEY Reference PSD status
parameters in the upstream direction.  This is expressed
as the set of
breakpoints exchanged at initialization.
The OCTET STRING contains up to 32 pairs of values in the
following structure:
Octets 0-1 -- Index of the first subcarrier used in the
            context of a first breakpoint.
Octets 2-3 -- The PSD level for the subcarrier indicated
            in octets 0-1.
Octets 4-7 -- Same, for a second breakpoint
Octets 8-11 -- Same, for a third breakpoint
And so on until



Octets 124-127 -- Same, for a 32nd breakpoint.
The subcarrier index is an unsigned number in the range 0
to NSCus-1.
The PSD level is an integer value in the 0 to 4095 range.  It is
represented in units of 0.1 dB offset from -140 dBm/Hz.



 TOC 

154.  VDSL-LINE-EXT-SCM-MIB (revision 2005-04-28 00:00)

The VDSL-LINE-MIB found in RFC 3728 defines objects for the management of a pair of VDSL transceivers at each end of the VDSL line. The VDSL-LINE-MIB configures and monitors the line code independent parameters (TC layer) of the VDSL line. This MIB module is an optional extension of the VDSL-LINE-MIB and defines objects for configuration and monitoring of the line code specific (LCS) elements (PMD layer) for VDSL lines using SCM coding. The objects in this extension MIB MUST NOT be used for VDSL lines using Multiple Carrier Modulation (MCM) line coding. If an object in this extension MIB is referenced by a line which does not use SCM, it has no effect on the operation of that line. Naming Conventions: Vtuc -- VDSL transceiver at near (Central) end of line Vtur -- VDSL transceiver at Remote end of line Vtu -- One of either Vtuc or Vtur Curr -- Current Atn -- Attenuation LCS -- Line Code Specific Max -- Maximum Mgn -- Margin PSD -- Power Spectral Density Rx -- Receive Snr -- Signal to Noise Ratio Tx -- Transmit Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4069: see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

154.1.  VdslSCMBandId

This data type is used as the syntax for the VDSL SCM Band
Identity.  Attributes with this syntax identify the SCM Band
referred to.  Specified as an INTEGER, the possible values
are:

optionalBand (1)  -- the optional Band range [25kHz - 138kHz]
firstDownstreamBand (2)  -- first Downstream Band
firstUpstreamBand (3)    -- first Upstream Band
secondDownstreamBand (4) -- second Downstream Band
secondUpstreamBand (5)   -- second Upstream Band
thirdDownstreamBand (6)  -- third Downstream Band
thirdUpstreamBand (7)    -- third Upstream Band



 TOC 

155.  VDSL-LINE-MIB (revision 2004-02-19 00:00)

The MIB module defining objects for the management of a pair of VDSL transceivers at each end of the VDSL line. Each such line has an entry in an ifTable which may include multiple transceiver lines. An agent may reside at either end of the VDSL line. However, the MIB is designed to require no management communication between them beyond that inherent in the low-level VDSL line protocol. The agent may monitor and control this protocol for its needs. VDSL lines may support optional Fast or Interleaved channels. If these are supported, additional entries corresponding to the supported channels must be created in the ifTable. Thus a VDSL line that supports both channels will have three entries in the ifTable, one for each physical, fast, and interleaved, whose ifType values are equal to vdsl(97), fast(125), and interleaved(124), respectively. The ifStackTable is used to represent the relationship between the entries. Naming Conventions: Vtuc -- (VTUC) transceiver at near (Central) end of line Vtur -- (VTUR) transceiver at Remote end of line Vtu -- One of either Vtuc or Vtur Curr -- Current Prev -- Previous Atn -- Attenuation ES -- Errored Second. SES -- Severely Errored Second UAS -- Unavailable Second LCS -- Line Code Specific Lof -- Loss of Frame Lol -- Loss of Link Los -- Loss of Signal Lpr -- Loss of Power xxxs -- Sum of Seconds in which xxx has occured (e.g., xxx = Lof, Los, Lpr, Lol) Max -- Maximum Mgn -- Margin Min -- Minimum Psd -- Power Spectral Density Snr -- Signal to Noise Ratio Tx -- Transmit Blks -- Blocks Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2004). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 3728: see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

155.1.  VdslLineCodingType

This data type is used as the syntax for the VDSL Line
Code.  Attributes with this syntax identify the line coding
used.  Specified as an INTEGER, the three values are:

other(1)  -- none of the following
mcm(2)    -- Multiple Carrier Modulation
scm(3)    -- Single Carrier Modulation



 TOC 

155.2.  VdslLineEntity

Identifies a transceiver as being either Vtuc or Vtur.
A VDSL line consists of two transceivers, a Vtuc and a
Vtur.  Attributes with this syntax reference the two sides
of a line.  Specified as an INTEGER, the two values are:

vtuc(1)  -- central site transceiver
vtur(2)  -- remote site transceiver



 TOC 

156.  VPN-TC-STD-MIB (revision 2005-11-15 00:00)

This MIB contains TCs for VPNs. Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2005). This version of this MIB module is part of RFC 4265; see the RFC itself for full legal notices.



 TOC 

156.1.  VPNId

The purpose of a VPN-ID is to uniquely identify a VPN.
The Global VPN Identifier format is:
3 octet VPN Authority, Organizationally Unique Identifier
followed by 4 octet VPN index identifying VPN according
to OUI



 TOC 

156.2.  VPNIdOrZero

This textual convention is an extension of the
VPNId textual convention that defines a non-zero-length
OCTET STRING to identify a physical entity.  This extension
permits the additional value of a zero-length OCTET STRING.



The semantics of the value zero-length OCTET STRING are
object-specific and must therefore be defined
as part of the description of any object that uses this
syntax.  Examples of usage of this extension are
situations where none or all VPN IDs need to be
referenced.



 TOC 

157.  VRRP-MIB (revision 2000-03-03 00:00)

This MIB describes objects used for managing Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) routers.



 TOC 

157.1.  VrId

A number which, along with an interface index (ifIndex),
serves to uniquely identify a virtual router on a given VRRP
router. A set of one or more associated addresses is assigned
to a VRID.



 TOC 

158.  VRRPV3-MIB (revision 2012-02-13 00:00)

This MIB describes objects used for managing Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol version 3 (VRRPv3). Copyright (c) 2012 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of the code. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted pursuant to, and subject to the license terms contained in, the Simplified BSD License set forth in Section 4.c of the IETF Trust's Legal Provisions Relating to IETF Documents (http://trustee.ietf.org/license-info). This version of the MIB module is part of RFC 6527. Please see the RFC for full legal notices.



 TOC 

158.1.  Vrrpv3VrIdTC

The value of the Virtual Router Identifier noted as
(VRID) in RFC 5798.  This, along with interface index
(ifIndex) and IP version, serves to uniquely identify
a virtual router on a given VRRP router.



 TOC 

159.  WWW-MIB (revision 1999-02-25 14:00)

This WWW service MIB module is applicable to services realized by a family of 'Document Transfer Protocols' (DTP). Examples of DTPs are HTTP and FTP.



 TOC 

159.1.  WwwRequestType

The WwwRequestType defines the textual identification of
request types used by a document transfer protocol. For
the proper values for a given DTP, refer to the protocol
mappings for that DTP.



 TOC 

159.2.  WwwResponseType

The WwwResponseType defines the different response values
used by document transfer protocols. For the proper values
for a given DTP, refer to the protocol mappings for that
DTP.



 TOC 

159.3.  WwwOperStatus

The operational status of a WWW service. 'down' indicates
that the service is not available. 'running' indicates
that the service is operational and available. 'halted'
indicates that the service is operational but not
available. 'congested' indicates that the service is
operational but no additional inbound associations can be
accommodated. 'restarting' indicates that the service is
currently unavailable but is in the process of restarting
and will be available soon.



 TOC 

159.4.  WwwDocName

The server relative name of a document. If the URL were
http://www.x.org/standards/search/search.cgi?string=test
then the value of this textual convention would resolve
to '/standards/search/search.cgi'. This textual convention
uses the character set for URIs as defined in RFC 2396
section 2.



 TOC 

160.  Security Considerations

None.



 TOC 

Author's Address